GOT2000 Series User`s Manual (Monitor)

GOT2000 Series User`s Manual (Monitor)
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GOT2000 Series
User's Manual (Monitor)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Always read these precautions before using this equipment.)
Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual
carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product.
In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
WARNING
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,
resulting in death or severe injury.
CAUTION
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,
resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.
Note that the
caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances. Always
follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.
Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
Some failures of the GOT, communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off.
Some failures of a touch panel may cause malfunction of the input objects such as a touch switch.
An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a
serious accident.Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident.
An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device
that displays and outputs serious warning.
Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
The GOT backlight failure disables the operation on the touch switch(s).
When the GOT backlight has a failure, the POWER LED blinks (orange/blue) and the display section
dims. In such a case, the input by the touch switch(s) is disabled.
The display section of the GOT is an analog-resistive type touch panel.
[GT27]
The GOT is multi-touch compliant; however, do not touch three points or more simultaneously on the
display section. Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
[GT23]
If you touch the display section simultaneously in two points or more,the switch that is located around
the center of the touched point, if any, may operate.Do not touch the display section in two points or
more simultaneously.Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
When programs or parameters of the controller (such as a PLC) that is monitored by the GOT are
changed, be sure to reset the GOT, or turn on the unit again after shutting off the power as soon as
possible. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
A-1
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
If a communication fault (including cable disconnection) occurs during monitoring on the GOT,
communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative.
For bus connection (GT27 Only) : The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes inoperative.
For other than bus connection : The GOT becomes inoperative.
A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the
system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT
communication fault will occur.
Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
CAUTION
Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main-circuit, power or other wiring.
Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart.
Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction.
Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver.
Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section.
When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network, the available IP address is restricted according
to the system configuration.
• When multiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network :
Do not set the IP address (192.168.3.18) for the GOTs and the controllers in the network.
• When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network :
Do not set the IP address (192.168.3.18) for the controllers except the GOT in the network.
Doing so can cause the IP address duplication.
The duplication can negatively affect the communication of the device with the IP address
(192.168.3.18).
The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system.
Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they
communicate with the GOT.
Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT.
When the GOT is subject to shock or vibration, or some colors appear on the screen of the GOT, the
screen of the GOT might flicker.
[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or
removing the GOT main unit to/from the panel.
Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.
Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or
removing the option unit onto/from the GOT. (GT27 Only)
A-2
[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual.
Not doing so can cause an electric shock, fire, malfunction or product damage or deterioration.
When mounting the GOT to the control panel, tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque
range (0.36 N·m to 0.48 N·m) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2.
Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the
GOT.
When loading the communication unit or option unit other than wireless LAN unit to the GOT, fit it to
the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range
(0.36 N•m to 0.48 N•m) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2.
When loading the wireless LAN unit to the GOT, fit it to the side interface of GOT and tighten the
mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.10 N•m to 0.14 N•m) with a Phillips-head
screwdriver No.1.
Under tightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a drop, failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
(GT27 Only)
When closing the USB environmental protection cover, fix the cover to the GOT by pushing the
[PUSH] mark on the latch firmly to comply with the protective structure.(GT27 Only)
Remove the protective film of the GOT.
When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film, the film may not be removed.In
addition, for the models equipped with the human sensor function, using the GOT with the protective
film may cause the human sensor not to function properly
Operate and store the GOT in environments without direct sunlight, high temperature, dust, humidity,
and vibrations.
When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals, use the protective cover for oil.Failure to
do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT.
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring.
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions.
CAUTION
Make sure to ground the FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section to the
protective ground conductors dedicated to the GOT with a ground resistance of 100 Ω or less.
When tightening the terminal screws, use a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2.
Terminal screws which are not to be used must be tightened always at torque 0.5 N·m to 0.8 N·m.
Otherwise there will be a danger of short circuit against the solderless terminals.
A-3
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque.
If any solderless spade terminal is used, it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes
loose, resulting in failure.
Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal
arrangement of the product.
Not doing so can cause a fire or failure.
Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range (0.5 N·m
to 0.8 N·m).
Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT.
Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT.
Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.
The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter, such as wire offcuts,
from entering the module during wiring.
Do not peel this label during wiring.Before starting system operation, be sure to peel this label
because of heat dissipation. (GT27 Only)
Plug the communication cable into the GOT interface or the connector of the connected unit, and
tighten the mounting screws and the terminal screws in the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
Plug the QnA/ACPU/Motion controller(A series) bus connection cable by inserting it into the
connector of the connected unit until it "clicks".
After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly.
Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.(GT27 Only)
[TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen (such as turning ON or
OFF bit device, changing the word device current value, changing the settings or current values of
the timer or counter, and changing the buffer memory current value), read through the manual
carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method.
During test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant
operation for the system.
False output or malfunction can cause an accident.
A-4
[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
When power is on, do not touch the terminals.
Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction.
Correctly connect the battery connector.
Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire.
Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injury and fire.
Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all
phases.
Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction.
Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
CAUTION
Do not disassemble or modify the unit.
Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury or fire.
Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly.
Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure.
The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped.
Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental
pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.
When unplugging the cable connected to the unit, do not hold and pull from the cable portion.
Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable
connection fault.
Do not drop the module or subject it to strong shock. A module damage may result.
Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit.
Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery.If the battery is
dropped or given an impact, dispose of it without using.
Before touching the unit, always touch grounded metals, etc. to discharge static electricity from
human body, etc.
Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.
Use the battery manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
Use of other batteries may cause a risk of fire or explosion.
Dispose of used battery promptly.
Keep away from children.Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.
Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply before replacing the battery or using the
dip switch of the terminating resistor.
Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction by static electricity.
A-5
[TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
For the analog-resistive film type touch panels, normally the adjustment is not required.
However, the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period
of use elapses.
When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, execute the touch
panel calibration.
When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, other object may be
activated.
This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction.
[PRECAUTIONS WHEN THE DATA STORAGE IS IN USE]
WARNING
If the SD card mounted on drive A of the GOT is removed while the GOT is accessed, processing for
the GOT might be interrupted about for 20 seconds.
The GOT cannot be operated during this period.
The functions that run in the background including a screen updating, alarm, logging, scripts, and
others are also interrupted.
Since this interruption makes an impact to the system operation, it might cause failure.After checking
the light off of SD card access LED, remove the SD card.
CAUTION
If the data storage mounted on the GOT is removed while the GOT is accessed, the data storage
and files are damaged.
To remove the data storage from the GOT, check that the access to the data storage in SD card
access LED, the system signal, and others is not performed.
When inserting a SD card into the GOT, make sure to close the SD card cover.
Failure to do so causes the data not to be read or written.
When removing the SD card from the GOT, make sure to support the SD card by hand as it may pop
out.
Failure to do so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.
When inserting a USB device into a USB interface of the GOT, make sure to insert the device into
the interface firmly.
Failure to do so may cause the USB device to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.
Before removing the USB device from the GOT, follow the procedure for removal on the utility screen
of the GOT.
After the successful completion dialog is displayed, remove the USB device by hand carefully.
Failure to do so may cause the USB device to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.
A-6
[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.
When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations.
(Refer to the GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Hardware) for details of the battery directive in the EU
member states.)
[TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations.
(Refer to the GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Hardware) for details of the regulated models.)
Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and/or relevant unit(s) in the manner they will not be
exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this
manual, as they are precision devices.
Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail.
Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation.
When fumigants that contain halogen materials such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine are
used for disinfecting and protecting wooden packaging from insects, they cause malfunction when
entering our products.
Please take necessary precautions to ensure that remaining materials from fumigant do not enter
our products, or treat packaging with methods other than fumigation (heat method).
Additionally, disinfect and protect wood from insects before packing products.
A-7
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi GOT).
Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in
advance to ensure correct use.
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................................................................A - 1
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................A - 8
CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................................................A - 8
MANUALS...............................................................................................................................................A - 15
QUICK REFERENCE .............................................................................................................................A - 16
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS ...........................................................................................A - 18
1. FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITER
1.1
Each function and related manuals ................................................................................................. 1 - 1
1.2
Required extended system application for the function ................................................................... 1 - 1
1.3
Displayable languages for each function ......................................................................................... 1 - 2
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.1
Features........................................................................................................................................... 2 - 1
2.2
Specifications................................................................................................................................... 2 - 4
2.2.1 System configuration ............................................................................................................ 2 - 4
2.2.2 Devices that can be monitored ............................................................................................. 2 - 7
2.2.3 Access range ...................................................................................................................... 2 - 11
2.2.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 2 - 11
2.3
Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen .............................................................................. 2 - 12
2.3.1 Displaying the monitor screen ............................................................................................ 2 - 12
2.3.2 Names of each section of monitor screen .......................................................................... 2 - 15
2.3.3 Display format of the monitor screen ([One large screen], [4 screens]) ............................. 2 - 16
2.3.4 Destination path setting ([Settings]).................................................................................... 2 - 17
2.3.5 Entering devices ([Register]) .............................................................................................. 2 - 20
2.3.6 Deleting a device ([Delete]) ................................................................................................ 2 - 22
2.3.7 Deleting devices at a time ([Delete all]) .............................................................................. 2 - 23
2.3.8 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])..................................................................... 2 - 24
2.3.9 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout])........................... 2 - 28
2.3.10 Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor]) .......................................................................... 2 - 29
2.3.11 File switching for comment display ([Change comment]) ................................................... 2 - 31
2.3.12 Screen transition (common operation)................................................................................ 2 - 32
2.4
Entry Monitor ................................................................................................................................. 2 - 33
2.5
Batch Monitor................................................................................................................................. 2 - 35
2.6
TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters) .............................................................................. 2 - 37
2.7
BM Monitor (Monitoring Buffer Memory)........................................................................................ 2 - 40
2.8
Error Messages and Corrective Actions ........................................................................................ 2 - 42
A-8
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.1
Features........................................................................................................................................... 3 - 1
3.2
Specifications................................................................................................................................... 3 - 4
3.2.1 System configuration ............................................................................................................ 3 - 4
3.2.2 Devices and range that can be monitored ............................................................................ 3 - 6
3.2.3 Access range ........................................................................................................................ 3 - 7
3.2.4 Precautions........................................................................................................................... 3 - 7
3.3
Display Operation ............................................................................................................................ 3 - 8
3.3.1 Setting ladder data storage location ................................................................................... 3 - 14
3.3.2 Reading comment files from data storage .......................................................................... 3 - 14
3.3.3 Program update check ....................................................................................................... 3 - 17
3.3.4 Setting the security ............................................................................................................. 3 - 18
3.4
Setting Display Format .................................................................................................................. 3 - 20
3.4.1 Switching languages of sequence programs ...................................................................... 3 - 20
3.4.2 Switching comment display mode ...................................................................................... 3 - 20
3.5
How to Operate PLC Read Screen................................................................................................ 3 - 21
3.5.1 Displayed contents ............................................................................................................. 3 - 21
3.5.2 Key functions ...................................................................................................................... 3 - 23
3.6
How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen ........................................................................................ 3 - 26
3.6.1 Displayed contents ............................................................................................................. 3 - 26
3.6.2 Key functions ...................................................................................................................... 3 - 27
3.6.3 Menus ................................................................................................................................. 3 - 27
3.7
How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen........................................................................................... 3 - 30
3.7.1 Displayed contents ............................................................................................................. 3 - 30
3.7.2 Key functions ...................................................................................................................... 3 - 38
3.7.3 Menus ................................................................................................................................. 3 - 39
3.8
Find/Replace Operation................................................................................................................. 3 - 49
3.8.1 Device/Contact/Coil search ................................................................................................ 3 - 49
3.8.2 Factor search...................................................................................................................... 3 - 51
3.8.3 Replace device ................................................................................................................... 3 - 53
3.8.4 Change open/close cantact ................................................................................................ 3 - 54
3.9
Test Operation ............................................................................................................................... 3 - 55
3.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action .......................................................................................... 3 - 57
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.1
Features........................................................................................................................................... 4 - 1
4.2
Specifications................................................................................................................................... 4 - 4
4.2.1 System configuration ............................................................................................................ 4 - 4
4.2.2 Devices and range that can be monitored ............................................................................ 4 - 6
4.2.3 Access range ........................................................................................................................ 4 - 7
4.2.4 Precautions........................................................................................................................... 4 - 7
4.3
Operations for Display ..................................................................................................................... 4 - 8
4.3.1 Setting SFC data storage location ...................................................................................... 4 - 11
4.3.2 Reading comment files from SD card ................................................................................. 4 - 12
4.3.3 Setting Display Format ....................................................................................................... 4 - 14
4.4
How to Operate PLC Read Screen................................................................................................ 4 - 16
4.4.1 Displayed contents ............................................................................................................. 4 - 16
A-9
4.4.2
Key functions ...................................................................................................................... 4 - 19
4.5
How to Operate Block List Screen ................................................................................................. 4 - 22
4.5.1 Displayed contents ............................................................................................................. 4 - 22
4.5.2 Key functions ...................................................................................................................... 4 - 23
4.5.3 Menus ................................................................................................................................. 4 - 23
4.6
How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen ............................................................................. 4 - 24
4.6.1 Displayed contents ............................................................................................................. 4 - 24
4.6.2 Key functions ...................................................................................................................... 4 - 27
4.6.3 Menus ................................................................................................................................. 4 - 28
4.7
Test Operation ............................................................................................................................... 4 - 37
4.8
Error Messages and Corrective Action .......................................................................................... 4 - 39
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.1
Features........................................................................................................................................... 5 - 1
5.2
Specifications................................................................................................................................... 5 - 3
5.2.1 System configuration ............................................................................................................ 5 - 3
5.2.2 Network information that can be monitored .......................................................................... 5 - 5
5.2.3 Access range ........................................................................................................................ 5 - 7
5.2.4 Precautions........................................................................................................................... 5 - 8
5.3
Operations for display .................................................................................................................... 5 - 10
5.4
Operation Procedures.................................................................................................................... 5 - 13
5.4.1 Line monitor ........................................................................................................................ 5 - 13
5.4.2 Detailed monitor.................................................................................................................. 5 - 16
5.4.3 Other station monitor .......................................................................................................... 5 - 25
5.4.4 Other station communication status monitor ...................................................................... 5 - 26
5.4.5 Other station data link status monitor ................................................................................. 5 - 27
5.4.6 Other station parameter status monitor .............................................................................. 5 - 28
5.4.7 Other station CPU operation status monitor ....................................................................... 5 - 29
5.4.8 Other station CPU RUN status monitor .............................................................................. 5 - 30
5.4.9 Other station loop status monitor........................................................................................ 5 - 31
5.5
Error Message and Corrective Action ............................................................................................ 5 - 32
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.1
Features........................................................................................................................................... 6 - 1
6.2
Specifications................................................................................................................................... 6 - 3
6.2.1 System configuration ............................................................................................................ 6 - 3
6.2.2 Access range ........................................................................................................................ 6 - 5
6.2.3 Precautions........................................................................................................................... 6 - 5
6.3
Operations for Display ..................................................................................................................... 6 - 6
6.4
Operation Procedures...................................................................................................................... 6 - 9
6.4.1 System configuration screen layout...................................................................................... 6 - 9
6.4.2 Setting method for other station monitoring........................................................................ 6 - 10
6.4.3 Monitor Menu screen .......................................................................................................... 6 - 12
6.4.4 Present Value Monitor screen ............................................................................................ 6 - 13
6.4.5 SFC Error History screen.................................................................................................... 6 - 14
6.4.6 Error List screen ................................................................................................................. 6 - 15
6.4.7 Error List Designated-Axis screen ...................................................................................... 6 - 17
6.4.8 Positioning Monitor screen ................................................................................................. 6 - 19
A - 10
6.4.9
6.4.10
6.4.11
6.4.12
6.5
Servo Monitor screen ......................................................................................................... 6 - 21
Present Value History Monitor screen ................................................................................ 6 - 22
Parameter setting screen ................................................................................................... 6 - 24
Hard copy output ................................................................................................................ 6 - 27
Error Messages and Corrective Action .......................................................................................... 6 - 28
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.1
Features........................................................................................................................................... 7 - 1
7.2
Specifications................................................................................................................................... 7 - 3
7.2.1 System configuration ............................................................................................................ 7 - 3
7.2.2 Access range ........................................................................................................................ 7 - 5
7.2.3 Precautions........................................................................................................................... 7 - 6
7.3
Operations for Display ..................................................................................................................... 7 - 7
7.4
Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen ................................................................... 7 - 10
7.4.1 Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions ................................... 7 - 10
7.4.2 Setting method for other station monitoring........................................................................ 7 - 12
7.4.3 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions .................................... 7 - 14
7.4.4 Composition of the unit detail info screen and key functions ............................................. 7 - 20
7.4.5 Composition of the intelligent module monitor screen and key functions ........................... 7 - 25
7.4.6 Specifying a module to monitor and selecting monitor menu ............................................. 7 - 26
7.4.7 Testing of the intelligent function module ........................................................................... 7 - 27
7.5
Intelligent Module Monitor Screens ............................................................................................... 7 - 29
7.6
Operating I/O Module Monitor Screen ........................................................................................... 7 - 30
7.6.1 Specifying the module to be monitored .............................................................................. 7 - 30
7.6.2 Monitor screen configuration and key functions ................................................................. 7 - 31
7.7
Error Messages and Corrective Action .......................................................................................... 7 - 32
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.1
Features........................................................................................................................................... 8 - 1
8.2
Specifications................................................................................................................................... 8 - 3
8.2.1 System configuration ............................................................................................................ 8 - 3
8.2.2 Access range ........................................................................................................................ 8 - 6
8.2.3 Precautions........................................................................................................................... 8 - 6
8.3
Operations of Display ...................................................................................................................... 8 - 7
8.4
Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens............................................................................. 8 - 10
8.4.1 Servo amplifier monitor....................................................................................................... 8 - 10
8.4.2 Setup .................................................................................................................................. 8 - 11
8.4.3 Monitor functions ................................................................................................................ 8 - 13
8.4.4 Alarm function..................................................................................................................... 8 - 15
8.4.5 Diagnostics function ........................................................................................................... 8 - 18
8.4.6 Parameter setting ............................................................................................................... 8 - 25
8.4.7 Test operations ................................................................................................................... 8 - 31
8.4.8 Hard copy output ................................................................................................................ 8 - 40
8.5
Error Messages and Corrective Action .......................................................................................... 8 - 41
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.1
Features........................................................................................................................................... 9 - 1
9.2
Specifications................................................................................................................................... 9 - 3
A - 11
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
System configuration ............................................................................................................ 9 - 3
Access range ...................................................................................................................... 9 - 11
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 9 - 11
9.3
Operations for Display ................................................................................................................... 9 - 15
9.3.1 Setting storage location for backup data ............................................................................ 9 - 18
9.3.2 Security and password ....................................................................................................... 9 - 19
9.3.3 Trigger backup.................................................................................................................... 9 - 25
9.3.4 Network batch backup/restore ............................................................................................ 9 - 32
9.4
Operation Procedures.................................................................................................................... 9 - 36
9.4.1 Main menu .......................................................................................................................... 9 - 36
9.4.2 Progress screen (backup)................................................................................................... 9 - 37
9.4.3 Data list (restoration) .......................................................................................................... 9 - 38
9.4.4 Progress screen (restoration) ............................................................................................. 9 - 39
9.4.5 Controller list screen ........................................................................................................... 9 - 40
9.4.6 Controller selection screen (Restoration) ........................................................................... 9 - 41
9.5
Backup Data Conversion Tool ....................................................................................................... 9 - 42
9.5.1 Operating environment ....................................................................................................... 9 - 42
9.5.2 How to install and start Backup Data Conversion Tool....................................................... 9 - 43
9.5.3 How to use Backup Data Conversion Tool ......................................................................... 9 - 43
9.5.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 9 - 45
9.6
Errors and Corrective Actions ........................................................................................................ 9 - 46
10. MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
10.1
Features......................................................................................................................................... 10 - 1
10.2
Specifications................................................................................................................................. 10 - 2
10.2.1 System configuration .......................................................................................................... 10 - 2
10.2.2 Access range ...................................................................................................................... 10 - 2
10.3
Operation for Display ..................................................................................................................... 10 - 3
10.4
Operation Procedures.................................................................................................................... 10 - 5
10.5
Error Messages and Corrective Action .......................................................................................... 10 - 7
11. LOG VIEWER
11.1
Features......................................................................................................................................... 11 - 1
11.2
Specifications................................................................................................................................. 11 - 2
11.2.1 System configuration .......................................................................................................... 11 - 2
11.2.2 GOT Side Settings.............................................................................................................. 11 - 3
11.2.3 Access range ...................................................................................................................... 11 - 3
11.2.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 11 - 4
11.3
Operations for Display ................................................................................................................... 11 - 6
11.3.1 Changing screens when view logged device is selected.................................................... 11 - 7
11.3.2 Changing screens when manage log file is selected.......................................................... 11 - 8
11.4
How to Operate Various Selection Screens .................................................................................. 11 - 9
11.4.1 How to operate target setting window................................................................................. 11 - 9
11.4.2 How to operate target selection screen ............................................................................ 11 - 10
11.4.3 How to operate Main Menu screen................................................................................... 11 - 14
11.4.4 How to operate file selection screen................................................................................. 11 - 15
11.5
How to Operate Data Log Viewer ................................................................................................ 11 - 18
11.5.1 Data log viewer screen ..................................................................................................... 11 - 18
A - 12
11.5.2
11.5.3
11.5.4
11.5.5
11.5.6
11.5.7
11.6
Legend display ................................................................................................................. 11 - 20
Upper and lower limit values setting ................................................................................. 11 - 21
Cursor position information............................................................................................... 11 - 22
Selecting data ................................................................................................................... 11 - 23
Searching data ................................................................................................................. 11 - 24
Help .................................................................................................................................. 11 - 25
Error Messages and Corrective Actions ...................................................................................... 11 - 26
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.1
Features......................................................................................................................................... 12 - 1
12.2
Specifications................................................................................................................................. 12 - 3
12.2.1 System configuration .......................................................................................................... 12 - 3
12.2.2 Devices and range that can be monitored .......................................................................... 12 - 4
12.2.3 Access range ...................................................................................................................... 12 - 4
12.2.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 12 - 5
12.3
Operation for Display ..................................................................................................................... 12 - 7
12.3.1 Display .............................................................................................................................. 12 - 12
12.3.2 Searching from the monitor screen .................................................................................. 12 - 14
12.4
Operation Procedure Common.................................................................................................... 12 - 16
12.4.1 Information and key functions displayed on the screen.................................................... 12 - 16
12.4.2 Hard copy output .............................................................................................................. 12 - 19
12.5
Switching the Display Format ...................................................................................................... 12 - 20
12.5.1 Display switching of 16-bit (one-word)/32-bit (two-word) modules ................................... 12 - 20
12.5.2 Display switching of decimal numbers/hexadecimal numbers.......................................... 12 - 21
12.5.3 Switching comment/no-comment display ......................................................................... 12 - 22
12.6
Search Operation......................................................................................................................... 12 - 23
12.6.1 Device search ................................................................................................................... 12 - 23
12.6.2 Contact point search......................................................................................................... 12 - 25
12.6.3 Coil search........................................................................................................................ 12 - 27
12.6.4 Step search ...................................................................................................................... 12 - 29
12.6.5 Ladder end search............................................................................................................ 12 - 30
12.6.6 Defect search ................................................................................................................... 12 - 31
12.7
Test Operation ............................................................................................................................. 12 - 35
12.7.1 Displaying the test menu screen ...................................................................................... 12 - 35
12.8
Error Messages and Corrective Action ........................................................................................ 12 - 36
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.1
Features......................................................................................................................................... 13 - 1
13.2
Specifications................................................................................................................................. 13 - 3
13.2.1 System configuration .......................................................................................................... 13 - 3
13.2.2 Access range ...................................................................................................................... 13 - 5
13.2.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 13 - 5
13.3
Operations for Display ................................................................................................................... 13 - 6
13.4
Operation Procedures.................................................................................................................... 13 - 9
13.4.1 Key arrangement and a list of key functions....................................................................... 13 - 9
13.4.2 Selection and operation of modes .................................................................................... 13 - 11
13.4.3 Sequence program display ............................................................................................... 13 - 12
13.4.4 Searching commands and devices................................................................................... 13 - 14
A - 13
13.4.5
13.4.6
13.4.7
13.4.8
13.4.9
13.4.10
13.4.11
13.4.12
13.4.13
13.4.14
13.5
Writing commands ............................................................................................................ 13 - 16
Changing operands, set values ........................................................................................ 13 - 19
Deleting commands .......................................................................................................... 13 - 20
Sequence program all clear.............................................................................................. 13 - 21
PLC diagnostics................................................................................................................ 13 - 22
Parameter setting ............................................................................................................. 13 - 24
Keywords .......................................................................................................................... 13 - 27
List monitor ....................................................................................................................... 13 - 29
Hard copy output .............................................................................................................. 13 - 31
Action for an incorrect key input ....................................................................................... 13 - 31
Error Messages and Corrective Actions ...................................................................................... 13 - 32
REVISIONS
WARRANTY
A - 14
MANUALS
The following table lists the manual relevant to this product.
Refer to each manual for any purpose.
 Screen creation software manuals
Manual name
Manual number
(Model code)
GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual
-
GT Works3 (GOT2000) Help
-
 Connection manuals
Manual name
Manual number
(Model code)
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Product) For GT Works3 Version1
SH-081197ENG
(1D7MJ8)
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non Mitsubishi Product 1) For GT Works3 Version1
SH-081198ENG
(1D7MJ9)
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non Mitsubishi Product 2) For GT Works3 Version1
SH-081199ENG
(1D7MK1)
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS, Products, Peripherals) For GT Works3 Version1
SH-081200ENG
(1D7MK2)
 GT SoftGOT2000 manuals
Manual name
Manual number
(Model code)
SH-081201ENG
(1D7MK3)
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual
 GOT2000 manuals
Manual name
Manual number
(Model code)
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)
SH-081194ENG
(1D7MJ5)
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
SH-081195ENG
(1D7MJ6)
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor)
SH-081196ENG
(1D7MJ7)
A - 15
QUICK REFERENCE
 Creating a project
Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3
Setting available functions on GT Designer3
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
Creating a screen displayed on the GOT
Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing
Setting details for figures and objects
Setting functions for the data collection or trigger action
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
Setting functions to use peripheral devices
Simulating a created project on a personal computer
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
 Connecting a controller to the GOT
Obtaining information of Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT
Connecting Mitsubishi products to the GOT
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for
Connecting multiple controllers to one GOT (Multi-channel function)
GT Works3 Version1 (ELE)
Establishing communication between a personal computer and a
controller via the GOT (FA transparent function)
Obtaining information of Non-Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT
• GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi
Products 1) for GT Works3 Version1
Connecting Non-Mitsubishi products to the GOT
Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT
Connecting peripheral devices including a barcode reader to the GOT
Connecting α2 with GOT
• GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi
Products 2) for GT Works3 Version1
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer,
MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3 Version1
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (α2 Connection) for GT
Works3 (ELE)
 Transferring data to the GOT
Writing data to the GOT
Reading data from the GOT
Verifying a editing project to a GOT project
A - 16
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
 Others
Obtaining specifications (including part names, external dimensions, and
options) of each GOT
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Hardware)
Installing the GOT
Operating the utility
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
Configuring the gateway function
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
Configuring the extended function and option function
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Monitor)
Using a personal computer as the GOT
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3
Version1 (ELE)
A - 17
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS
 GOT
Abbreviations and generic terms
GT27
Description
GT2712-S
GT2712-STBA, GT2712-STWA, GT2712-STBD, GT2712-STWD
GT2710-S
GT2710-STBA, GT2710-STBD
GT2710-V
GT2710-VTBA, GT2710-VTWA, GT2710-VTBD, GT2710-VTWD
GT2708-S
GT2708-STBA, GT2708-STBD
GT2708-V
GT2708-VTBA, GT2708-VTBD
GT2310-V
GT2310-VTBA, GT2310-VTBD
GT2308-V
GT2308-VTBA, GT2308-VTBD
GOT2000 Series
GT23
GT SoftGOT2000
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1
GOT1000 Series
GOT1000 Series
GOT900 Series
GOT-A900 Series, GOT-F900 Series
GOT800 Series
GOT-800 Series
 Communication unit
Abbreviations and generic terms
Description
Bus connection unit
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUSL,
GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
Serial communication unit
GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE
MELSECNET/H communication unit
GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13
CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit
GT15-J71GP23-SX
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit
GT15-J71GF13-T2
CC-Link communication unit
GT15-J61BT13
Wireless LAN Communication Unit
GT25-WLAN
Serial multi-drop connection unit
GT01-RS4-M
Connection conversion adapter
GT10-9PT5S
 Option unit
Abbreviations and generic terms
Printer unit
Description
GT15-PRN
Video input unit
GT27-V4-Z (A set of GT16M-V4 and GT27-IF1000)
RGB input unit
GT27-R2-Z (A set of GT16M-R2 and GT27-IF1000)
Video/RGB input unit
GT27-V4R1-Z (A set of GT16M-V4R1 and GT27-IF1000)
RGB output unit
GT27-ROUT-Z (A set of GT16M-ROUT and GT27-IF1000)
Video/RGB unit
A - 18
Multimedia unit
GT27-MMR-Z (A set of GT16M-MMR and GT27-IF1000)
Video signal conversion unit
GT27-IF1000
External I/O unit
GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR
Sound output unit
GT15-SOUT
 Option
Abbreviations and generic terms
SD card
Description
L1MEM-2GBSD, L1MEM-4GBSD
Battery
GT11-50BAT, GT11-BAT
For GT27
Protective sheet
GT25-12PSGC, GT25-10PSGC, GT25-08PSGC, GT25-12PSCC, GT2510PSCC, GT25-08PSCC, GT25-12PSCC-UC, GT25-10PSCC-UC, GT2508PSCC-UC
For GT23
GT25-10PSCC-UC, GT25-08PSCC-UC
Protective cover for oil
GT20-10PCO, GT20-08PCO
USB environmental protection cover
GT25-UCOV
Stand
GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND, GT15-60STAND
Attachment
GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96, GT1560ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77
 Software
(1) Software related to GOT
Abbreviations and generic terms
Description
GT Works3
SW1DNC-GTW3-J, SW1DND-GTW3-J,
SW1DNC-GTW3-E, SW1DND-GTW3-E,
SW1DND-GTW3-C
GT Designer3 Version1
Screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT2000/GOT1000 series
GT Designer3
Screen drawing software for GOT2000 series included in GT Works3
GT Designer3 (GOT2000)
GT Designer3 (GOT1000)
Screen drawing software for GOT1000 series included in GT Works3
GT Simulator3
Screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT2000/GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT SoftGOT2000
Monitoring software GT SoftGOT2000 series
GT Converter2
Data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Classic
Screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series
GT Designer2
Screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
DU/WIN
Screen drawing software FX-PCS-DU/WIN for GOT-F900 series
(2) Software related to GOT
Abbreviations and generic terms
Description
GT Works3
SW1DNC-GTW3-J, SW1DND-GTW3-J,
SW1DNC-GTW3-E, SW1DND-GTW3-E,
SW1DND-GTW3-C
GT Designer3 Version1
Screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT2000/GOT1000 series
GT Designer3
Screen drawing software for GOT2000 series included in GT Works3
GT Designer3 (GOT2000)
GT Designer3 (GOT1000)
Screen drawing software for GOT1000 series included in GT Works3
GT Simulator3
Screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT2000/GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT SoftGOT2000
Monitoring software GT SoftGOT2000 series
GT Converter2
Data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Classic
Screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series
GT Designer2
Screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
DU/WIN
Screen drawing software FX-PCS-DU/WIN for GOT-F900 series
A - 19
(3) Other software
Abbreviations and generic terms
Description
GX Works2
SW□DNC-GXW2-J (-JA, -JAZ) type programmable controller engineering
software
(□ indicates a version.)
GX Simulator2
GX Works2 with the simulation function
GX Simulator
SW□D5C-LLT-J (-JV) type ladder logic test tool function software package
(SW5D5C-LLT (-V) or later versions)
(□ indicates a version.)
GX Developer
SW□D5C-GPPW-J (-JV)/SW□D5F-GPPW (-V) type software package
(□ indicates a version.)
GX LogViewer
SW□DNN-VIEWER-J type software package
(□ indicates a version.)
PX Developer
SW□D5C-FBDQ-J type FBD software package for process control
(□ indicates a version.)
MT Works2
Motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2(SW□DNCMTW2-J)
(□ indicates a version.)
MT Developer
SW□RNC-GSV type integrated start-up support software for motion controller
Q series
(□ indicates a version.)
MR Configurator2
SW□DNC-MRC2-J type servo configuration software
(□ indicates a version.)
MR Configurator
MRZJW□-SETUP type servo configuration software
(□ indicates a version.)
FR Configurator
Inverter setup software (FR-SW□-SETUP-WJ)
(□ indicates a version.)
NC Configurator
CNC parameter setting support tool NC Configurator
FX Configurator-FP
Parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software packages for FX3U20SSC-H (SW□D5CFXSSCJ)
(□ indicates a version.)
FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool
FX3U-ENET-L type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5-FXENETL-J)
RT ToolBox2
Robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINJ)
MX Component
MX Component Version□(SW□D5C-ACT-J, SW□D5C-ACT-JA)
(□ indicates a version.)
MX Sheet
MX Sheet Version□(SW□D5C-SHEET-J, SW□D5C-SHEET-JA)
(□ indicates a version.)
QnUDVCPU·LCPU Logging Configuration Tool
QnUDVCPU·LCPU logging configuration tool (SW1DNN-LLUTL-J)
 License key (for GT SoftGOT1000)
Abbreviations and generic terms
License key
A - 20
Description
GT27-SGTKEY-U
 Others
Abbreviations and generic terms
IAI
Description
IAI Corporation
AZBIL
Azbil Corporation
OMRON
OMRON Corporation
KEYENCE
KEYENCE CORPORATION
KOYO EI
KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
JTEKT
JTEKT Corporation
SHARP
Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation
SHINKO
Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.
CHINO
CHINO CORPORATION
TOSHIBA
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
TOSHIBA MACHINE
TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD.
PANASONIC
Panasonic Corporation
PANASONIC IDS
Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.
HITACHI IES
Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
HITACHI
Hitachi, Ltd.
FUJI ELECTRIC
FUJI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
YASKAWA
YASKAWA Electric Corporation
YOKOGAWA
Yokogawa Electric Corporation
RKC
RKC INSTRUMENT INC.
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.
GE IP
GE Intelligent Platforms KK
LS IS
LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.
SCHNEIDER
Schneider Electric SA
SICK
SICK AG
SIEMENS
Siemens AG
PLC
Programmable controller manufactured by each corporation
Control equipment
Control equipment manufactured by each corporation
Temperature controller
Temperature controller manufactured by each corporation
Indicating controller
Indicating controller manufactured by each corporation
Controller
Controller manufactured by each corporation
A - 21
A - 22
1
FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITER
FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITOR
1.
1.1 Each function and related manuals
Functions
Related manuals
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
Device monitor
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
Sequence program monitor(Ladder, SFC)
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
Network monitor
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
Q Motion monitor
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
Intelligent unit monitor
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
Servo amplifier monitor
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
Backup/Restore
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
LOG Viewer
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
FX Ladder monitor
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
FX List editer
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
1.2 Required extended system application for the
function
Required extended system application for the function, refer to the following.
Required advanced system application name
Function name
Device monitor
Device monitor
Sequence program monitor
• Sequence program monitor (Common)
Sequence program moniotr (Ladder)
GOT Platform Library
GOT Function Expansion Library
Sequence program monitor
• Sequence program monitor (SFC)
Sequence program monitor (SFC)
GOT Platform Library
GOT Function Expansion Library
Network monitor
Network monitor
Q Motion monitor
Q Motion monitor
Intelligent module monitor
Intelligent module monitor
Servo amplifier monitor
Servo amplifier monitor
backup/restore
backup/restore
1. FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITER
1.1 Each function and related manuals
1-1
Required advanced system application name
Function name
Log Viewer
Log Viewer
FX Ladder Monitor
FX Ladder Monitor
FX List Editer
FX List Editer
1.3 Displayable languages for each function
Languages available for each function are shown in the following table.
○:Displayed ×:Not displayed Eng.:Displayed in English
Japanese
English
Chinese
(Simplified)
Chinese
(Traditinal)
Korean
Utility function
○
○
○
○
○
Device monitor
○
○
○
○
○
File name, Title, Comment, Note,
Statement
○
○
○
○
○
Over than the above
○
○
×
×
○*1
Sequence program monitor (SFC)
○
○
○
○
○
Network monitor
○
○
○
○
○
Q Motion monitor
○
○
Eng.
Eng.
Eng.
Function
Sequence program monitor (Ladder)
Intelligent module montor
○
○
Eng.
Eng.
Eng.
Servo amplifier monitor
○
○
Eng.
Eng.
Eng.
Backup/Restore
○
○
○
○
○
Log viewer
○
○
○
○
○
FX ladder monitor
○
○
×
×
×
FX list editer
○
○
○
○
○
For further information, see the following:
3.4.1 Switching languages of sequence programs
1-2
1. FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITER
1.3 Displayable languages for each function
2.
DEVICE MONITOR
2.1 Features
The device monitor function is capable of monitoring and changing the devices of a PLC CPU or an intelligent module.
It is intended to troubleshoot the system and to streamline maintenance operations.
■ . Any device on four dedicated screens can be monitored.
The device monitor function comprises four monitors: entry monitor, batch monitor, T/C monitor, and BM monitor. You
can monitor any device according to the application.
(1) Entry Monitor
Monitors the devices registered by the user.
2.4 Entry Monitor
(2) Batch Monitor
Monitors the devices starting from the one specified by the user in a batch.
2.5 Batch Monitor
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.1 Features
2-1
DEVICE MONITOR
2
(3) TC (timer, counter) monitor
Monitors the current values, set values, contacts, and coils of timers, retentive timers, and counters of the PLC
CPU in a batch.
2.6 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters)
(4) BM (buffer memory) monitor
Monitors the buffer memories of the intelligent module in a batch.
2.7 BM Monitor (Monitoring Buffer Memory)
■ . The full mode and the quad mode can be switched
The full mode and the quad mode can be switched using the screen switching button as needed.
The GOT in the full mode displays one monitor screen to display many devices at once.
The GOT in the quad mode divides one screen into four windows to display four monitor screens.
2.3.3 Display format of the monitor screen ([One large screen], [4 screens])
The full mode
and the quad
mode can be
switched.
2-2
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.1 Features
■ . Device values can be changed by the test operation.
The following values can be changed by the test operation.
• Current values of word devices and bit devices
• Current values and set values of timers, counters, and retentive timers
• Current values of buffer memories
2
■ . Switching the display format and displaying device comments
The display format of device values can be switched among binary, decimal, and hexadecimal formats.
Device comments can be displayed on the entry monitor, batch monitor, and TC monitor.
2.3.9 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout])
■ . Other stations can be monitored.
You can monitor other stations in the data link system, network system, and CC-Link system containing the GOT (or
GOT-connected station).
For the details of the connection types that can be monitored, refer to the following.
2.2.1 System configuration
■ . Switching the display language and multiple-language expansion
Monitor screens are displayed with the language set in the function setting of the utility.
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.1 Features
2-3
DEVICE MONITOR
2.3.8 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])
2.2 Specifications
2.2.1 System configuration
2.2.2 Devices that can be monitored
2.2.3 Access range
2.2.4 Precautions
2.2.1
System configuration
This section describes the names of controllers and connection types that can be monitored using the device monitor
function.
For the details of the communication units cables used for each connection type, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Product) For GT Works3 Version1
■ . Target controller
Controller
QCPU (Q mode)
C Controller module
QSCPU*1
LCPU
QnACPU*2
FXCPU*3
Motion controller CPU (Q series)*3
MELDAS C6/C64
Robot controller (CRnQ-700, CRnD-700)
MELDAS C70
The GOT cannot write data to devices in the QSCPU. (The test operation is not available.)
If the number in the DATE column on the rating plate is earlier than 9707B, set values of timers, counters, and retentive timers cannot
be monitored.
Buffer memories of the following CPUs cannot be monitored.
• FX1, FX2
• Q172CPU, Q173CPU
2-4
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.2 Specifications
■ . Connection type
The device monitor function can be used for the following connection types.
○ : Available, ×: Not available
Controller
Computer
link
connection
Ethernet
connectio
n
CC-Link IE Controller
Network connection
CC-Link IE Field
Network
connection
CC-Link
connection
ID*1
G4*2
Basic model
QCPU
○
○
○
○
×
○
○
High Performance
model QCPU
○
○
○
○
×
○
○
Process CPU
○
○
○
○
×
○
○
Redundant CPU
(main base)
○
×
○
○
×
○
○
Redundant CPU
(extension base)
×
○
○
×
×
○
○
Universal model
QCPU
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
C Controller module
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
QSCPU
×
×
○
○
×
×
×
QCPU (Q mode)
Device monitor
Direct CPU
connection
LCPU
○
○
○
×
○
○
○
QnACPU
○
○
○
×
×
○
×
Motion controller (Q series)
○
○
○
○*3
○*4
○
○
CNC C70
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
MELDAS C6/C64
CRnQ-700
○
×
○
×
×
○
×
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
×
○
×
×
×
×
○
×
○*5
×
×
×
×
Robot controller
CRnD-700
FXCPU
The GOT is connected as an intelligent device station.
Connected to the CC-Link system via the AJ65BT-G4-S3 or AJ65BT-R2N.
Not available for the following models.
• Q172CPU, Q173CPU
• Q172CPUN, Q173CPUN
• Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU
Only available for the following models.
• Q170MCPU(-S1)
• Q170MSCPU(-S1)
Only available for FX3U(C).
■ . Required system applications
To use the device monitor function, the following system applications must be installed to the GOT.
• Device monitor
• GOT Platform Library
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.2 Specifications
2-5
2
DEVICE MONITOR
Function
■ . Required hardware
To display device comments on the device monitor, the data storage such as a SD card or USB memory is required.
Storing comment files used for the sequence program monitor into the data storage enables displaying the device
comments on monitor screens.
Comment files in a GX Developer-format project also can be used for displaying device comments.
In this case, store the comment files into the data storage as shown below.
SEQCMNT
CHxx: "xx" indicates a channel No. (01 to 04)
NETxxx: "xxx" indicates a network No. (000 to 239)
STxxx: "xxx" indicates a station number.
(000 to 064, 255 (host station))
CPUxx: "xx" indicates a CPU No.
(00 to 04)
SJIS
Project folder of GX Developer
ASCII
Resources
GB
Others
Comment files
xxxxxxxx.WCD
Store each file into
the folder whose name
and the character code
of the file to be stored
correspond.
Big5
KS
xxxxxxxx.WCD
2-6
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.2 Specifications
2.2.2
Devices that can be monitored
2
Devices that can be monitored differ depending on the monitor type and the controller used.
■2. Batch monitor
■3. TC monitor
■4. BM monitor
■5. Test operation
■ . Entry Monitor
The following lists the devices that can be monitored on the entry monitor.
(1) Bit device
○ : Available, ×: Not available
QCPU (Q
mode)
C
Controlle
r module
LCPU
Input (X)
○
○
Output (Y)
○
Internal relay (M)
○
Device
Motion controller
(Q series)
CNC C70,
MELDAS C6/
C64
CRnQ-700
CRnD-700
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
×
○
QnAC
PU
QSCPU
○
○
○
○
○
○
Robot controller
FXCPU
○
Latch relay (L)
○
×
○
○
×
○
○
×
×
×
Annunciator (F)
○
×
○
○
○
○
○
×
×
×
Link relay (B)
○
○*1
○
○
○
○
○
×
×
×
Special relay (SM)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
Special relay for link (SB)
○
×
○
○
○
×
×
×
×
×
GOT bit register (GB)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Only Q24DHCCPU-V can be monitored.
(2) Word device
○ : Available, ×: Not available
Device
QCPU (Q
mode)
C
Controlle
r module
LCPU
QnAC
PU
QSCPU
Motion controller
(Q series)
CNC C70,
MELDAS C6/
C64
Robot controller
FXCPU
CRnQ-700
CRnD-700
Data register (D)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Special data register (SD)
○
○
○
○
○
×
○
○
○
×
Link register (W)
○
○*1
○
○
○
○
○
×
×
×
Timer (current value) (TN)
○
×
○
○
○
×
○
×
×
○
Counter (current value) (CN)
○
×
○
○
○
×
○
×
×
○
Retentive timer (current
value) (SN)
○
×
○
○
○
×
×
×
×
×
Link special register (SW)
○
×
○
○
○
×
○
×
×
×
File register (R)
○
×
○
○
×
×
○
×
×
×
Extension file register (ZR)
○
×
○
○
×
×
×
×
×
×
Index register (Z)
○
×
○
○
×
×
○
×
×
×
Link register (for writing)
(Ww)
○*2
○*2
○*2
○*2
×
○*2
○*2
○*2
×
×
Link register (for reading)
(Wr)
○*2
○*2
○*2
○*2
×
○*2
○*2
○*2
×
×
Motion device (#)
×
×
×
×
×
○
×
×
×
×
GOT data register (GD)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
GOT special register (GB)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Multiple CPU high speed
transmission memory (U3E1
to U3E3)
×
○
×
×
×
×
×
○
×
×
Only Q24DHCCPU-V can be monitored.
Can be monitored only when the host station is monitored with the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.2 Specifications
2-7
DEVICE MONITOR
■1. Entry Monitor
■ . Batch monitor
The following lists the devices that can be monitored on the batch monitor.
(1) Bit device
○ : Available, ×: Not available
QCPU (Q
mode)
C
Controlle
r module
LCPU
Input (X)
○
○
Output (Y)
○
Internal relay (M)
○
Device
Motion controller
(Q series)
CNC C70,
MELDAS C6/
C64
CRnQ-700
CRnD-700
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
×
○
QnAC
PU
QSCPU
○
○
○
○
○
○
Robot controller
FXCPU
Latch relay (L)
○
×
○
○
×
○
○
×
×
×
Annunciator (F)
○
×
○
○
○
○
○
×
×
×
Link relay (B)
○
○*1
○
○
○
○
○
×
×
×
Special relay (SM)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
Special relay for link (SB)
○
×
○
○
○
×
×
×
×
×
GOT bit register (GB)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Only Q24DHCCPU-V can be monitored.
(2) Word device
○ : Available, ×: Not available
QCPU (Q
mode)
C
Controlle
r module
LCPU
Data register (D)
○
○
Special data register (SD)
○
○
Link register (W)
○
Timer (current value) (TN)
○
Counter (current value) (CN)
Retentive timer (current
value) (SN)
Device
Motion controller
(Q series)
CNC C70,
MELDAS C6/
C64
CRnQ-700
CRnD-700
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
○
○
○
×
○
○
○
○
×
×
×
○
○
×
○
×
×
○
○
○
○
×
○
×
×
○
○
○
○
×
×
×
×
×
QnAC
PU
QSCPU
○
○
○
○
○*1
○
×
○
○
×
○
×
Robot controller
FXCPU
Link special register (SW)
○
×
○
○
○
×
○
×
×
×
File register (R)
○
×
○
○
×
×
○
×
×
×
Extension file register (ZR)
○
×
○
○
×
×
×
×
×
×
Index register (Z)
○
×
○
○
×
×
○
×
×
×
Link register (for writing)
(Ww)
○*2
○*2
○*2
○*2
×
○*2
○*2
○*2
×
×
Link register (for reading)
(Wr)
○*2
○*2
○*2
○*2
×
○*2
○*2
○*2
×
×
Motion device (#)
×
×
×
×
×
○
×
×
×
×
GOT data register (GD)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
GOT special register (GB)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Multiple CPU high speed
transmission memory (U3E1
to U3E3)
×
○
×
×
×
×
×
○
×
×
Only Q24DHCCPU-V can be monitored.
Can be monitored only when the host station is monitored with the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).
■ . TC monitor
The following lists the devices that can be monitored on the TC monitor.
(1) Bit device
○ : Available, ×: Not available
Device
2-8
QCPU (Q
mode)
C
Controlle
r module
LCPU
QnAC
PU
QSCPU
Motion controller
(Q series)
CNC C70,
MELDAS C6/
C64
Robot controller
FXCPU
CRnQ-700
CRnD-700
Timer (contact) (TT)
○
×
○
○
○
×
×
×
×
○
Timer (coil) (TC)
○
×
○
○
○
×
×
×
×
○
Counter (contact) (CT)
○
×
○
○
○
×
×
×
×
○
Counter (coil) (CT)
○
×
○
○
○
×
×
×
×
○
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.2 Specifications
QCPU (Q
mode)
C
Controlle
r module
LCPU
Retentive timer (contact)
(SS)
○
×
Retentive timer (coil) (SC)
○
×
Device
Motion controller
(Q series)
CNC C70,
MELDAS C6/
C64
CRnQ-700
CRnD-700
○
×
×
×
×
×
○
×
×
×
×
×
QnAC
PU
QSCPU
○
○
○
○
Robot controller
FXCPU
2
(2) Word device
○ : Available, ×: Not available
C
Controlle
r module
LCPU
Motion controller
(Q series)
CNC C70,
MELDAS C6/
C64
CRnQ-700
CRnD-700
Timer (current value) (TN)
○
×
Timer (set value)
○
×
○
×
○
×
×
○
○
×
○
×
×
○
Counter (current value) (CN)
○
Counter (set value)
○
○
○
×
○
×
×
○
○
○
×
○
×
×
○
Retentive timer (current
value) (SN)
○
○
○
×
×
×
×
×
Timer (set value)
○
○
○
×
×
×
×
×
QnAC
PU
QSCPU
○
○
○
○
×
○
×
○
○
×
○
×
Robot controller
FXCPU
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.2 Specifications
2-9
DEVICE MONITOR
QCPU (Q
mode)
Device
■ . BM monitor
The following lists the devices that can be monitored on the BM monitor.
(1) Word device
○ : Available, ×: Not available
Device
Buffer memory (intelligent
function module) (BM)
QCPU (Q
mode)
C
Controlle
r module
LCPU
○
○
○
QnAC
PU
QSCPU
○
×
Motion controller
(Q series)
CNC C70,
MELDAS C6/
C64
CRnQ-700
Robot controller
CRnD-700
×
×
×
×
FXCPU
×
■ . Test operation
The following lists the devices for which the test operation can be performed.
(1) Bit device
○ : Available, ×: Not available
QCPU (Q
mode)
C
Controlle
r module
LCPU
Motion controller
(Q series)
CNC C70,
MELDAS C6/
C64
CRnQ-700
CRnD-700
Input (X)
○
○
×
○
○
○
○
Output (Y)
○
Internal relay (M)
○
○
×
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
○
○
×
×
○
Latch relay (L)
Annunciator (F)
○
○
×
○
○
×
×
×
○
○
×
○
○
×
×
×
○
○
×
○
○
×
×
×
○
○
×
○
○
○
○
×
QnAC
PU
QSCPU
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
○
×
Link relay (B)
○
○*1
Special relay (SM)
○
○
Device
Robot controller
FXCPU
○
Special relay for link (SB)
○
×
○
○
×
×
○
×
×
×
GOT bit register (GB)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Available for only Q24DHCCPU-V.
(2) Word device
○ : Available, ×: Not available
QCPU (Q
mode)
C
Controlle
r module
LCPU
Data register (D)
○
○
Special data register (SD)
○
○
Link register (W)
○
Timer (current value) (TN)
○
Device
Motion controller
(Q series)
CNC C70,
MELDAS C6/
C64
CRnQ-700
CRnD-700
×
○
○
○
○
○
×
×
○
○
○
×
○
×
○
○
×
×
×
○
×
×
○
×
×
○
QnAC
PU
QSCPU
○
○
○
○
○*1
○
×
○
Robot controller
FXCPU
Timer (set value)
○
×
○
○
×
×
×
×
×
×
Counter (current value) (CN)
○
×
○
○
×
×
○
×
×
○
Counter (set value)
○
×
○
○
×
×
×
×
×
×
Retentive timer (current
value) (SN)
○
×
○
○
×
×
×
×
×
×
Timer (set value)
○
×
○
○
×
×
×
×
×
×
Link special register (SW)
○
×
○
○
×
×
○
×
×
×
File register (R)
○
×
○
○
×
×
○
×
×
×
Extension file register (ZR)
○
×
○
○
×
×
×
×
×
×
Index register (Z)
○
×
○
○
×
×
○
×
×
×
Buffer memory (intelligent
function module) (BM)
○
×
○
○
×
×
×
×
×
×
Link register (for reading)
(Wr)
○*1
×
○*2
○*2
×
○*2
○*2
×
×
×
Motion device (#)
×
×
×
×
×
○
×
×
×
×
GOT data register (GD)
○
×
○
○
×
○
○
×
×
○
GOT special register (GB)
○
×
○
○
×
○
○
×
×
○
Available for only Q24DHCCPU-V.
Can be monitored only when the host station is monitored with the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).
2 - 10
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.2 Specifications
Access range
When the GOT is connected to the remote I/O station in the MELSECNET/H network system, only the master station can
be monitored.
The access range other than the above is the same as the one for when the GOT is connected with a controller.
For details of the access range, refer to the following.
2.2.4
2
Precautions
■ . Monitoring word devices by 32 bits
When word devices are monitored by 32 bits (two words), those with 32 bits of data remaining are monitored.
Devices with 16 bits (one-word) of data remaining are not monitored.
If an odd number is specified for the first monitor device number, the last device number of the specified controller will
not be displayed.
D11129 D11130 D11131 D11132 D11133 D11134 D11135
Unit of the monitor display
(Device name)
Nothing is displayed.
■ . Changing the set values of timers and counters of the QnACPU and displaying device
comments
For only QnACPUs whose number in the DATE column on the rating plate is [9707B] or later, the set values of timers
(T) and counters (C) can be changed and device comments can be displayed.
PROGRAMMBLE CONTROLLER
DATE 9707 B
Function version
Manufacture year and month
■ . Monitoring local devices using multiple software
When monitoring local devices, do not monitor the devices of the same PLC CPU simultaneously using multiple
software (including GT Designer3 and GX Works2). Otherwise the local devices cannot be monitored properly.
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.2 Specifications
2 - 11
DEVICE MONITOR
2.2.3
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
This section describes the operations that are common for each monitor screen.
2.3.1 Displaying the monitor screen
2.3.2 Names of each section of monitor screen
2.3.3 Display format of the monitor screen ([One large screen], [4 screens])
2.3.5 Entering devices ([Register])
2.3.6 Deleting a device ([Delete])
2.3.7 Deleting devices at a time ([Delete all])
2.3.8 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])
2.3.9 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout])
2.3.10 Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor])
2.3.11 File switching for comment display ([Change comment])
2.3.12 Screen transition (common operation)
2.3.1
Displaying the monitor screen
This section describes the flow until the device monitor screen is displayed after the device monitor (advanced system
application) is installed in the GOT.
The display method of the device monitor screen differs between for the first time and later.
■ . Displaying the device monitor screen for the first time
Follow the procedure described below to display the device monitor screen.
1.
Start the device monitor.
The following two methods are provided for starting the device monitor.
• Using the special function switch (device monitor) set for the project
Touch the special function switch (device monitor) placed on the monitor screen.
For the setting method of the special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
If the project has not been written into the GOT yet, start the device monitor from the Utility.
• Starting the device monitor from the utility
Display the utility screen and select the [Monitor] tab and [Device monitor].
For the display method of the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
2.
The communication setting window appears.
Select the connection destination and communication driver of the controller to be monitored.
2.3.4 ■2. Communication setting dialog
2 - 12
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
The [Device monitor] window appears.
2
DEVICE MONITOR
3.
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
2 - 13
■ . Displaying the device monitor screen for the second time and later
Follow the procedure described below to display the device monitor screen.
1.
Start the device monitor.
The following three methods are provided for starting the device monitor.
• Using the special function switch (device monitor) set for the project
Touch the special function switch (device monitor) placed on the monitor screen.
For the setting method of the special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
If the project has not been written into the GOT yet, start the device monitor from the Utility.
• Starting the device monitor from the utility
Display the utility screen and select the [Monitor] tab and [Device Monitor].
For the display method of the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
• Touching [Device monitor] on the [MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen
When [MELSEC-L troubleshooting] is used, touch the [Device monitor] button.
10. MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
2.
The [History] dialog appears.
Select the monitor history to be recovered and touch the [OK] key.
If you want to change the monitor target, touch the [Cancel] button.
The communication setting dialog appears.
Select the connection destination and communication driver of the controller to be monitored.
2.3.4 ■2. Communication setting dialog
3.
2 - 14
The [Device monitor] screen appears.
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
Names of each section of monitor screen
3)
4)
1)
2)
5)
6)
7)
2
DEVICE MONITOR
2.3.2
8)
9)
1) Monitor category display
Displays a monitor category of the monitor screen that is currently displayed.
2) Monitor category change key
Use this button to select a monitor category.
Select from [Selected], [Series], [TC monitor], and [BM monitor].
3) Screen switch key
Switches the screen display between the full screen display and the quad screen display.
4) [Exit] key
Exits the device monitor.
5) Monitor target display
Displays the channel No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the monitor target.
6) Monitor device display area
Displays the monitor device display area.
7) Scroll key
Scrolls the monitor device display up and down.
8) Message display
Displays error messages.
9) Sub menu key
Use this key to register a device, execute test operation, or switch the display format on each monitor screen.
Keys to be displayed vary depending on the monitor category.
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
2 - 15
2.3.3
Display format of the monitor screen ([One large screen], [4 screens])
In the device monitor, the screen display format can be switched between the full mode and the quad mode.
■ . How to switch the display format
To switch the display format from the full mode to the quad mode, touch the [4 screens] key.
[4 screens] button
To switch the display format from the quad mode to the full mode, touch the [One large screen] key.
[One large screen] button
2 - 16
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
2.3.4
Destination path setting ([Settings])
■ . Setting procedure for the destination path
2
Touch the [Connect] key on a device monitor screen.
DEVICE MONITOR
1.
[Connect] button
2.
The communication setting dialog appears.
Set the destination path with referring to the following.
2.3.4 ■2. Communication setting dialog
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
2 - 17
■ . Communication setting dialog
Configure the communication setting with the monitor target when starting monitor in this dialog.
(1) Screen display
1)
3)
2) 1)
2)
4) 3)
4)
5)
6)
When the CH No. is input
When the network No., station No.,
and CPU No. are input
1) CH No. input area
Set the CH No. for the target controller.
The setting range is [1] to [4].
2) Network No. input area
Set the network No. for the target controller.
The setting range differs depending on the connection type.
• Bus connection, direct CPU connection, computer link connection: [0]
• Ethernet connection: [1] to [239]
• MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10: [0] (host loop), [1] to [255] (specified loop)
• CC-Link IE Controller Network connection: [1] to [239]
• CC-Link IE Field Network: [1] to [239]
• CC-Link (ID/G4) connection: [0]
3) Station No. input area
Set the station No. of the target controller.
When the station No. is set to the host station (FF), set the network No. to 0.
The setting range differs depending on the connection type.
• Bus connection, direct CPU connection, computer link connection: [FF] (host station)
• Ethernet connection: [1] to [64]
• MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10: [0] (control station), [1] to [64] (normal station)
• CC-Link IE Controller Network connection: [1] to [120]
• CC-Link IE Field Network connection: [0] (master station), [1] to [120] (local station)
• CC-Link (ID/G4) connection: [0] (master station), [1] to [64] (local station)
4) CPU No. input area
Set the CPU No. of the multiple CPUs.
This setting can be configured only the multiple CPUs are monitored.
The setting range is [1] to [4].
5) CH No. selection key
Select the CH No. for connecting the monitor target.
6) Keys
Keys for operations in the communication setting window are displayed.
2 - 18
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
(2) Key functions
2)
2)
2
3)
3)
4)
5)
DEVICE MONITOR
1)
6)
1) CH No. selection key
Select the CH No. for connecting the monitor target.
2) [×] key
Closes the communication setting window.
When any of the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. is not input and the monitor target is not set,
the communication setting window does not close.
3) Input area move key
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
4) [Enter] key
Moves the cursor when the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No. input area.
When the cursor is in the CPU No. input area and settings for the CH No., network No., and station No. are
completed, the communication setting window closes and the PLC read screen appears.
5) [Del] key
Deletes an input value or character.
6) [AC] key
Deletes all the input values and characters.
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
2 - 19
2.3.5
Entering devices ([Register])
Enter devices to be monitored for all monitor categories.
■ . Entering procedure for the monitor device
The entry monitor is taken here as an example to describe the entry procedure for the monitor device.
1.
Display the window for entering the device by either of following operations in each monitor.
• Touching the [Register] key
• Touching the monitor device display area
When using other than the entry monitor, the window for entering the device is displayed only when no
device is entered.
When using the entry monitor, the window for entering the device is displayed even when a device is
entered.
Monitor device
display area
[Register] button
2.
The window for entering the device appears.
Set the destination with referring to the following.
2.3.5 ■2. Window for entering the device
3.
2 - 20
When a password is not set for a sequence program, touch the [ENTER] key to enter the specified device.
When a password is set for the sequence program, the dialog for canceling the password appears when the
[ENTER] is touched.
Inputting the correct password enters the specified device.
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
4.
When using the entry monitor, the window for entering the device is displayed successively.
After entering the device, close the dialog with the [×] key.
2
Entry device
DEVICE MONITOR
[x] key
■ . Window for entering the device
The display contents of the window for entering the device differ depending on the monitor category.
BM monitor
Entry monitor, batch monitor, and TC monitor
4)
4)
1)
2)
3)
3)
6)
5)
9)
8)
7)
7)
8) 9)
1) Device display area
Set a device to be entered when using the entry monitor, batch monitor, and TC monitor.
2) Memory address display area
Set the memory address to be entered when using the BM monitor.
3) Input keys for device and memory address
Use these keys to input a device or a memory address.
4) [×] key
Closes the window for entering the device.
5) Character type switch key
Switches the character type of the key.
• [a-z] key: Switches the character type to alphabetic characters (lowercase).
• [A-Z] key: Switches the character type to alphabetic characters (uppercase).
• [Sign] key: Switches the character type to symbol.
6) Input area move key
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
Use this key only when using the BM monitor.
7) [Enter] key
Enters the device input in the device display area or the memory address area.
8) [Del] key
Deletes an input value or character.
9) [AC] key
Deletes all the input values and characters.
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
2 - 21
2.3.6
Deleting a device ([Delete])
Delete a device entered in the entry monitor.
■ . How to delete a device
1.
Touch a device to be deleted in the entry monitor.
2.
Touch the [Delete] key.
1. Touch a device
to be deleted.
2. Touch the
[Delete] key.
3.
2 - 22
The confirmation dialog appears.
Touch the [OK] key to delete the selected device.
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
2.3.7
Deleting devices at a time ([Delete all])
2
Delete all the registered devices entered in the entry monitor at a time.
■ . How to delete devices at a time
Touch the [Delete all] key in the entry monitor.
DEVICE MONITOR
1.
Touch the
[Delete all] key.
2.
The confirmation dialog appears.
Touch the [OK] key to delete all the selected devices.
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
2 - 23
2.3.8
Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])
Test devices.
WARNING
Before performing the quick test operations of the system monitor function (such as turning ON or OFF bit device,
changing the word device current value, changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter, and changing the buffer memory
current value), read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method.
During quick test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system.
False output or malfunction can cause an accident.
■ . Operating procedure of the test
This subsection takes a test operation of the D100 device as an example to describe the test operation procedure.
1.
Touch the [Test] key in each monitor.
[Test] key
2.
The confirmation dialog appears.
Touch the [Yes] key to switch the mode to the test mode.
3.
When switching the device value display format, touch the corresponding device value display format.
Display format of
the device value
2 - 24
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
4.
Touch a device targeted to the test operation.
DEVICE MONITOR
2
The device
to be tested
5.
A dialog for setting the device value according to the device display format appears.
Set the device value with referring to the following.
After setting the device value, touch the [ENTER] key.
2.3.8 ■3. Dialogs for setting the device value
6.
The set value is reflected in the device.
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
2 - 25
■ . Ending the test mode
To end the test mode, touch the [Test] key.
[Test] key
■ . Dialogs for setting the device value
The display contents of the dialogs for setting the device value differ depending on the device display format.
For decimal number
3)
1)
1)
For binary or hexadecimal number
3)
7)
8)
9)
5)
2)
2)
6)
3)
1)
4)
4)
2)
For real number
7)
8)
9)
6)
7)
8)
9)
1) Device value display area
Set the device value to be input.
2) Device value input key
Use this key to input the device value.
3) [×] key
Closes the window for entering the device.
4) [DEX/HEX] key
Switches the key type between the decimal and hexadecimal.
5) [FIX/EXP] key
Switches the display format of the device value display area between the exponential representation (EXP) and
the floating point representation (FIX).
6) [+/-] key
Switches positive and negative of the input value.
7) [Enter] key
Determines the device input area input in the device value display area.
8) [Del] key
Deletes an input value or character.
9) [AC] key
Deletes all the input values and characters.
2 - 26
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
■ . Display format dialog
3)
2
DEVICE MONITOR
1)
2)
4)
1) [Data size]
Represents the data formats of the device.
The following shows the selectable items.
• [16bit(W)]
• [32bit(D)]
• [64bit(L)]
2) [Data type]
Represents the displayable display formats for the device value.
The following shows the selectable items.
• [Signed decimal(K±)]
• [Unsigned decimal(K+)]
• [Hexadecimal(HEX)]
• [Binary(BIN)]
• [Floating(EXP)]
• [Fixed(FIX)]
3) [Cancel] key
Closes the display format dialog without reflecting the settings.
4) [OK] key
Closes the display format dialog after reflecting the settings.
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
2 - 27
2.3.9
Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout])
Switch the displayed number of device columns and display or non-display of the comments.
■ . Procedure for switching the display
The entry monitor is taken here as an example to describe the switch procedure for the display.
1.
Touch the [Layout] key in the entry monitor.
[Layout] key
2.
The display item dialog appears.
Set the display format and touch the [OK] key.
3)
1)
2)
4)
1) [Number of columns]
Represents the number of the columns of the devices.
2) [Display comments]
Switches whether to display or hide the device comments.
3) [Cancel] key
Closes the display item dialog without reflecting the settings.
4) [OK] key
Closes the display item dialog after reflecting the settings.
3.
2 - 28
The display items are switched.
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
2.3.10
Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor])
Monitor local devices.
2
POINT
DEVICE MONITOR
Scan time while the GOT is using the local device monitor
When the GOT is using the local device monitor, the scan time for the PLC increases.
■ . Monitoring procedure of local devices
The entry monitor is taken here as an example to describe the switch procedure for the display.
1.
Touch the [Local monitor] key in each monitor.
[Local monitor] key
2.
The program list dialog appears.
Select the target file for the local device monitor and touch the [Cancel] key.
2)
1)
3)
1) Program file list
Represents the program file list of the local device monitor target.
A file can be selected by touching the file name.
2) [Cancel] key
Closes the program list dialog without starting the local device monitor.
3) [OK] key
Starts the local device monitor of the selected program.
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
2 - 29
3.
The confirmation dialog appears.
Touching the [OK] key starts the local device monitor.
Touching the [Cancel] key cancels the local device monitor.
■ . Ending the local device monitor
To end the local device monitor, touch the [Local monitor] key.
[Local monitor] key
2 - 30
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
File switching for comment display ([Change comment])
The comment file to be displayed can be switched.
This function cannot be used with the BM monitor.
2
■ . Comment files that can be displayed with the device monitor
With the device monitor, comment files used for the sequence program monitor (ladder) can be displayed.
The following lists the types of comment file that can be displayed.
• Common comment files
• Comment files for the target programs for monitoring
The comment files can be displayed only when the local device monitor or TC monitor is used.
• All the comment files stored in a data storage installed on the GOT
The comment files can be displayed only when the local device monitor or TC monitor is unused.
• Comment files specified with the parameters of PLCs
The comment files specified for [Comment File Used in a Command] of the PC parameter with GX Works2 or GX
Developer are displayed.
■ . Procedure for switching
The entry monitor is taken here as an example to describe the procedure for switching comment files.
1.
Touch the [Comment] key.
[Change comment] key
2.
The comment file list dialog appears.
Select the comment file to display and touch the [Change] key.
2)
1)
3)
1) [Comment list]
Lists the comment files displayed with the device monitor.
A file can be selected by touching the file name.
2) [Cancel] key
Closes the comment file list dialog.
3) [OK] key
Closes the comment file list dialog and displays the selected comment file.
When four screens are displayed and a comment file is set for one of the four screens, the comment file is also
set for other screens connected to the same monitor target and no comment file is set for.
3.
The comment file on display is switched.
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
2 - 31
DEVICE MONITOR
2.3.11
2.3.12
Screen transition (common operation)
Starting the device monitor
from the utility
Starting the device monitor
from the special function switch
(system monitor)
1. Display the utility.
2.
Starting the device monitor
from the MELSEC-L troubleshooting
1. Touch the special function
1. Touch the [Device monitor]
switch (system monitor)
on the monitor screen.
on the MELSEC-L
troubleshooting screen.
Touch the [Devie monitor]
in the [Monitor] tab.
From the second-time startup
First-time startup
Set the communication
In the monitor history
list, select the past
monitor entry to use.
path in the communication
[Cancel]
setting dialog.
[OK]
[ENTER]
The device monitor starts. (Example. Entry monitor)
Screens that started
the device monitor
·Utility screen
·User-created screen
·MELSEC-L
troubleshooting screen
[End]
[4 screens]
[One large screen]
[Series]
Display format
[Layout]
[Register]
[Change
comment]
[TC Monitor]
[Connect]
[Local
monitor]
Program list *1
Display format
[BM Monitor]
Display items
Device entry
*1
Communication setting
Comment file
list *1
Program list *1
When a password or keyword is set for the controller, the password entry dialog appears.
2 - 32
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
2.4 Entry Monitor
The entry monitor is a function that registers the devices to monitor beforehand and monitors only the registered devices.
2
■ . Screen display and the key function
3)
DEVICE MONITOR
4)
1)
2)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
1) Monitor category display
Displays a monitor category of the monitor screen that is currently displayed.
2) Monitor category change key
Use this button to select a monitor category.
Select from [Series], [TC monitor], and [BM monitor].
3) Screen switching key ([4 screens], [One large screen])
Switches the screen display between the full screen display and the quad screen display.
4) [Exit] key
Exits the device monitor.
5) Monitor target display
Displays the channel No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the monitor target.
6) Monitor device display area
Displays the monitor device display area.
Device number
Device name
Device comment
Device value
Bit device
Device value
Device name
Device comment
Device value
Display format
Word device
 Device name
Displays the device name of the monitor device.
 Device number
Displays the device number of the monitor device.
 Device comment
Displays the device comment set for the monitor device.
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.4 Entry Monitor
2 - 33
 Device value
Displays the device value of the monitor device.
If a bit device is the target, the status is indicated as shown below.
• ●: Bit ON
• ○: Bit OFF
 Display format
Represents the display format of the device value.
The character on the left represents the data range of the device.
• [W]: Word (16 bits)
• [D]: Double-word (32 bits)
• [L]: Longword (64 bits)
The character string on the right represents the display format of the device value.
• [K±]: Signed decimal
• [K+]: Signed decimal
• [HEX]: Signed decimal
• [BIN]: Signed decimal
• [EXP]: Exponential notation (floating point type real)
• [FIT]: Decimal representation (fixed-point arithmetic)
The display format can be changed when touched.
7) Message display
Displays error messages.
8) [Register] key
Registers devices.
Displays the device entry window when touched.
2.3.5 ■2. Window for entering the device
9) [Delete] key
Deletes a selected registered device.
2.3.6 Deleting a device ([Delete])
10) [Delete all] key
Deletes all the registered devices.
2.3.7 Deleting devices at a time ([Delete all])
11) [Test] key
Carries out a test operation.
2.3.8 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])
12) [Layout] key
Changes the display of items.
The display of the following items can be changed.
• Number of the columns of the devices to be displayed
• Comments (can be switched between displaying and hiding)
2.3.9 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout])
13) [Change comment] key
The comment file to be displayed can be switched.
Touch the key to display the comment file list dialog.
2.3.11 File switching for comment display ([Change comment])
14) [Local monitor] key
Starts or ends the local device monitor.
2.3.10 Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor])
15) [Connect] key
Switches the monitor target for the device monitor.
Touch the key to display the communication setting dialog.
2.3.4 ■2. Communication setting dialog
2 - 34
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.4 Entry Monitor
2.5 Batch Monitor
The device monitor is a function that specifies the start device in a range of devices and monitors the start and the
following successive devices in a batch.
2
■ . Screen display and the key function
3)
DEVICE MONITOR
4)
1)
2)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
1) Monitor category display
Displays a monitor category of the monitor screen that is currently displayed.
2) Monitor category change key
Use this button to select a monitor category.
Select from [Selected], [TC monitor], and [BM monitor].
3) Screen switching key ([4 screens], [One large screen])
Switches the screen display between the full screen display and the quad screen display.
4) [Exit] key
Exits the device monitor.
5) Monitor target display
Displays the channel No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the monitor target.
6) Monitor device display area
Displays the monitor device display area.
Device number
Device name
Device comment
Device value
Bit device
Device number
Device name
Device comment
Device value
Display format
Word device
 [Previous Device]
Displays the devices preceding those on display. (Displays another part of the range.)
 [Next Device]
Displays the devices following those on display. (Displays another part of the range.)
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.5 Batch Monitor
2 - 35
 Device name
Displays the device name of the monitor device.
If a bit device is the target, the status is indicated as shown below.
• ●: Bit ON
• ○: Bit OFF
 Device number
Displays the device number of the monitor device.
 Device comment
Displays the device comment set for the monitor device.
 Device value
Displays the device value of the monitor device.
 Display format
Represents the display format of the device value.
The display format can be changed when touched.
The character on the left represents the data range of the device.
• [W]: Word (16 bits)
• [D]: Double-word (32 bits)
• [L]: Longword (64 bits)
The character string on the right represents the display format of the device value.
• [K±]: Signed decimal
• [K+]: Signed decimal
• [HEX]: Signed decimal
• [BIN]: Signed decimal
• [EXP]: Exponential notation (floating point type real)
• [FIT]: Decimal representation (fixed-point arithmetic)
7) Message display
Displays error messages.
8) [Register] key
Registers the start device of monitor targets.
Displays the device entry window when touched.
2.3.5 ■2. Window for entering the device
9) [test] key
Carries out a test operation.
2.3.8 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])
10) [Layout] key
Changes the display of items.
The display of the following items can be changed.
• Number of the columns of the devices to be displayed
• Comments (can be switched between displaying and hiding)
2.3.9 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout])
11) [Change comment] key
The comment file to be displayed can be switched.
Touch the key to display the comment file list dialog.
2.3.11 File switching for comment display ([Change comment])
12) [Local monitor] key
Starts or ends the local device monitor.
2.3.10 Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor])
13) [Connect] key
Switches the monitor target for the device monitor.
Touch the key to display the communication setting dialog.
2.3.4 ■2. Communication setting dialog
2 - 36
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.5 Batch Monitor
2.6 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters)
The TC monitor is a function that monitors only timers (T) and counters (C).
At the start of the TC monitor, the program list dialog appears.
Select the target program for monitoring and start monitoring.
2
DEVICE MONITOR
2)
1)
3)
1) Program file list
Lists program files that can be the targets for the TC monitor.
A file can be selected by touching the file name.
2) [Cancel] key
Closes the program list dialog without starting the local device monitor.
3) [OK] key
Starts the local device monitor of the selected program.
■ . Screen display and the key function
3)
4)
1)
2)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
1) Monitor category display
Displays a monitor category of the monitor screen that is currently displayed.
2) Monitor category change key
Use this button to select a monitor category.
Select from [Selected], [Series], and [BM monitor].
3) Screen switching key ([4 screen], [One large screen])
Switches the screen display between the full screen display and the quad screen display.
4) [Exit] key
Exits the device monitor.
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.6 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters)
2 - 37
5) Monitor target display
Displays the channel No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the monitor target.
6) Monitor device display area
Displays the monitor device display area.
Device value (current value)
Device value (set value)
Display format
Device number
Device name
Device comment
Contact, coil display
 Device name
Displays the device name of the monitor device.
 Device number
Displays the device number of the monitor device.
 Device comment
Displays the device comment set for the monitor device.
 Device value (current value)
Displays the current value of the monitor device.
 Device value (set value)
Displays the set value of the monitor device.
 Display format
Represents the display format of the device value.
The character on the left represents the data range of the device.
• [W]: Word (16 bits)
The character string on the right represents the display format of the device value.
• [K±]: Signed decimal
• [HEX]: Signed decimal
The display format can be changed when touched.
 Contact, coil display
Indicates the status of the contact or coil.
· Contact
: Bit ON
: Bit OFF
: Bit ON
: Bit OFF
· Coil
7) Message display
Displays error messages.
8) [Register] key
Registers devices.
Displays the device entry window when touched.
2.3.5 ■2. Window for entering the device
9) [Test] key
Carries out a test operation.
2.3.8 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])
10) [Layout] key
Changes the display of items.
The display of the following items can be changed.
• Number of the columns of the devices to be displayed
• Comments (can be switched between displaying and hiding)
2.3.9 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout])
11) [Change comment] key
The comment file to be displayed can be switched.
Touch the key to display the comment file list dialog.
2.3.11 File switching for comment display ([Change comment])
2 - 38
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.6 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters)
12) [Local monitor] key
Starts or ends the local device monitor.
2.3.10 Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor])
2
13) [Connect] key
Switches the monitor target for the device monitor.
Touch the key to display the communication setting dialog.
DEVICE MONITOR
2.3.4 ■2. Communication setting dialog
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.6 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters)
2 - 39
2.7 BM Monitor (Monitoring Buffer Memory)
The BM monitor is a function that monitors the buffer memory of special function modules.
■ . Screen display and the key function
3)
4)
1)
2)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
1) Monitor category display
Displays a monitor category of the monitor screen that is currently displayed.
2) Monitor category change key
Use this button to select a monitor category.
Select from [Selected], [Series], and [TC monitor].
3) Screen switching key ([4 screens], [One large screen])
Switches the screen display between the full screen display and the quad screen display.
4) [Exit] key
Exits the device monitor.
5) Monitor target display
Displays the channel No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the monitor target.
6) Monitor device display area
Displays the monitor device display area.
Device value
Device number
Device name
Device comment
Display format
Word device
 Device name
Displays the device name of the monitor device.
 Device number
Displays the device number of the monitor device.
 Device comment
Displays the device comment set for the monitor device.
 Device value
Displays the device value of the monitor device.
2 - 40
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.7 BM Monitor (Monitoring Buffer Memory)
 Display format
Represents the display format of the device value.
The character on the left represents the data range of the device.
• [W]: Word (16 bits)
• [D]: Double-word (32 bits)
• [L]: 64 bits
2
DEVICE MONITOR
The character string on the right represents the display format of the device value.
• [K±]: Signed decimal
• [K+]: Signed decimal
• [HEX]: Signed decimal
• [BIN]: Signed decimal
• [EXP]: Exponential notation (floating point type real)
• [FIT]: Decimal representation (fixed-point arithmetic)
The display format can be changed when touched.
7) Message display
Displays error messages.
8) [Register] key
Registers devices.
Displays the device entry window when touched.
2.3.5 ■2. Window for entering the device
9) [Test] key
Carries out a test operation.
2.3.8 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])
10) [Layput] key
Changes the display of items.
The display of the following items can be changed.
• Number of the columns of the devices to be displayed
• Comments (can be switched between displaying and hiding)
2.3.9 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout])
11) [Connect] key
Switches the monitor target for the device monitor.
Touch the key to display the communication setting dialog.
2.3.4 ■2. Communication setting dialog
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.7 BM Monitor (Monitoring Buffer Memory)
2 - 41
2.8 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
The following table lists error messages displayed when the device monitor is carried out and describes the
corresponding corrective actions.
Error message
Failed to communicate with CPU.
Explanation
Communication with the target PLC for monitoring
cannot be established.
Action
• Check the connection (a connector disconnection, a break in a cable)
between the PLC and GOT.
• Check if the PLC has caused an error.
• Refer to the following to check if a network error has occurred.
➠
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor)
A device has exceeded a specified device range.
Because the data range was changed to one with
a larger number of bits, a device that has
exceeded the range is included in the targets for
display.
Change the data rage back in the previous number of bits.
The number of the target devices for monitoring
has exceeded its maximum.
The number of the target devices for the
registration for monitoring is larger than its
maximum.
The number of the target devices for monitoring beyond its maximum cannot
be registered.
Delete unnecessary registered devices before registering.
Displaying device comments has failed.
No device comment file exists.
Create a device comment file.
Local device monitoring has failed.
The target program for local device monitoring
does not exist or has been deleted.
Start the local device monitor again and select a program from the
alternatives in the list.
Failed to write the value to the device.
The target device for writing a value does not exist
or the target device is outside the range.
Check the range of devices with the parameter of the PLC.
A device that cannot be monitored exists.
A device outside the range is included in those on
display.
Change the display position of devices.
The device range has been changed.
During GOT startup, the parameter of the PLC
was changed then a device on display has fallen
outside the range.
Restart the GOT.
Writing a TC set value has failed.
The target program for writing a timer or counter
setting value does not exist or has been deleted.
Start the TC monitor again and select a program from the alternatives in the
list.
The device that has been specified as a security
condition is invalid.
The device that has been specified as a device
test authorization device for the system security
setting does not exist or is outside the device
range.
Reading a comment file has failed.
• If drive A has been specified in the GOT setup
as the destination for saving data: The SD card
slot cover on the GOT is open.
• No stored comment file exists on the SD card or
USB memory that has been connected to the
GOT.
• Check the range of devices with the parameter of the PLC.
• Check the device test authorization device for the system security setting.
• Close the SD card slot cover and select the comment file again.
• In the comment file list dialog, select an existing comment file.
Obtaining the program name has failed.
No program has been written to the PLC CPU.
To the PLC, write a PC parameter and sequence program that are consistent
with each other.
No program is in execution.
In using the TC monitor, there is no program being
scanned.
Start to scan a program.
2 - 42
2. DEVICE MONITOR
2.8 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
3.
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR
(LADDER)
3.1 Features
With the sequence program monitor (ladder), the GOT can monitor and edit a sequence program in the ladder diagram
format of a controller, and changing current device values of the program is available.
The features of the sequence program monitor (ladder) are shown below.
 Editing sequence programs by using the GOT
Editing sequence programs in the ladder diagram format is available.
X10
X10
SM401
Y22
Y22
Touch a position to input a contact.
The contact (Always OFF) is input.
The following screens are displayed with the sequence program monitor (ladder).
• PLC read screen (
• Ladder monitor screen (
• Ladder editor screen (
3.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen)
3.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen)
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen)
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.1 Features
3-1
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3
 Switching display formats, device comment display, and languages
The following are available.
• Switching whether to display or hide device comments
• Switching languages for file names of sequence programs, comments, and others
(1) Switching device comment display
Whether to display or hide device comments used in sequence programs can be switched.
(2) Switching languages
Preparing a comment file created in either of the following character codes enables character code switching of
the header and comment of a file following the language switching in the utility.
• SJIS
• GB
• Big5
• KS
• ASCII
When a comment file created in either of the character codes above in a data storage, the comment of the
comment file can be displayed regardless of the language selected in the utility.
 Displaying registered ladder blocks is available
On the Ladder registration monitor window, displaying registered ladder blocks is available.
3.6.3 Display menu (1) Ladder registration monitor window
M12
21
Y43
Y44
M13
24
Y45
Y46
Ladder registration monitor window
M12
Y43
21
Y44
M112
M110
Y6F
85
M111
87
Y70
Y71
M112
90
3-2
Y72
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.1 Features
90
Y72
 Enhanced interaction with objects (one-touch ladder jump function)
(1) Interaction with the special function switch
Set a program file or device to be searched to the special function switch.
This enables that the automatic PLC read can be executed and a device can be searched automatically by
touching the special function switch placed on the user-created screen.
Even a person who is not the operator familiar with the equipment inside can trace the source of the equipment
error without fail by simple operations, reducing time to stop the error.
Example) Coil searching by touching a special function switch
Lifter lower
end
X13
Operation flow screen
Home position
Lifter down
Hand close
Hand open
Lifter up
Lifter up
Forward
Back
Hand close
M52
M54
M53
Lifter up
M54
Forward
M53
The sequence program
monitor (ladder) starts
and searches for coil
"M53" automatically.
Lifter upper
end
X10
Lifter up
M53
M55
M54
"Forward operation M54" was not turned
on since the lifter upper-end sensor (X10)
was not turned on.
Touch the special function button of error process
Special function switch setting
Ladder Search Device: M53
Ladder Search Mode: Coil
(2) Interaction with the alarm display (user) or simple alarm display
Select an alarm in various alarm displays and touching the key code switch (setting the key code of Display
Ladder (Ladder Editor)). This enables to start the sequence program monitor (ladder) and a device of alarm can
be searched.
(User-created screen)
Occurred
Comment
09/8/1 14:46:49
Temp. error
09/8/1 13:30:14
Fuse error
Display Ladder
(Ladder Editor)
(Ladder monitor screen)
M12
Y43
Y44
The sequence program
monitor (ladder) starts
and searches for the
device of alarm
automatically.
X13
Y45
Y46
The search result is displayed.
Select an alarm and touch the key code switch.
Key code switch setting
Code setting: FFBD
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.1 Features
3-3
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
(Ladder monitor screen)
(User-created screen)
Lifter down
3
3.2 Specifications
3.2.1
System configuration
This section describes the system configuration for the sequence program monitor (ladder).
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1
 Target controller
Controller
*1
QCPU , motion controller (Q series)*2
LCPU
CNC (C70)
*1
*2
Excluding the Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU, Q12PRHCPU, Q25PHCPU.
For creating a multiple CPU system with the Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, and/or
Q25HCPU, use CPUs with the function version B or later.
For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU can be monitored.
 Connection type
This function can be used in the following connection types.
(
Function
Name
Description
Bus
connection
Direct
CPU
connection
*2
MELSECNET/H
Computer
link
connection
Ethernet
connection
*9
connection*1,
MELSECNET/10
connection*1*3
CC-Link IE
controller
connection*1*4,
CC-Link IE field
CC-Link
connection
ID*7
connection*5*6
Monitors and edits a
sequence program in
the ladder diagram
format in a controller, or
changes current device
values of the program.
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
3-4
: Unavailable)
Connection form between GOT and controller
*1
sequence
program
monitor
(ladder)
: Available,
The LCPU does not support the connection type.
When the GOT is connected to LCPU, use L6ADP-R2.
For the MELSECNET/10 connection, use a QCPU and network module (QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25,
QJ71LP21G, and QJ71BR11) with the function version B or later.
Indicates the CC-Link IE controller network connection.
Indicates CC-Link IE field network connection.
Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU are not available.
Indicates CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station).
Indicates CC-Link connection (via G4).
Ladder editor cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.2 Specifications
G4*8
 Required extended system application
The advanced system applications shown below are required.
1.2 Required extended system application for the function
(1) Extended system application
Write the package data that has the extended system application for the sequence program monitor (ladder) to
the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
3
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
To write the extended system application to the GOT, certain space of the user area must be reserved for the
application.
For the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data
using other user areas, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
 Required hardware
The following hardware is required.
Hardware
Data Storage (SD card, USB memory, and etc)
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.2 Specifications
3-5
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
(2) Extended system application space
3.2.2
Devices and range that can be monitored
The device range varies depending on the CPU to be used.
( : Possible,
Device*1
Device range
Input
X0 to 1FFF, DX0 to FFF
Output
Y0 to 1FFF, DY0 to FFF
Internal relay*1
M0 to 8191 to 61439
Latch relay
L0 to 32767
Link relay
*2
Program display
Device monitor
display
: Impossible)
Search operation
B0 to 1FFF to EFFF
Timer
T0 to 32767
Retentive timer
ST0 to 32767
Counter
C0 to 32767
Data register
D0 to 12287
Link register
W0 to 1FFF
Annunciator
F0 to 32767
Edge relay
V0 to 2047
R0 to 32767
File register
ZR0 to 4849663
*2
Extended data register
Extended link register
*2
D0 to 4910079
W0 to 4AEBFF
Link special relay
SB0 to 7FFF
Link special register
SW0 to 7FFF
Index register
Z0 to 19
Special relay
SM0 to 2047
Special register
SD0 to 2047
Function input
FX0 to F
Function output
FY0 to F
Function register
FD0 to 4
Link direct device
J
\
J
\
Module access device
U3En
\
Nesting
N0 to 14
Pointer
P0 to 8191
*3
Interrupt pointer
I0 to 255
*3
SFC block device
BL0 to 319
SFC transition device
TR0 to 511, BL
Network No. specification device
J0 to 255
I/O No. specification device
U0 to 1FF
3E0 to 3
Macro instruction argument device
VD0 to
\TR
*1 The GOT can monitor local devices. For applicable devices and device ranges, refer to manual of the PLC CPU.
*2 The extended data register and extended link register are applicable to Universal model QCPU only.
*3 Device cannot be replaced.
3-6
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.2 Specifications
3.2.3
Access range
The access range is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller.
For details of the access range, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1
Precautions
(1) Precautions for operations during sequence program monitor (ladder) startup
Do not operate the following with the GOT during the sequence program monitor (ladder) startup.
Doing so may delete stored data and cause the sequence program monitor (ladder) to operate incorrectly.
• Opening the SD card cover (when an SD card is used)
• Installing/removing the data storage (SD card or USB memory)
(2) Backup
Before editing the program with the sequence program monitor (ladder), backup the program with the backup/
restore function to restore an original sequence program.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
(3) Precautions for the online program change
Precautions for the online program change with the sequence program monitor (ladder) are the same as the
online program change with GX Works2/GX Developer, except the followings.
For details of precautions on the online program change, refer to the followings.
GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual (Common)
GX Developer Version8 Operating Manual
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
The following items are the difference between GX Works2/GX Developer online program change when using
the sequence program monitor (ladder).
• Online program change is not available for programs other than program memories.
• Online program change cannot be executed with the pointer at the top. Do not execute the online program
change simultaneously from multiple points.
• Online program change is not available by file unit.
• No option setting is available for preventing from executing the fall instruction.
• Online program change is not available when the reserved area is exceeded by the change. Execute Write to
PLC when the reserved area is exceeded.
• The setting whether to transfer or not to the program memory cannot be changed after the writing is
completed. When the online program change to the universal model QCPU is executed, all the program
cache memory information is transferred at once, after the online program change.
• If the setting of GOT days and time is February 29th when using the Q00JCPU, Q01CPU or Q00CPU, the
online program change cannot be executed. Change days and time of the GOT to something other than
February 29th and execute the online program change again.
(4) Precautions for creating the program
The sequence program monitor (ladder) is not available for the program which uses labels.
When using the sequence program monitor (ladder), create the program in the simple project which does not
use labels.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.2 Specifications
3-7
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.2.4
3
3.3 Display Operation
This section describes the operation procedure from turning on the power to the GOT to sequence program monitor
(ladder) display.
1.
Power on the GOT.
2.
Display the screen of the sequence program monitor (ladder).
The display methods include the following two types.
• Starting from the special function switch (sequence program monitor (ladder)) set in the project data
For how to set the special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
If no project has not been written to the GOT, start the sequence program monitor (ladder) from the utility.
• Starting from the utility
Touch [Monitor] → [Seq. program monitor] from the Main Menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
3.
Set the channel No., network No., station number, and CPU number in the communication setting dialog.
3.5.2 (1) Communication setting window
4.
Read data from the PLC and display the program list window.
3.5.2 (2) Program list window
Reading data from the PLC is not required when reclosing the GOT power, because sequence programs and
comment files are stored in a data storage for the sequence program monitor (ladder).
5.
Select a program to be displayed from the program list and display the ladder monitor screen.
3.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen
6.
Display the ladder editor screen from the edit menu of the ladder monitor screen.
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
For the start operation of the Ladder Editor using the One-touch Ladder Jump function, refer to the following.
Start operation when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function
For the changing screens for the security setting, refer to the following.
3.3.4 Setting the security
3-8
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.3 Display Operation
 Start operation when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function
By using the special function switch, alarm display (user), or others, start the sequence program monitor (ladder),
and sequence program files can be read automatically and devices can be searched automatically.
The following shows objects which can use the One-touch Ladder Jump function.
Object
Special function switch, alarm display (user), simple alarm display
3
Before executing the automatic PLC read
(1) Setting the automatic PLC read
When reading a sequence program file or a comment file from controllers, the automatic PLC read have to be
set on GT Designer3 or in the utility.
For the setting of automatic PLC read, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
(2) Specifying an automatic PLC read file
With the special function switch or alarm display (user), the target sequence program of automatic PLC read
can be specified.
However, the operation differs depending on the automatic PLC read setting on GT Designer3 or in the utility.
Automatic PLC read setting of
GT Designer3/utility
File name specification in
objects
Operation
Done
The specified sequence program file is read automatically.
None
All sequence program files are read automatically.
Done
No sequence program file is read.
To search automatically, if a sequence program file of the specified
file name among the sequence program files read in the GOT
exists, it is executed.
None
No sequence program file is read.
To search automatically, if a sequence program file read in the GOT
exists, it is executed to all files.
Done
None
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.3 Display Operation
3-9
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
POINT
(1) Starting from the special function switch
Select [Ladder Editor] in [Switch Action] and the [Use One-touch Ladder Jump] check box of the special function
switch. By touching this switch, sequence program monitor (ladder) can be started.
Operation at start differs depending on the setting contents of the special function switch.
For the setting items for the special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
(
Setting
Search Method
Specify Search File
: Set,
: Not set)
Operation for touching the special function
switch
(a)
Specify Search Device*1
(b)
(c)
Specify Connected Station*2
(d)
*1
*2
When [Specify Search Device] is selected, set [Ladder Search Device] and [Ladder Search Mode].
The setting of PLC station number is included in the [Ladder Search Device] setting.
When [Specify Connected Station] is selected, set [CH No.] and [Network].
If [Other] in [Network] is selected, also set [Net No.], [Station No.] and [CPU Machine].
(a) Operations for searching a device with specifying the file name
Start sequence program
monitor (ladder)
Automatic PLC read
(The set sequence
program file)
Automatic search for
Ladder Search Device
(Coil/Factor)
Ladder monitor screen
(The search result is
displayed.)
(b) Operations for searching a device without specifying the file name
Start sequence program
monitor (ladder)
(c)
Automatic PLC read
(All sequence program
files)
Automatic search for
Ladder Search Device
(Coil/Factor)
Ladder monitor screen
(The search result is
displayed.)
Operations for searching a connected station with specifying the file name
Start sequence program
monitor (ladder)
Automatic PLC read
(The set sequence
program file)
Ladder monitor screen
(d) Operations for setting a connected station without specifying the file name
Start sequence program
monitor (ladder)
PLC read screen
HINT
Operations for the special function switch when not using the One-touch Ladder Jump function
When the [Use One-touch Ladder Jump] is not selected, the operation for touching the special function switch is
the same as when starting from the utility.
3.3 Starting from the special function switch
3 - 10
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.3 Display Operation
(2) Starting from the alarm display (user)
By selecting an alarm in the alarm display (user) and touching the key code switch (setting the key code of the
[Display Ladder (Ladder Editor)]), the sequence program monitor (ladder) can be started and the device of
alarm can be searched.
Operation at start differs depending on the setting contents of the user alarm observation.
For the setting items for user alarm observation, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
(
: Set,
: Not set)
3
Ladder search setting*1
Operation for touching the key code switch
Specify Search File
(a)
(b)
*1
The setting of PLC station number is included in the target device.
(a) Operations for setting the Ladder Search Mode and file name
Start sequence program
monitor (ladder)
Automatic PLC read
(The set sequence
program file)
Automatic search for
Ladder Search Device
(Coil/Factor)
Ladder monitor screen
(The search result is
displayed.)
Automatic search for
Ladder Search Device
(Coil/Factor)
Ladder monitor screen
(The search result is
displayed.)
(b) Operations for setting the Ladder Search Mode
Start sequence program
monitor (ladder)
Automatic PLC read
(All sequence program
files)
(3) Starting from the simple alarm display
By selecting an alarm in the simple alarm display and touching the key code switch (setting the key code of the
[Display ladder (Ladder Editor)]), the sequence program monitor (ladder) can be started and the device of alarm
can be coil-searched.
Start sequence program
monitor (ladder)
Automatic PLC read
(All sequence program
files)
Automatic search for
Ladder Search Device
(Coil)
Ladder monitor screen
(The search result is
displayed.)
For the simple alarm display, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.3 Display Operation
3 - 11
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
Ladder Search Mode
 Changing screens
The following describes how to change the screen.
Start
Utility Main Menu
or
user-created monitor screen
At the first startup
Ladder registration
monitor window
Device test window
Communication setting
window
Factor search window
Password input window
PLC read screen
Program list window
Jump window
Ladder monitor screen
Comment file list window
Ladder editor screen
(Continued to next page)
3 - 12
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.3 Display Operation
Device search window
From previous page
Verify result window
Copy program memory
data into ROM window
3
Change open/close
cantact window
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
Replace device window
Remote operation window
Enter ladder program window
POINT
(1) Changing screens when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function
For changing screens when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function, refer to the following.
3.3 Start operation when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function
(2) Changing screens when setting the security
For changing screens when setting the security, refer to the following.
3.3.4 Setting the security
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.3 Display Operation
3 - 13
3.3.1
Setting ladder data storage location
 Setting ladder data storage location
Up to 512 files of data used for the sequence program monitor (ladder) (sequence programs, device comments) can
be stored in a selected drive.
Only the A drive (standard SD card) or B drive (USB drive) is available for storing ladder data.
For the ladder data storage destination setting, refer to the following.
When setting with GOT utility
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
When setting with GT Designer3
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
3.3.2
Reading comment files from data storage
The sequence program monitor (ladder) uses comment files stored in a data storage (SD card, USB memory, and etc)
installed in the GOT.
 Procedure for using comment files stored in data storage
The following shows the procedure for using a comment file stored in a data storage.
(1) When displaying comments in language set for language switching of GOT utility
Store comment files in a data storage on the PLC read screen.
For how to store comment files in a data storage on the PLC read screen, refer to the following.
3.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
(2) When displaying comments in any language regardless of language set for language switching of
GOT utility
1.
3 - 14
Create a SEQCMNT folder in a data storage.
When the SEQCMNT folder already exists, creating a new SEQCMNT folder is not required.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.3 Display Operation
2.
In the SEQCMNT folder, create folders for CH No., network No., station No., and CPU number of the
monitored controller with a hierarchy as shown below.
Channel No.
Network No.
3
Station No.
Item
Folder name
CH No.
CH**
Network No.
NET***
Station No.
ST***
CPU No.
CPU**
Assign numbers to "*" marks.
(When the CH No. is 1, the folder name is CH01. When the monitor target is the host station, the folder
name is ST255.)
3.
In the CPU No. folder, create folders for storing comment files by character code.
CPU No.
For storing comments with ASCII code
For storing comments with Big5 code
For storing comments with GB code
For storing comments with KS code
For storing comments with SJIS code
Item
Folder for SJIS code
4.
Folder name
SJIS
Folder for GB code
GB
Folder for Big5 code
Big5
Folder for KS code
KS
Folder for ASCII code
ASCII
Copy a comment file (.wcd) that has saved in the GX Developer format in GX Works2 or GX Developer.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.3 Display Operation
3 - 15
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
CPU No.
5.
Store the copied comment files in the folders for each character code in the data storage.
Example: Storing comment files with ASCII code in the ASCII folder.
6.
Install the data storage with the comment file on the GOT.
Switch comment files on the Ladder monitor screen for displaying the comments in appropriate language.
POINT
Restrictions on using comment files
If the comments of a comment file stored in the data storage are displayed, the comments that are assigned to the
bits of word devices cannot be displayed.
3 - 16
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.3 Display Operation
3.3.3
Program update check
The GOT checks if there is any difference between sequence program files read in the GOT and sequence programs
stored in controllers, while the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder Editor screen is displayed.
 Specification of the program update check
(1) Check criterion
3
The updated dates and times of sequence program files are compared.
The program update is checked when the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder editor screen are displayed.
After that, it is checked in a five minutes cycle while the Ladder monitor screen is displayed and in a two minutes
cycle while the Ladder Editor screen is displayed.
 Operations for the program update check
Display the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder
editor screen.
The updated dates and times of sequence
program files read in the GOT are set as
targets to be compared.
The updated dates and times of sequence
program files in controllers are acquired.
· While the Ladder monitor screen is displayed
: Wait for five minutes
· While the Ladder editor screen is displayed
: Wait for two minutes
Are the updated
dates and times of a target
to be compared the same as those of
a sequence program file, acquired
from controllers?
Yes
No
If the updated dates and times of sequence
programs are different, the following dialog box
is displayed.
The updated dates and times acquired from
controllers are set as targets to be compared.
Touch the [Cancel] button.
Touch the [OK] button.
The PLC Read Screen is displayed with
sequence program files different in their dates
and times selected in the File list
(target controller).
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.3 Display Operation
3 - 17
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
(2) Check timing
3.3.4
Setting the security
The device test window and Ladder editor screen displays can be limited by passwords.
 Specification of the security setting
(1) Security types
Type
Description
Restriction by bit devices
The changing screens is restricted by the Authorization Device.
The changing screens is authorized when the Authorization Device is ON.
Restriction by a password
The changing screens is restricted by a Password.
When changing screens, the security password input dialog box is displayed.
The restriction types above can be used together.
(2) Setting method for security
Set the security setting in the [Functional Operation Security] tab in the [Environmental Setting] dialog (Security)
on GT Designer3.
The following shows the setting method for each security type.
Type
Setting method
Restriction by bit devices
Select the [Authorization Device] check box of [Device Test Operation] or [Ladder Editor
Screen Display] and set bit devices.
Restriction by a password
Set [Password] of [Device Test Operation] or [Ladder Editor Screen Display].
For the setting of the [Environmental Setting] dialog, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
 Changing screens when setting the security
Perform the operation to switch to the
device test window or Ladder editor screen.
Is the password set?
Is the Authorization Device set?
No
Yes
The security password input dialog
box is displayed. Input a password.
Yes
Is the Authorization Device ON?
No
Touch the
key.
No
Yes An error message is displayed.
An error message is displayed.
No
Is the password correct?
Yes
The device test window or Ladder editor screen is displayed.
3 - 18
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.3 Display Operation
 perations for the security password input dialog box
(1) Displayed screen
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
1)
Password type
Description
2)
Password input area
3)
Keys
Displays the type of the password to be input. (Device test password/Ladder editor password)
Set the password.
Keys for operations in the security password input window.
(2) Key functions
Key
[X]
Function
Closes the security password input window and cancels the password input operation.
[0-9]
Switches the key type to the value.
[A-Z]
Switches the key type to the alphabet (uppercase).
[a-z]
Switches the key type to the alphabet (lowercase).
[AC]
Deletes all the input values and characters.
[Del]
Deletes an input value or character.
[Enter]
Verifies the password set in the password input area.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.3 Display Operation
3 - 19
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3
3.4 Setting Display Format
The display format of word device values displayed on screens for the sequence program monitor (ladder), language,
the display mode of sequence programs, and others can be set.
3.4.1
Switching languages of sequence programs
Languages (Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, or Korean) of comments to be displayed on screens for
the sequence program monitor (ladder) can be switched when monitoring.
For switching languages, comment files in the language to be displayed must be created in advance.
3.3.2 Reading comment files from data storage
The following shows the relations between the language selected in the GOT utility and comment files with each
character code.
Language
Comment file
Japanese
Comment files with SJIS code
Simplified Chinese
Comment files with GB code
Traditional Chinese
Comment files with Big5 code
Korean
Comment files with KS code
Other than the above
3.4.2
Comment files with ASCII code
Switching comment display mode
Set whether to display or hide comments, statements and notes on the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder editor screen.
3.6.3 Display menu
3.7.3 Display menu
3 - 20
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.4 Setting Display Format
3.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
On the PLC read screen, the GOT reads sequence programs and comment files used for the sequence program monitor
(ladder) from the PLC.
The following describes how to operate the PLC read screen.
3.5.1
Displayed contents
3
1)
5)
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
The following describes the configuration of the PLC read screen displayed after the sequence program monitor (ladder)
starts and key functions on the screen.
2)
3)
3)
4)
3)
6)
8)
9)
10)
7)
3)
No.
Item
1)
PLC name
2)
Target controller
Displays CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the target PLC CPU.
3)
Keys
Keys for operations on the PLC read screen shown in section 3.5.2. (Touch input)
4)
5)
Target drive list (target controller)
File list (target controller)
Description
Displays the label set in the PLC name setting for the target PLC CPU.
Displays the target PLC CPU model and the drives in a list.
Selecting a drive displays files within the drive in the file list (target controller).
For the drive that stores files selected in the file list (target controller), [*] is displayed to the left of
the drive name.
Displays the program types, file names, titles, sizes, dates, and times of all the files within the
drive selected in the target drive list (target controller).
(The date and time show those of updated files.)
A file to be read can be selected from the file list. (The selected file is highlighted.)
For program files, only sequence program files in the program memory can be selected.
For selecting the file name selected in the file list (GOT), the file selection in the file list (GOT) is
canceled.
When a password is set for the selected file, the password input window appears.
(
6)
Target drive list (GOT)
(1) Password input window)
Displays the drive set for [Data save location] in the sequence program monitor settings. (Only
the A drive (standard SD card) or B drive (USB drive) is available.)
For the drive that stores files displayed in the file list (GOT), [*] is displayed to the left of the drive
name.
(Continued to next page)
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
3 - 21
No.
Item
Description
7)
File list (GOT)
Displays the program types, file names, titles, sizes, dates, and times of all the files within the
drive selected in the target drive list (GOT).
(The date and time show those of updated files.)
A file to be read can be selected from the file list. (The selected file is highlighted.)
For selecting the file name selected in the file list (target controller), the file selection in the file list
(target controller) is canceled.
8)
Total file size
Displays the total data size of files selected in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT).
9)
Number of selected files
Displays the total number of files selected in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT).
10)
Message display area
Displays error messages and others.
(1) Password input window
(a) Displayed screen
1)
2)
1)
2)
3)
3)
4)
4)
3)
3)
(For alphabet input)
(For numerical input)
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
Description
Displays the type of the password to be input. (Program password/Comment password/
Parameter password)
1)
Password type
2)
Password input area
3)
File name
4)
Keys
Set the password.
Displays the file name.
Keys for operations in the password input window shown in (b)
(b) Key functions
No.
[X]
Closes the password input window and cancels the password input operation.
[0-9]
Switches the key type to the value.
[Sign]
Switches the key type to the symbol.
[A-Z]
Switches the key type to the alphabet (uppercase).
[a-z]
Switches the key type to the alphabet (lowercase).
[AC]
Deletes all the input values and characters.
[Del]
Deletes an input value or character.
[Enter]
3 - 22
Description
Verifies the password set in the password input area.
When the password verification for the first file is successful, the password verification for the other
files is automatically executed with the same password.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
3.5.2
Key functions
The following shows the functions of the keys used for operating the PLC read screen.
Key
[Select CPU]
[X]
Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the PLC read screen appears.
The key is disabled when the last screen is the GOT utility screen or user-created monitor screen.
3
Displays the communication setting window.
(
(1) Communication setting window)
Exits the sequence program monitor (ladder) and returns the screen to the sequence program monitor (ladder) startup
screen.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
[Recommend]
[Proceed]
Available when program files are displayed in the target drive list (target controller).
Touching the key selects all the sequence program files, common comment files, and comment files for the selected
sequence program files in the file list (target controller).
When files with the same name are displayed in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT), touching the key
selects a file as shown below.
• For sequence program files
When the updated dates and times differ between the files, touching the key selects the file in the file list (target
controller).
When the updated dates and times are the same between the files, touching the key selects the file in the file list
(GOT).
• For comment files
When the updated dates and times differ between the files, touching the key selects the latest file.
When the updated dates and times are the same between the files, touching the key selects the file in the file list
(GOT).
Writes the file selected in the file list (target controller) into the data storage displayed in the target drive list (GOT).
The file written into the data storage on the PLC read screen is stored in the SEQDAT folder.
After writing, among files other than comment files in the data storage, files that are not selected in the file list (GOT)
are deleted. Then, the program list window appears.
(
(2) Program list window)
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
3 - 23
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
[←Back]
Function
(1) Communication setting window
(a) Displayed screen
1) 3)
4)
2)
1) 3)
4)
2)
5)
5)
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
Description
1)
CH No. input area
2)
Network No. input area
3)
Station No. input area
4)
CPU No. input area
Set the CPU No.
5)
CH No. selection key
Select a CH No.
6)
Keys
Set the CH No. for the target controller.
Set the network No. for the target controller.
Set the station No. of the target controller.
When the station No. is set to the host station (FF), set the network No. to 0.
Keys for operations in the communication setting window shown in (b). (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key
Function
[X]
Closes the communication setting window.
When any of the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. is not input and the monitor target is
not set, the communication setting window does not close.
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
[AC]
Deletes all the input values and characters.
[Del]
Deletes an input value or character.
[Enter]
3 - 24
Moves the cursor when the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No.
input area.
When the cursor is in the CPU No. input area and settings for the CH No., network No., and station
No. are completed, the communication setting window closes and the PLC read screen appears.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
(2) Program list window
Displaying the read sequence programs in a list is available.
(a) Displayed screen
3
2)
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
1)
3)
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
Description
1)
Sequence program file list
2)
Keys
Displays the file names and execution statuses of the read sequence programs.
The execution statuses show execution types set for the programs.
A touched sequence program file is highlighted.
Keys for operations in the program list window shown in (b). (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key
[X]
Function
Closes the Program List window.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
[Display]
Displays the sequence program file selected in the sequence program file list on the Ladder monitor
screen.
(
3.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen)
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
3 - 25
3.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen
On the Ladder monitor screen, the GOT displays the read sequence program.
The following describes how to operate the Ladder monitor screen.
3.6.1
Displayed contents
The following describes the configuration of the Ladder monitor screen, menus and key functions on the screen.
1)
2)
3)
4) 5) 6) 5)
5)
7)
5)
8)
No.
Item
Description
1)
PLC name
2)
Target controller
Displays the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No of the target PLC CPU as shown below.
• CH No. network No.-station No./CPU No.
3)
Program name
Displays the file name of the displayed sequence program.
4)
Number of steps
5)
Keys
Displays the label set in the PLC name setting for the target PLC CPU.
Displays the number of steps for the displayed sequence program.
Keys operations for the Ladder monitor screen shown in 3.6.2. (Touch input)
Displays the read sequence program.
By touching a device, it is selected and surrounded with a green frame.
• The following shows the conductive status
Non-conductive status
Conductive status
Contact
Coil
6)
Ladder display area
Instruction
*1
• When contacts, coils, and outputs are the selection status, touching the area displays the device
search window.
(
3.8.1 Device/Contact/Coil search)
• Displaying the first step number
When the Ladder registration monitor window is opened, the first step number of registerable
ladder blocks is highlighted. Touching the area registers the specified ladder block in the window.
(For the Factor mode, it is not registered even if it is touched.)
(
3.6.3 Display menu (1) Ladder registration monitor window)
(Continued to next page)
3 - 26
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen
No.
Item
7)
Current device value display area
8)
Message display area
*1
3.6.2
Description
Displays the current value of the displayed word device.
Displays error messages and others.
The conductive status of the following instructions is displayed only on the screen.
SET, RST, PLS, PLF, SFT, SFTP, FF, DELTA, DELTAP, MC
3
Key functions
Key
Function
Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the Ladder monitor screen appears.
The key is disabled when the last screen is the GOT utility screen or user-created monitor screen.
[←Back]
[Device test]
Sets the device test mode.
Touching the key in the device test mode cancels the device test mode.
(
3.9 Test Operation)
Displays the Edit menu. Touching [Start editing] displays the Ladder editor screen.
[Edit]
(
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen)
Displays the Find menu.
[Find]
(
3.6.3 Find menu)
Displays the Display menu.
[Display]
(
[Monitoring mode]
3.6.3 Display menu)
Displays the Monitoring Mode menu.
(
3.6.3 Monitoring Mode menu)
The comment and note of the touched line can be displayed/hidden.
If the touched line is the first line in the ladder block, the statement of the touched ladder block can be displayed/
hidden.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
3.6.3
Menus
The following shows operations for the menus displayed on the Ladder monitor screen.
 Edit menu
Key
[Start editing]
Function
Reference section
Switches to the Ladder editor screen.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen
3.7
3 - 27
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
The following shows the functions of the keys used for operating the Ladder monitor screen.
 Find menu
Key
[Jump]
[Find device]
Function
Reference section
3.7.3 Find/Replace
menu (1)
Displays the jump window.
Displays the device search window.
3.8.1
[Find contact]
Displays the device search window
3.8.1
[Find coil]
Displays the device search window
3.8.1
Displays the Factor window.
3.8.2
[Factor search]
 Display menu
Key
Function
[Hide comments]
Hides the comments, statements or notes in the ladder display area.
[Show comments]
Displays the comments, statements or notes in the ladder display area.
[Comment change]
Displays the comment file list window.
Reference section
3.4.2
[Device Monitor]
2.
[Ladder registration monitor]
Displays the Ladder registration monitor window.
(1)
[Delete all registered ladder]
Deletes all registered ladder blocks in the Ladder registration monitor window.
(1)
[Program list]
[PLC diagnosis]
[PLC read]
3 - 28
Displays the window for the device monitor.
3.7.3 Display menu (1)
Displays the program list window
Displays the PLC diagnosis screen.
Displays the PLC read screen.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen
3.5.2 (2)
3.7.3 Online menu (2)
3.5
(1) Ladder registration monitor window
Displaying or deleting the registered ladder blocks is available.
(a) Displayed screen
2)
1)
2)
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
Description
1)
Ladder display area
A ladder block selected on the Ladder monitor screen is added as the last registered
ladder block on the Ladder registration monitor window.
Touching the first step number displays the dialog box to delete the ladder block. (For the
Factor mode, it is not deleted even if it is touched.)
2)
Keys
Keys for operations in the Ladder registration monitor window shown in (b).
(b) Key functions
Item
Description
[X]
Closes the Ladder registration monitor window.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
Scrolls the display area right and left by one column.
Scrolls the display area right and left by one page.
 Monitoring Mode menu
Key
Local device monitor
Function
Displays local devices monitored by the GOT.
Reference section
(1)
(1) Monitoring local devices
(a) When the GOT monitors local devices, the scan time increases.
(b) When local devices are displayed on the screen, touching the [local device monitor] key cancels the display
of local devices.
(c)
When the Ladder monitor screen is switched to other screen, or the displayed program is switched to other
program, the GOT cancels the display of local devices.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen
3 - 29
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
On the Ladder editor screen, editing sequence programs, finding devices, and displaying comments are available.
The following describes how to operate the Ladder editor screen.
3.7.1
Displayed contents
 Ladder editor screen
The following describes the configuration of the Ladder editor screen, menus and key functions on the screen.
1)
2)
3) 4)
5)
6)
6)
7)
8)
No.
Item
1)
PLC name
2)
Target controller
3)
Drive name
4)
Program name
5)
Number of steps
6)
Keys
Description
Displays the label set in the PLC name setting for the target PLC CPU.
Displays the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the target PLC CPU as shown
below.
• CH No. network No.-station No./CPU No.
Displays the drive of the controller for the displayed sequence program.
Displays the file name of the displayed program.
Displays the number of steps for the displayed sequence program.
Keys for operations for the Ladder editor screen shown in 3.7.2. (Touch input)
Displays the read sequence program.
By touching a contact, coil, statement, or note, the item is highlighted and the Ladder input
window is displayed.
7)
Ladder display area
8)
Message display area
(
(1) Enter ladder program window)
Touch [Show comments] from the [Display] menu to display the comments, statements or
notes.
Touch [Hide comments] from the [Display] menu to hide the comments, statements or notes.
Displays the first step number of ladder blocks.
Touching the first step number of ladder blocks highlights the touched position, and displays the
Enter ladder program window.
(
3 - 30
(1) Enter ladder program window)
Displays error messages and others.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
POINT
(1) Restrictions on ladder blocks that can be edited with the sequence program monitor (ladder)
In the sequence program monitor (ladder), ladder blocks exceeding 25 lines cannot be edited.
Even ladder blocks displayed within 24 lines with GX Works2/GX Developer may be displayed exceeding 25
lines on the GOT.
3
(2) Displaying the Ladder editor screen when setting the security
By setting the security on GT Designer3, the display of the Ladder editor screen can be limited.
For the security setting, refer to the following.
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.3.4 Setting the security
(1) Enter ladder program window
Editing sequence programs is available.
(a) Displayed screen
2)
3)
1)
3)
3)
1)
2)
(Reduced size)
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
1)
Ladder symbol display area
2)
Text display area
3)
Keys
Description
Displays the ladder symbol selected in the ladder display area.
Displays devices, sequence programs, statements, and notes selected in the Ladder
symbol display area.
The cursor is displayed at the position to be input.
If devices, sequence programs, statements, and notes are not fully displayed in the
display area, move the cursor to the border of the side where the display was cut, and
touch the cursor to scroll the displayed contents.
Only one-byte alphanumeric characters can be input for statements and notes.
If characters other than one-byte alphanumeric characters input on GX Works2/GX
Developer are deleted on the GOT, they cannot be input again.
Keys for operations in the Enter ladder program window shown in (b).
POINT
Types of statements and notes that can be entered
Statements and notes that can be entered are integrated statements and notes.
Peripheral statements and notes cannot be entered.
(If the * is entered at the start of statements and notes, an error occurs.)
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
3 - 31
(b) Key functions
Key
[X]
Function
Closes the Enter ladder program window. The displayed contents are not reflected.
Touch the key to input a normally open contact.
Touch the key to input a normally closed contact.
Touch the key to input a leading edge pulse.
Touch the key to input a trailing edge pulse.
Touch the key to input a leading edge pulse rejection.
Touch the key to input a trailing edge rejection.
Touch the key to input a conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse.
Touch the key to input a conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse.
Touch the key to input a coil.
Touch the key to input an application instruction.
Touch the key to input a vertical line.
Touch the key to delete a vertical line.
Touch the key to input a horizontal line.
Touch the key to delete a ladder.
[Insert row]
Inserts one row in the specified position.
[Delete row]
Deletes the specified row.
[Insert column]
Inserts one column in the specified position.
[Delete column]
Deletes the specified column.
[ENT]
Reflects the displayed contents, and closes the Enter ladder program window.
Reduces the size of the Enter ladder program window.
Changes the Enter ladder program window from the reduced size to the default size.
[Cap]
3 - 32
Switches the alphabetic characters between the uppercase and the lowercase.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
(c)
Inputting or deleting ladders
• Inputting contacts or instructions
(Operation example: Inputting a contact (X0))
1.
Touch a position to input a contact (X0).
2.
The Enter ladder program window appears.
3.
Touch the
key.
The ladder symbol corresponding to the touched
key is displayed on the ladder symbol display
area.
Input X0 in the text display area, and touch the
[ENT] key.
4.
The contact (X0) is input.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
3 - 33
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3
• Deleting contacts or instructions
(Operation example: Deleting a contact (X0))
1.
Touch a contact (X0) to be deleted.
2.
The Enter ladder program window appears.
3.
Touch the [X] key.
Touch the end position of the contact (X0).
4.
The contact (X0) is deleted.
Touch an end position.
3 - 34
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
• Inputting vertical lines or horizontal lines
(Operation example: Inputting a vertical line)
1.
Touch a position to input a vertical line.
2.
The Enter ladder program window appears.
3.
Touch the
key.
Touch the end position to input the vertical line.
4.
The vertical line is input.
Touch an end position.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
3 - 35
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3
• Deleting vertical lines or horizontal lines
(Operation example: Deleting a vertical line)
1.
Touch a position to delete a vertical line.
2.
The Enter ladder program window appears.
3.
Touch
key.
Touch the end position to delete the vertical line.
4.
The vertical line is deleted.
Touch an end position.
3 - 36
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
• Inputting rows and columns
(Operation example: Inputting a row)
1.
Touch a position to insert a row.
2.
The Enter ladder program window appears.
3.
Touch the [Insert row] key.
The Enter ladder program window is closed, and
the row is inserted.
1.
Touch a position to delete a row.
2.
The Enter ladder program window appears.
3.
Touch the [Delete row] key.
The Enter ladder program window is closed, and
the row is deleted.
• Deleting rows and columns
(Operation example: Deleting a row)
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
3 - 37
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3
3.7.2
Key functions
The following shows the functions of keys used for operating the Ladder editor screen.
Key
[←Back]
[Edit]
[Find/Replace]
Function
Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the Ladder editor screen appears.
The key is disabled when the last screen is the GOT utility screen or user-created monitor screen.
Displays the Edit menu.
(
Displays the Find/Replace menu.
When the Find/Replace menu is displayed, touching the key closes the menu.
(
[Convert]
[Display]
[Online]
[X]
3.7.3 Edit menu)
3.7.3 Find/Replace menu)
Displays the Convert menu.
(
3.7.3 Convert menu)
Displays the Display menu.
(
3.7.3 Display menu)
Displays the Online menu.
(
3.7.3 Online menu)
Exits the Ladder editor screen and returns the screen to the sequence program monitor (ladder) startup screen.
The comment and note of the touched line can be displayed/hidden.
If the touched line is the first line in the ladder block, the statement of the touched ladder block can be displayed/
hidden.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
3 - 38
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
3.7.3
Menus
The following shows operations for the menus displayed on the Ladder editor screen.
 Edit menu
Key
Function
Reference section
[Undo]
Undoes the last edit operation.
The GOT can be returned to the state right after the last but one
conversion, write during RUN, Replace Device or Change open/
close contact.
-
[Redo]
Redoes the operation which was undone using the [Undo] key.
-
Restores the edited ladder to the state just after conversion.
-
Executes the program check to check if programs have consistency
or double coils do not exist.
-
[Restore program to the state after conversion]
[Check program]
POINT
Deleting ladders which are not converted
When deleting ladders which are not converted, a dialog box is displayed.
When touching the [OK] button in the dialog box, the ladders which are not converted are deleted, as well as the
operation history. Therefore, the [Undo] and [Redo] keys do not operate.
Also, touch the [Cancel] button to return to the previous screen.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
3 - 39
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3
 Find/Replace menu
Key
[Jump]
[Find device]
Displays the jump window.
Displays the device search window.
Reference section
(1)
3.8.1
[Find contact]
Displays the device search window.
3.8.1
[Find coil]
Displays the device search window.
3.8.1
[Replace device]
Displays the replace device window.
3.8.3
Displays the change open/close contact window.
3.8.4
[Change open/close contact]
3 - 40
Function
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
(1) Jump window
1)
2)
3
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
2)
(a) Displayed contents
No.
Item
Description
1)
Jump destination step
number input area
2)
Keys
Displays the input step number.
Keys for operations in the jump window shown in (b). (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key
[X]
[Enter]
Function
Closes the jump window.
Displays a row that includes the input step number on the center of the ladder display area.
[Del]
Deletes an input value or character.
[AC]
Deletes all the input values and characters.
 Convert menu
Key
Function
[Convert]
[Convert (Online change)]
Reference section
Convert the editing program to the execution program.
-
Convert the editing program to the execution program and execute the online
change to controllers.
-
POINT
Precautions for the online change
For the precautions for the online change, refer to the following.
3.2.4 Precautions
Instruction Manual of the controller to use
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
3 - 41
 Display menu
Key
Function
[Hide comments]
Hides the comments, statements or notes in the ladder display area.
[Show comments]
Displays the comments, statements or notes in the ladder display area.
[Comment change]
Displays the comment file list window.
Reference section
3.2.4
[Program list]
[PLC diagnosis]
[PLC read]
3 - 42
Displays the program list window
Displays the PLC diagnosis screen.
Displays the PLC read screen.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
(1)
3.5.2 (2)
3.7.3 Online menu (2)
3.5
(1) Comment file list window
The GOT displays the comment file list.
(a) Displayed screen
3
2)
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
Description
1)
Comment file list
Among comment files stored in the data storage, the file names and titles of the comment
files, and common comment files used for the displayed sequence program are displayed.
For switching comments, select a comment file to be used.
A selected comment file is highlighted.
2)
Keys
Keys for operations in the comment file list window shown in (b) (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key
[X]
Function
Closes the Comment file list window.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
[Apply changes]
Closes the Comment file list window and displays the ladder display area with the comments of the
file selected from the comment file list.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
3 - 43
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
2)
1)
 Online menu
Key
[PLC read]
[Write to PLC]
Function
Displays the PLC read screen.
Checks the edited sequence program, and writes the program into the PLC
CPU.
Set the PLC CPU to the STOP status, and write the program into the PLC CPU.
To execute the online change, execute it using the [Convert (Online change)] in
the [Convert] menu.
(
3.5
-
Convert menu)
[Verify with PLC]
Verifies the sequence program displayed on the ladder display area and the
program in the PLC CPU.
If the programs do not match, the Verify result window is displayed.
(1)
[PLC diagnosis]
Displays the PLC diagnosis screen.
(2)
Displays the Remote operation window.
(3)
Displays the Copy program memory data into ROM window.
(4)
Displays the Ladder monitor screen.
3.6
[Remote operation]
[Write the program memory to
ROM]
[Start monitor]
3 - 44
Reference section
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
(1) Verify result window
Displaying the result of the program verification with the PLC is available.
(a) Displayed screen
2)
1)
4)
3)
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
Description
1)
Verification result display
area
2)
Program name display area
3)
Unmatched item count
display area
4)
Keys
Displays the unmatched items.
Up to 100 items are displayed. The program verification is stopped when unmatched
items are more than 100.
Displays the file name of the verified program.
Displays the number of unmatched items displayed on the Verify result window.
Keys for operations in the Verify result window shown in (b). (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key
[X]
Function
Closes the Verify result window.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
3 - 45
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3
(2) PLC diagnosis window
Displays the PLC diagnosis screen.
(a) Displayed screen
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
1)
Error No.
2)
Error contents
3)
Occurrence date and time
4)
Description
Displays the error number of the destination PLC found by PLC diagnosis.
Displays [No errors exist.] when no error occurs.
Program name
5)
Step No.
Displays the message corresponding to the error number of the destination PLC.
Displays the error occurrence date and time when an error occurs in the destination PLC.
Displays the program name when the error in the destination PLC is a program error.
If the error is not a program error, [----] is displayed.
Displays the sequence step number highlighted in yellow when the error in the destination
PLC is a program error.
By touching the sequence step number where an error occurs, the PLC diagnosis dialog
box will be closed and the screen will be switched to the ladder display.
The screen jumps to sequence step number where the error occurs and the area of error
is highlighted in a red rectangle.
If the error is not a program error, [----] is displayed.
(b) Key functions
Key
[X]
3 - 46
Function
Closes the PLC diagnosis window.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
(3) Remote operation window
Changing the operation status of the PLC CPU by using the remote operation is available.
(a) Displayed screen
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
1)
Operation
Description
Select an operation (RUN or STOP key), and touch the [Execute] key.
RUN
STOP
: The PLC CPU becomes the remote RUN status.
: The PLC CPU becomes the remote STOP status.
Set the status of devices and signals when executing the remote RUN.
Device memory
Do not clear
2)
STOP
RUN operation
Clear all except latch
Clear all
Signal flow
Save
Turn OFF
Turn ON
3)
[Execute]
: The PLC CPU operates device values prior to the remote
STOP.
: Clears all device values to zero except the latched devices.
: Clears all device values to zero.
: Keeps signals prior to the remote STOP, and outputs the
signals.
: Turns off the signal.
: Turns on the signal.
Executes the remote RUN or STOP.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
3 - 47
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3
(4) Copy program memory data into ROM window
Writing data in the program memory into a ROM is available.
(a) Displayed screen
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
Description
Touch the target ROM.
3 - 48
1)
Target
2)
[Execute]
Standard ROM
IC card (ROM)
:
:
Set the standard ROM in the PLC CPU as the target.
Set the IC memory card (Flash card) inserted in the PLC CPU as
the target.
Touching the key writes data in the program memory into the target ROM.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
3.8 Find/Replace Operation
Device/Contact/Coil search
Ladder blocks including the set devices are searched.
They can be searched continuously in multiple sequence program files.
3
1.
Execute any of the following operations to display the device search window.
• Touch the [Find]
[Find device]/[Find contact]/[Find coil] menu on the Ladder monitor screen.
• Touch the [Find/Replace]
[Find device]/[Find contact]/[Find coil] menu on the Ladder editor screen.
2.
Set a device to be searched and touch the
• Displayed screen
/
/[Enter] key
1)
1)
2)
2)
(For alphabet input)
No.
(For numerical input)
Item
Description
1)
Device input area
2)
Keys
Set a device to be searched.
Bit device words cannot be specified.
The device can be input also by selecting a device on the ladder monitor screen, ladder editor
screen, Ladder registration monitor window.
Keys for operations in the device search window shown in (b).
• Key functions
Key
[X]
[AC]
Function
Closes the device search window.
Deletes all the input values and characters.
[Del]
Deletes an input value or character.
[0-9]
Switches the key type to the value.
[A-Z]
Switches the key type to the alphabet.
Searches the input device in descending order of the step number.
Searches the input device in ascending order of the step number.
If the device is selected on the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder editor screen, the search starts from the
selected device.
(Continued to next page)
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.8 Find/Replace Operation
3 - 49
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.8.1
Key
[Enter]
3.
3 - 50
Function
Searches the input device in ascending order of the step number.
If the device is selected on the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder editor screen, the search starts from the
selected device.
However, the search starts always from the start of the program in the following conditions.
• When searching for the first time after the device search window is displayed.
• When starting to search consecutively after searching
The ladder block which has the searched device is displayed and the device is surrounded with a green frame.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.8 Find/Replace Operation
3.8.2
Factor search
The contact point that affected the set device status (ON/OFF) is searched backwards in ladder blocks.
1.
Touch the [Find]
2.
Set a device to be searched, and touch the [Enter] key
• Displayed screen
[Factor] menu from the Ladder monitor screen to display the factor search window.
1)
1)
2)
2)
(For alphabet input)
No.
(For numerical input)
Item
Description
1)
Device input area
2)
Keys
Set a device to be searched.
Bit device words cannot be specified.
Also, by selecting a device on the Ladder monitor screen, the device can be input.
Keys for operations in Factor search window.
• Key functions
Key
[X]
[AC]
Function
Closes the Factor search window.
Deletes all the input values and characters.
[Del]
Deletes an input value or character.
[0-9]
Switches the key type to the value.
[A-Z]
Switches the key type to the alphabet.
[Enter]
By touching the key, the Factor search window is closed and the Ladder registration monitor window is
displayed. The search starts from the last step.
If the device is selected on the Ladder monitor screen, the search starts from the selected device.
When the search is executed, ladder blocks registered in the Ladder registration monitor window are deleted.
The following shows the target instructions and coils for Factor search.
Instruction, coil
Instruction
Coil
Target of the search operation
LD, LDI, AND, ANI, OR, ORI
OUT, OUTH
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.8 Find/Replace Operation
3 - 51
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3
3.
The Factor search window is closed and the Ladder registration monitor window is displayed.
The sequence programs displayed on the ladder monitor screen are searched. Then, the factor ladder blocks for
the set device are registered in order.
The ladder blocks newly registered are always displayed in the Ladder monitor window during the factor search.
The factor devices are highlighted.
For the Ladder registration monitor window, refer to the following.
3.6.3 Display menu (1) Ladder registration monitor window
4.
The message [Factor search is completed.] is displayed in the message area when the search is completed.
When closing the Ladder registration monitor window, the factor search mode is released.
POINT
Cancellation of the factor search
(1) When there are multiple factor contacts
The message [Factor search was aborted because there were multiple factor contact points.] is displayed in
the message area on the ladder monitor screen.
When continuing the factor search based on the interrupted result, execute the factor search based on one of
the found contacts.
(2) When the ladder blocks registered in the Ladder registration monitor window exceed 100
The message [Factor search was aborted because the number of ladder blocks exceeded 100.] is displayed
in the message area on the ladder monitor screen.
When restarting the factor search, proceed the factor search based on the contact of the 100th ladder block.
3 - 52
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.8 Find/Replace Operation
3.8.3
Replace device
1.
Touch the [Find/Replace]
window.
2.
Set the current device and new device, and touch the [Enter] key.
• Displayed screen
[Replace device] menu on the Ladder editor screen to display the Replace device
1)
2)
3)
3)
(For alphabet input)
(For numerical input)
No.
Item
Description
1)
Current device display area
Set a current device.
The device can be input also by selecting a device on the Ladder editor screen.
2)
New device display area
Set a new device.
The device can be input also by selecting a device on the Ladder editor screen.
3)
Keys
Displays the keys used in the operation in the Replace device window.
• Key functions
Key
[X]
Function
Closes the Replace device window.
Touching the key after inputting a current device moves the cursor to the new device display area.
[0-9]
Switches the key type to the value.
[A-Z]
Switches the key type to the alphabet (uppercase).
[a-z]
Switches the key type to the alphabet (lowercase).
[AC]
Deletes all the input values and characters.
[Del]
Deletes an input value or character.
[Enter]
3.
Replaces the current device to the new device.
All the old devices in the sequence programs displayed on the Ladder editor screen are replaced with new devices.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.8 Find/Replace Operation
3 - 53
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3
1)
2)
3.8.4
Change open/close cantact
1.
Touch the [Find/Replace]
[Change open/close cantact] menu on the Ladder editor screen to display the Change
open/close cantact window.
2.
Set the device to change the contact and touch the [Enter] key.
• Displayed screen
1)
1)
2)
2)
(For alphabet input)
(For numerical input)
No.
Item
Description
1)
Device input area
2)
Keys
Set a device for changing a normally open contact or a normally closed contact.
The item can be set also by selecting in the ladder editor screen.
Displays the keys used in the operation in the Change open/close cantact window.
• Key functions
Key
[X]
[0-9]
Switches the key type to the value.
Switches the key type to the alphabet (uppercase).
[a-z]
Switches the key type to the alphabet (lowercase).
[AC]
Deletes all the input values and characters.
[Del]
3 - 54
Closes the Change open/close cantact window.
[A-Z]
[Enter]
3.
Function
Deletes an input value or character.
Changes a normally open contact or a normally closed contact.
The contacts of devices in the sequence program displayed in the Ladder editor screen are changed from A to B or
B to A.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.8 Find/Replace Operation
3.9 Test Operation
In the device test mode, device values can be changed on the screen.
For setting the device test mode, refer to the following.
3.6.2 Key functions
The test operation of devices is available by touching devices on the following screens in the device test mode.
Screen applicable to device test mode
3
Reference section
3.6.2
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
Ladder monitor screen
POINT
Displaying the device test window when setting the security
By setting the security on GT Designer3, the display of the device test window can be limited.
For the security setting, refer to the following.
3.3.4 Setting the security
Touching a device displays the device test window.
(1) When touching bit devices
A bit device is switched between ON and OFF states in the device test window.
(2) When touching word devices
The GOT writes the value input in the device test window into the selected word device.
 How to operate device test window
(1) Bit devices
(a) Displayed screen
1)
2)
2)
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
1)
Device
2)
Keys
Description
Displays the selected device.
Keys for operations in the device test window shown in (b).
(b) Key functions
Key
[X]
Function
Closes the device test window.
[ON]
Turns on the bit device and writes the device state to the PLC CPU.
[OFF]
Turns off the bit device and writes the device state to the PLC CPU.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.9 Test Operation
3 - 55
(2) Word devices
(a) Displayed screen
1)
2)
3)
1)
2)
3)
4)
4)
(Monitoring mode : 16-bit integer (DEC))
(Monitoring mode : 32-bit integer (HEX))
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
1)
Device
Description
2)
Device value input area
3)
Input mode
4)
Keys
Displays the selected device.
Set the value to be written into the selected device.
Displays the current input mode. (DEC: decimal number. HEX: hexadecimal number)
Keys for operations in the device test window shown in (b).
(b) Key functions
Key
[X]
[DEC/HEX]
[Enter]
3 - 56
Function
Closes the device test window.
Switches the input modes. (DEC, HEX)
Writes the value input in the device value input area into the PLC CPU.
[Del]
Deletes an input value or character.
[AC]
Deletes all the input values and characters.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.9 Test Operation
3.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action
The following shows the error messages for the sequence program monitor (ladder) and the corrective actions.
 Error messages for data-storing destination access
Description
File access error. Please check the
[drive name] drive.
• No data storage is inserted in the GOT.
• The SD card cover is opened.
• A data storage with a format error is
inserted in the GOT.
• The data storage has insufficient free
space for writing a file.
• The folder for the sequence program
monitor (ladder) in the data storage is
write-protected.
Failed to write the (file name) to the
[drive name] drive. Please check the
[drive name] drive.
• No data storage is inserted in the GOT.
• The SD card cover is opened.
• A data storage with a format error is
inserted in the GOT.
• The data storage has insufficient free
space for writing a file.
• The folder for the sequence program
monitor (ladder) in the data storage is
write-protected.
The [drive name] drive has insufficient
free space. The file cannot be saved.
The data storage has insufficient free space
for writing a file.
The file (file name) is broken. The file is
unselected.
The read file in the data storage is
corrupted.
3
Corrective action
•
•
•
•
•
Insert a data storage without a format error in the GOT.
Close the SD card cover.
Delete files in the data storage.
Insert a data storage with a large capacity.
Cancel the write-protect setting for the folder that is used
for the sequence program monitor (ladder) in the data
storage.
•
•
•
•
•
Insert a data storage without a format error in the GOT.
Close the SD card cover.
Delete files in the data storage.
Insert a data storage with a large capacity.
Cancel the write-protect setting for the folder that is used
for the sequence program monitor (ladder) in the data
storage.
• Delete files in the data storage.
• Insert a data storage with a large capacity.
Read the file from the PLC CPU again.
The file (file name) is broken. Perform
PLC Read and read the file again.
• The temporary file used on the Ladder
editor screen or the Ladder monitor
screen in the data storage is corrupted.
• The writing of files into data storage is
failed due to an insufficient capacity of
data storage.
The file (file name) is broken. Please
read the file in the program list again.
The temporary file used on the Ladder editor
screen or the Ladder monitor screen in the
data storage is corrupted.
Select the program displayed in the Program list window
again.
The file (file name) is broken.
When searching for devices in an
undisplayed program, a file in the data
storage is corrupted.
Read the file from the PLC CPU again.
Failed to check program. Please check
the [drive name] drive.
The GOT cannot access the temporary file
in the data storage during a program check.
Failed to verify with PLC. Please check
the [drive name] drive.
The GOT cannot access the temporary file
in the data storage during the PLC program
verification.
Parameter file is corrupted.
Please restart the ladder editor.
The parameter file in the data storage is
corrupted.
• Read the file from the PLC CPU again.
• Delete unnecessary files in the data storage. Or insert a
data storage with a larger free space.
•
•
•
•
•
Insert a data storage without a format error in the GOT.
Close the SD card cover.
Delete files in the data storage.
Insert a data storage with a large capacity.
Cancel the write-protect setting for the folder that is used
for the sequence program monitor (ladder) in the data
storage.
•
•
•
•
•
Insert a data storage without a format error in the GOT.
Close the SD card cover.
Delete files in the data storage.
Insert a data storage with a large capacity.
Cancel the write-protect setting for the folder that is used
for the sequence program monitor (ladder) in the data
storage.
Exit the sequence program monitor (ladder), and then start
the function again.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action
3 - 57
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
Error message
 Error messages for communication
Error message
Description
Corrective action
Failed to communicate with CPU.
The GOT cannot communicate with the PLC
CPU.
• Check the line status between the GOT and the PLC CPU,
and make the GOT communicate with the PLC CPU.
• Check if the PLC CPU supports the sequence program
monitor (ladder).
Failed to communicate with CPU.
The GOT cannot communicate with the PLC
CPU.
• Check the line status between the GOT and the PLC CPU,
and make the GOT communicate with the PLC CPU.
• Check if the PLC CPU supports the sequence program
monitor (ladder).
Failed to get the information of CPU
because of bad connection.
The GOT cannot communicate with the PLC
CPU.
Check the line status between the GOT and the PLC CPU,
and make the GOT communicate with the PLC CPU.
Failed to get the information.
• The GOT cannot communicate with the
PLC CPU.
• A file with faulty file name is selected.
• Check the communications between the GOT and PLC
CPU, and make sure that the GOT communicates with the
PLC CPU.
• Select the file after changing the message display
language to one which can display the file name in the
utility.
• Change the file name with GX Works2/GX Developer.
The CPU protect switch is ON. Turn
OFF the protect switch.
• The system protect switch of the PLC
CPU is on.
• The PLC CPU is in the boot process.
• Turn off the system protect switch of the PLC CPU.
• Wait until the boot process of the PLC CPU is completed.
The CPU is not in STOP mode. Please
change the CPU to STOP mode.
Any operation that the PLC CPU cannot
execute during running is performed.
Set the PLC CPU to the STOP status.
CPU drive error. Please confirm the
drive status.
The target drive does not function.
Format the target drive by using GX Works2/GX Developer.
The specified file does not exist in the
CPU. Please confirm the file in the drive.
The specified file does not exist in the PLC
CPU.
Check files in the specified drive of the PLC CPU.
The specified file in the CPU is invalid.
Please confirm the file in the drive.
The specified file in the PLC CPU is
corrupted.
Delete the specified file by using GX Works2/GX Developer,
and then create the file again.
The file cannot be accessed while it is
being accessed by other connected
equipment or it is being transferred.
• Other GOTs or GX Works2/GX Developer
access the connected PLC CPU.
• The QCPU transfers program files from
the program cache memory to the
program memory.
The data cannot be written to the
specified CPU because the total data
size may exceed the drive capacity.
The specified drive of the PLC CPU runs out
of space.
Reduce the capacity of the file to be written.
The specified file is invalid.
The specified file in the PLC CPU is
corrupted.
Format the target drive by using GX Works2/GX Developer,
and then write the specified file.
There is no consecutive free space in
the drive of the specified CPU. Please
clean up the drive.
The specified drive of the PLC CPU does
not have consecutive free space.
Execute [Arrange PLC memory] with GX Works2/GX
Developer.
Failed to write data to the specified CPU.
Please check if the target flash ROM has
an error or not.
An error occurs when writing/deleting data
to/from the specified drive of the PLC CPU.
Check the specified drive by using GX Works2/GX Developer.
The specified file does not exist.
The specified drive or file does not exist in
the PLC CPU.
Read data from the PLC, and check if the specified drive
exists.
The file (file name) does not exist.
Please check if the file exists using PLC
Read.
When reading data from the PLC, the
program file corresponding to the specified
program on the ladder display area does not
exist in the PLC CPU.
Read data from the PLC, and check if the specified file exists.
The specified CPU drive has an error.
Please check the drive.
The specified drive of the PLC CPU is faulty.
• Execute [Format PLC memory] with GX Works2/GX
Developer.
• If the specified drive is the flash ROM, write data to the PLC
(flash ROM) again.
The specified file is under processing.
The specified drive of the PLC CPU is in
use.
• Access the file when other devices do not access the
connected PLC CPU.
• Access the file after QCPU completes the transference
from the program cache memory to the program memory.
Execute the same operation later.
(Continued to next page)
3 - 58
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action
Description
Corrective action
Invalid password.
The password to access the specified file is
incorrect.
Input the correct password.
The specified CPU drive is writeprotected.
Data is written to the write-protect drive of
the PLC CPU.
Cancel the write-protect setting for the specified drive of the
PLC CPU.
Too many files are being accessed at
the same time.
Other devices are accessing too many files
in the PLC CPU at the same time.
Reduce the number of files being accessed by other devices.
The specified CPU drive cannot be
accessed.
The specified drive does not exist in the
PLC CPU.
Read data from the PLC, and specify a drive that exists in the
PLC CPU.
Failed to access the specified CPU
drive. Please check the drive status.
• No memory card is inserted in the
specified drive of the PLC CPU.
• The memory card is faulty.
• Insert a memory card in the specified drive of the PLC
CPU.
• Format the memory card in the specified drive by using GX
Works2/GX Developer.
The specified CPU drive has an error.
Please check the drive status.
The specified drive in the PLC CPU does
not function.
Format the specified drive by using GX Works2/GX
Developer.
The specified CPU drive is not
formatted.
The specified drive of the PLC CPU is not
formatted.
Format the specified drive by using GX Works2/GX
Developer.
CPU memory card is not inserted.
No memory card is inserted in the specified
drive of the PLC CPU.
Insert a memory card in the specified drive.
The type of the CPU memory card is
wrong. Please check the memory card.
• An unsupported memory card is inserted
in the specified drive of the PLC CPU.
• No memory card is inserted in the
specified drive of the PLC CPU.
• The program memory of QnUDVCPU is
written to the ROM.
• Insert a supported memory card in the specified drive.
• The program memory of QnUDVCPU cannot be written to
the ROM.
The CPU is write protected. Please
remove the protection.
The PLC CPU is write-protected.
Cancel the write-protect setting for the PLC CPU.
The specified CPU drive cannot be
used. Please check the drive.
The specified drive of the PLC CPU does
not exist.
Read data from the PLC, and check if the specified drive
exists.
PLC types of the program (file name)
and the connected PLC are not the
same. Perform PLC Read and read the
data again.
The PLC CPU type of the program file
stored in the data storage differs from the
connected PLC CPU type.
Read a program file that exists in the PLC CPU.
The program before modification on the
GOT and the program being registered
on the CPU do not match. Please
perform PLC Read and read the
program again.
When a program is written into the PLC, the
target file does not exist in the PLC CPU, or
the type of the program differs from that of
the target file.
Read a program file that exists in the PLC CPU
Failed to write the value to the device.
The GOT cannot write device values to the
PLC CPU with the device test.
Read the program being displayed from the PLC again.
Parameter file is corrupted. The ladder
editor cannot be used.
The GOT cannot read parameters from the
PLC CPU.
Write the parameters to the PLC CPU by using GX Works2/
GX Developer.
The file has invalid date or timestamp.
Please check the GOT clock data.
• The date of the GOT is wrong.
• PC writing or online change is executed
to Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, or Q01CPU
when the date of the GOT is Feb. 29th.
• Set the date of the GOT properly.
• When executing PC writing or online change to the
Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, or Q01CPU, set the date of the GOT
other than Feb. 29th.
Communication of the online debug function
failed.
• Execute after registering the online debug function (online
change, trace, monitor with conditions, etc.) in GX Works2/
GX Developer.
• Execute after confirming the communication path such as
communication cables.
Specified contents of the online debug
function are invalid.
• Execute after registering the online debug function (online
change, trace, monitor with conditions, etc.) in GX Works2/
GX Developer.
• Execute after confirming the communication path such as
communication cables.
Communication of the online debug
function failed.
Specified contents of the online debug
function are invalid.
(Continued to next page)
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action
3 - 59
3
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
Error message
Error message
Description
Corrective action
An error occurred when verifying the
specified program and the program in
the CPU.
Please read the file again.
The sequence program after modification of
the online change operation differs from the
program before modification.
Execute the online change after executing PLC read to
equalize the sequence program of the GOT and PLC CPU by
PLC read.
END instruction cannot be written to a
CPU module while the module is
running.
The END instruction is inserted or deleted
by the online change.
• Check the contents of the specified sequence program file.
• Write the program after setting the PLC CPU to the stop
status.
Reserved area for online change is
insufficient.
Online change cannot be performed.
The file capacity is exceeded by the online
change.
• Check the capacity of the specified sequence program file.
• Write the program after setting the PLC CPU to the stop
status.
There are instructions that cannot be
handled in the CPU.
An instruction, which is not compatible with
the CPU type set in the project, exists in the
sequence program executing the online
change.
• Check if the PLC CPU type is correct.
• Check the sequence program and delete the invalid
instruction.
The step to be written is invalid.
• The step to be written is invalid.
• The start position of the online change
was not specified with a correct program
step No.
• Write the program after setting the PLC CPU to the stop
status.
• Check if the GX Works2/GX Developer is compatible with
the CPU type and CPU version set in the project.
• Execute the online change again.
• Write the program after setting the PLC CPU to the stop
status.
The instruction that was written during
online change is invalid.
The instruction of the online change is
wrong.
The number of blocks to be written by
online change is invalid.
Block size error (The number of the online
change is invalid.)
Check the number of the block for the online change.
The specified file is too large to read.
A program file exceeding 260k steps was
read.
Split the program to sections within 260k steps.
The parameter file cannot be read. The
ladder editor function cannot be used.
No parameter file exists.
Write the parameter file using the peripheral software of the
PLC CPU.
The function is not supported by the
specified CPU version.
• The function that is not supported by the
specified PLC CPU is used.
• The program memory of QnUDVCPU is
written to the ROM.
The executed function cannot be used.
 Error messages for editing
Error message
Description
Corrective action
The instruction is incorrect.
The input instruction is incorrect.
Input the correct instruction.
The specified device is not available.
The input device name is incorrect.
Input the correct device name.
The device number is out of range.
The device number outside the range is
input.
Input the correct device number.
Too many rows are being edited. Data
cannot be entered.
On the edited ladder, 49 or more rows are
input.
Delete rows to be 48 or less per edited ladder.
The ladder block is too large. Data
cannot be entered.
On a ladder block, 25 or more rows are
input.
Delete rows to be 24 or less per ladder block.
(Continued to next page)
3 - 60
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action
The edit position is incorrect.
Description
• A specified position is incorrect to input a
ladder.
• A space of a specified position is too
narrow to input a ladder.
• A start position and end position are not
specified in the same column to input a
vertical line.
• An end position is specified in an upper
row of the start position to input a vertical
line.
• A start position and end position are not
specified in the same row to input a
horizontal line.
• A start position and end position are not
specified in the same row to delete a
ladder.
Corrective action
• Input a ladder in a correct position.
• Insert columns, and then input a ladder.
• Specify a correct end position for a vertical line or
horizontal line, and then input the line.
• Specify a correct end position, and then delete a ladder.
The data being edited is too large.
Too many ladders are not converted. The
data cannot be converted.
Reduce the ladders which are not converted before
conversion.
Line statements exist in the ladder
program and the data cannot be edited.
Please delete the line statements from
the ladder program.
A vertical line that overlaps an interlinear
statement is input.
Delete the interlinear statement, and then input a vertical line.
PI devices exist in the ladder program
and the data cannot be edited. Please
delete the PI devices from the ladder
program.
A vertical line that overlaps a pointer or
interrupt pointer is input.
Delete the pointer or interrupt pointer, and then input a vertical
line.
• Edit the ladder block in 24 rows or less by using GX
Works2/GX Developer, and then write the program into the
PLC CPU.
• Write the program into the PLC CPU by using GX Works2/
GX Developer again because the program may be
corrupted.
There is a ladder block which cannot be
displayed in the ladder program. Data
cannot be edited.
• On a ladder block, 25 or more rows are
edited.
• An incomplete ladder block is edited.
Statements should be 64 characters or
less.
A statement with 65 characters or more was
entered.
Enter statements with 64 characters or less.
Notes should be 32 characters or less.
A note with 33 characters or more was
entered.
Enter notes with 32 characters or less.
Conversion (online change) failed due to
communication error.
The GOT fails to communicate with the PLC
during conversion (online change).
Peripheral statements cannot be
entered.
A peripheral statement was entered.
Delete the peripheral statement.
Peripheral notes cannot be entered.
A peripheral note was entered.
Delete the peripheral note.
•
•
•
•
Check the communication setting.
Check cables.
Verify with PLC.
Operate the GOT for reading the program from the PLC.
 Error messages for conversion
Error message
Description
Corrective action
The data being edited is too large.
Please reduce the data being edited.
Too many ladders are not converted. The
data cannot be converted.
Reduce the ladders which are not converted before
conversion.
There is a ladder which cannot be
converted.
Correct the ladder at the cursor position.
When a ladder block is converted, the
ladder block is not completed.
Complete the ladder block, and then convert the ladder block.
The ladder block is too large to convert.
Please reduce the size of the ladder
block.
Too large ladder blocks are not converted.
The data cannot be converted.
Delete or split the ladder block before conversion.
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action
3 - 61
3
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
Error message
 Error messages for file selection
Error message
Description
You cannot select programs other than
ladder programs.
A program that is not a ladder program is
selected.
The specified file is too large to read.
A program file having 260k steps or more is
selected.
3 - 62
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
3.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action
Corrective action
• Use the sequence program monitor (SFC) to monitor SFC
programs.
• Use GX Works2 or GX Developer to monitor SFC
programs.
Split the program.
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR
(SFC)
4.1 Features
4
With the SFC monitor function, the GOT can monitor SFC programs of controllers, and changing device values of the
programs is available.
The function improves the efficiency in troubleshooting and maintenance of PLC systems with SFC programs.
The following shows features of the SFC monitor function.
 Displaying SFC programs in SFC diagram format
The GOT can monitor SFC programs of the PLC CPU and display the programs in the SFC diagram format
(MELSAP3 or MELSAP-L format).
SFC diagram monitor screen
The following screens are displayed with the SFC monitor function.
• PLC read screen
(
4.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen)
• Block list screen
(
4.5 How to Operate Block List Screen)
• SFC diagram monitor screen
(
4.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen)
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.1 Features
4-1
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.
Touching a step or transition condition on the SFC diagram monitor screen displays an enlarged operation output/
transition condition sequence program.
 Switching display formats, device comment display, and languages
The following are available.
• Switching the display formats of device values
• Switching whether to display or hide device comments
• Switching languages for file names of SFC programs, comments, and others
(1) Switching display formats
On the SFC diagram monitor screen, the display formats for the current values of word devices can be switched
between decimal and hexadecimal numbers.
(2) Switching device comment display
Whether to display or hide device comments used in SFC programs can be switched.
(3) Switching languages
Block titles, file titles and comments can be displayed in the language set for the language switching in the GOT
utility with comment files created with the SJIS code, KS code, GB code, and/or ASCII code.
With a SD card storing comment files created with the SJIS code, KS code, GB code, and/or ASCII code,
comments can be displayed in the language corresponding to any character code in the SD card, regardless of
the language set in the GOT utility.
4-2
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.1 Features
 Interaction with ladder monitor function
By only selecting a device on the SFC diagram monitor screen and starting the ladder monitor, the GOT can search
and display the device in a ladder program.
(
4.6.3 Display menu)
The function is useful for searching for a device used within both a SFC program and a ladder program in the ladder
program.
Example) When turning on Y22 device with ladder program including interlock circuit
1
4
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
<PLC CPU>
<Sensor>
6
<GOT>
X1 OFF
Monitor screen (GOT)
2
SFC monitor
M10
Ladder monitor
M10 X1
3
Y22
5
Searching in
ladder program
4
1.
Finding that the machine stops
2.
Checking an active step with the SFC monitor
3.
Checking that the machine operation command (M10) is on
4.
Touching M10 and starting the ladder monitor
5.
Finding out that Y22 (machine operation) is off because X1 is off
6.
Finding out that the machine stops because the door is open (X1 is off)
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.1 Features
4-3
4.2 Specifications
4.2.1
System configuration
This section describes the system configuration for the SFC monitor function.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1
 Target controller
Controller
QCPU (Q mode)*1
LCPU
*1
For creating a multiple CPU system with the Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, and/or
Q25HCPU, use CPUs with the function version B or later.
 Connection type
This function can be used in the following connection types.
(
Function
Name
SFC monitor
Monitors SFC programs.
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
4-4
: Unavailable)
Connection form between GOT and controller
Description
*1
: Available,
MELSECNET/H
Bus
connection
Direct CPU
connection
*8
*9
Computer
link
connection
Ethernet
connection
*7
connection*8,
MELSECNET/10
connection*1*8
CC-Link IE
controller
connection*2*8,
CC-Link IE field
CC-Link
connection
ID*4
connection*3
*6*7
For the MELSECNET/10 connection, use a QCPU and network module (QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, and
QJ71BR11) with the function version B or later.
Indicates the CC-Link IE controller network connection.
Indicates CC-Link IE field network connection.
Indicates CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station).
Indicates CC-Link connection (via G4).
The Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU are not available.
SFC monitor cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.
The LCPU does not support the connection type.
When the GOT is connected to LCPU, use L6ADP-R2.
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.2 Specifications
G4*4*5
 Required extended system application
The advanced system applications shown below are required.
1.2 Required extended system application for the function
(1) Extended system application
Write the package data that has the extended system application for the sequence program monitor (SFC) to
the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
(2) Extended system application space
4
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
To write the extended system application to the GOT, certain space of the user area must be reserved for the
application.
For the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data
using other user areas, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
 Required hardware
The following hardware is required.
Hardware
SD card
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.2 Specifications
4-5
4.2.2
Devices and range that can be monitored
The device range varies depending on the CPU to be used.
(
Device
Device range
Input
X0 to 1FFF, DX0 to FFF
Output
Y0 to 1FFF, DY0 to FFF
Internal relay
M0 to 61439
Latch relay
L0 to 32767
Link relay
B0 to FFFF
Timer
T0 to 32767
Retentive timer
ST0 to 32767
Counter
C0 to 32767
Data register
D0 to 12287
Link register
W0 to 1FFF
Annunciator
F0 to 32767
Edge relay
Program display
V0 to 2047
R0 to 32767
File register
ZR0 to 4184063
Extended data register
D0 to 4212223
Extended link register
W0 to 4045FF
Link special relay
SB0 to 7FF
Link special register
SW0 to 7FF
Step relay
S0 to 8191, BL
Index register
Z0 to 19
Special relay
SM0 to 2047
Special register
SD0 to 2047
Function input
FX0 to F
Function output
FY0 to F
Function register
FD0 to 4
Link direct device
J
¥
U
¥
Module access device
¥S
*1
U3En
¥
Nesting
N0 to 14
Pointer
P0 to 4095
Interrupt pointer
I0 to 255
SFC block device
BL0 to 319
SFC transition device
TR0 to 511, BL
Network No. specification device
J0 to 255
I/O No. specification device
U0 to 1FF
3E0 to 3E3
Macro instruction argument device
VD0 to
¥TR
*1 When a ZZ device is used, "ZZ" can be displayed.
4-6
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.2 Specifications
Device monitor
display
: Possible,
: Impossible)
Search operation
4.2.3
Access range
The access range is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller.
For details of the access range, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1
4.2.4
Precautions
(1) Precautions for operations during SFC monitor startup
Do not operate the following with the GOT during the SFC monitor startup.
Doing so may delete stored data and cause the SFC monitor to operate incorrectly.
• Opening and closing of the SD card cover
• Inserting or removing a SD card
(2) Precautions for devices
(a) The GOT cannot search for indexing devices.
(b) The GOT cannot monitor local devices.
(3) Precautions for setting [Locus] for line graphs
The SFC monitor function is not available when [Locus] is set for line graphs.
For using the SFC monitor function, do not set [Locus] for line graphs.
(4) Precautions for file names (program names) of comment files to be read
Only files with the file names (program names) with one-byte alphanumeric characters are applicable to the
GOT.
When project data are created on GX Developer, use only one-byte alphanumeric characters for file names
(program names).
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.2 Specifications
4-7
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4
4.3 Operations for Display
The following describes the outline for displaying the SFC monitor operation screens after installing GOT Platform
Library, SFC Monitor, and GOT Function Expansion Library on the GOT.
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT
Starting from a special
function switch (SFC monitor)
Starting from the utility
set in the project data
Display the utility.
Touch the special function switch.
After the utility is displayed,
touch [Monitor]
[SFC monitor] from the Main Menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the User's Manual
for the GOT used.
Refer to the following manual for how to set the special
function switch.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
Set the channel No., network No.,
station No., and others.
(
4.5.2 (1) Communication
setting window)
Communication setting window
Operate the GOT for reading data
from the PLC and for displaying
the program list window.
(
4.5 How to Operate
PLC Read Screen)
(Continued to next page)
4-8
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.3 Operations for Display
(Continued to next page)
From previous page
Specifying [Block List] for [Display Screen]
in the SFC monitor detail settings of the
special function switch
From previous page
Select a program from the program list
to display the block list screen.
(
4.6 How to Operate Block
List Screen)
4
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
Specifying [SFC Diagram] for [Display Screen]
in the SFC monitor detail settings of the special
function switch
Select a block on the block list screen to
display the SFC diagram monitor screen.
(
4.7 How to Operate SFC Diagram
Monitor Screen)
End
POINT
(1) How to display the utility
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
User's Manual for the GOT used
(2) Reading data from PLC when reclosing GOT
Reading data from the PLC is not required when reclosing the GOT power, because SFC programs and
comment files are stored in a SD card for the SFC monitor function.
4.3.1 Setting SFC data storage location
(3) When GOT has no project data
The SFC monitor can be started with the utility even though the GOT has no project data.
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.3 Operations for Display
4-9
 Changing screens
The following describes how to change the screen.
Start
Utility Main Menu
or
user-created monitor screen
At the first startup
13.7.3  (3) Active block
list window
13.7.3 
(1) Comment file list
window
13.7.3 
(2) Active step list window
13.7.3 
(3) Step list window
13.5.2(1) Communication
setting window
13.5.1 (1) Password
input window
4.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
13.5.2 (2) Program list window
13.7.3 
(2) Step No./transition
condition No. search
window
13.8  (1) Bit devices
13.7.3 
(1) Device/contact/coil
search window
13.7.1 
(1) Zoom window
4.5 How to Operate Block List Screen
4.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
4 - 10
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.3 Operations for Display
4.3.1
Setting SFC data storage location
 Setting SFC data storage location
The selected drive of the GOT (SD card) can store up to 512 files of SFC data (SFC programs, device comments)
used for the SFC monitor function.
SFC data are stored in the storage location that stores ladder data for the ladder monitor function.
Only the A drive (standard SD card) or B drive (extended memory card) is available for storing SFC data.
For the ladder data storage destination setting, refer to the following.
When setting with GOT utility
4
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
When setting with GT Designer3
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.3 Operations for Display
4 - 11
4.3.2
Reading comment files from SD card
The SFC monitor function uses comment files stored in a SD card installed in the GOT.
 Procedure for using comment files stored in SD cards
The following shows the procedure for using a comment file stored in a SD card.
(1) When displaying comments in language set for language switching of GOT utility
Store comment files in a SD card on the PLC read screen.
For how to store comment files in a SD card on the PLC read screen, refer to the following.
4.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
(2) When displaying comments in any language regardless of language set for language switching of
GOT utility
Channel No.
Network No.
Station No.
CPU No.
1.
Create a SEQCMNT folder in a SD card.
When the SEQCMNT folder already exists,
creating a new SEQCMNT folder is not
required.
2.
In the SEQCMNT folder, create folders for CH
No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of
the monitored controller with a hierarchy as
shown left.
Item
CH No.
Folder name
CH**
Network No.
NET***
Station No.
ST***
CPU No.
CPU**
Assign numbers to "*" marks.
(When the CH No. is 1, the folder name is
CH01. When the monitor target is the host
station, the folder name is ST255.)
(Continued to next page)
4 - 12
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.3 Operations for Display
3.
CPU No.
For storing comments with
ASCII code
For storing comments with
GB code
For storing comments with
KS code
For storing comments with
SJIS code
In the CPU No. folder, create folders for storing
comment files by character code.
Item
Folder name
SJIS
Folder for KS code
KS
Folder for GB code
GB
Folder for ASCII code
ASCII
4.
Copy a comment file (.wcd) from the project
data of GX Developer.
4
5.
Store the copied comment files in the folders for
each character code in the SD card.
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
Folder for SJIS code
Comment character code
6.
(Example: Storing comment files with ASCII code in the ASCII folder.)
Storage folder name
SJIS code
SJIS
KS code
KS
GB code
GB
ASCII code
ASCII
Install the SD card with the comment file on the
GOT.
Switch comment files on the SFC diagram
monitor screen for displaying the comments in
an appropriate language.
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.3 Operations for Display
4 - 13
4.3.3
Setting Display Format
The display format of word device values displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen, language, the display mode of
SFC programs, and others can be set.
 Switching languages of SFC programs
Languages (Japanese/Korean/Simplified Chinese) of comments to be displayed on the SFC monitor screens can be
switched during monitoring.
For switching languages, comment files in the language to be displayed must be created in advance.
4.3.2 Reading comment files from SD card
The following shows the relations between the language selected in the GOT utility and comment files with each
character code.
Language
Comment file
Japanese
Comment files with SJIS code
Korean
Comment files with KS code
Simplified Chinese
Comment files with GB code
Other than the above
Comment files with ASCII code
 Setting display mode of SFC programs
The display mode of SFC programs on the SFC diagram monitor screen can be set.
4.6.3 Display menu
The MELSAP-L program display mode is available regardless of the read SFC program format (MELSAP3,
MELSAP-L).
In the MELSAP-L program display mode, operation output/transition condition sequence programs are displayed as
[?????] when the GOT displays a SFC program with the MELSAP3 format.
The following shows how the GOT displays sequence programs with and without the MELSAP-L program display
mode.
Item
Displayed operation output/transition
condition sequence program
With MELSAP-L program display mode
Without MELSAP-L program display mode
The GOT displays a sequence program on
the SFC diagram monitor screen.
The GOT displays a sequence program in
the zoom window by touching a step or
transition condition on the SFC diagram
monitor screen.
 Setting zoom comment display mode
Whether to display or hide comments and notes in the zoom window can be set.
4.6.3 Monitoring Mode menu
 Switching display formats between decimal and hexadecimal numbers
The display formats of word device values on the SFC diagram monitor screen can be switched between decimal and
hexadecimal numbers.
4.6.3 Display menu
4 - 14
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.3 Operations for Display
 Setting automatic scroll mode
The automatic scroll can be switched between enabled or disabled states.
In the automatic scroll mode, the GOT displays active steps on the SFC diagram monitor screen by automatically
scrolling the screen when all the following conditions are satisfied.
• No active step is displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
• The displayed block has an active step.
The step status becomes inactive.
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4
An active step in the block is
displayed by automatically
scrolling the screen.
For setting the automatic scroll mode, refer to the following.
4.6.3 Display menu
For the SFC diagram monitor screen, refer to the following.
4.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.3 Operations for Display
4 - 15
4.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
On the PLC read screen, the GOT reads SFC programs and comment files used for the SFC monitor function from the
PLC.
The following describes how to operate the PLC read screen.
4.4.1
Displayed contents
The following describes the configuration of the PLC read screen displayed after the SFC monitor starts and key
functions on the screen.
1)
2)
5)
3)
3)
4)
3)
6)
8)
9)
10)
No.
Item
1)
PLC name
2)
Target controller
3)
Keys
4)
Target drive list (target controller)
5)
File list (target controller)
7)
3)
Description
Displays the label set in the PLC name setting for the target PLC CPU.
Displays CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the target PLC CPU.
Keys for operations on the PLC read screen shown in section 13.5.2. (Touch input)
Displays the target PLC CPU model and the drives in a list.
Selecting a drive displays files within the drive in the file list (target controller).
For the drive that stores files selected in the file list (target controller), [*] is displayed to the left of
the drive name.
Displays the program types, file names/titles, sizes, dates, and times of all the files within the drive
selected in the target drive list (target controller).
(The date and time show those of updated files.)
A file to be read can be selected from the file list. (The selected file is highlighted.)
For program files, only SFC program files in the program memory can be selected.
For selecting the file name selected in the file list (GOT), the file selection in the file list (GOT) is
canceled.
When a password is set for the selected file, the password input window appears.
(
(1) Password input window)
(Continued to next page)
4 - 16
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
Item
Description
Target drive list (GOT)
Displays the drive set for [Data save location] in the MELSEC-Q/QnA ladder monitor settings. (For
the SFC monitor function, only the A drive (standard SD card) or B drive (extended memory card)
is available.)
For the drive that stores files displayed in the file list (GOT), [*] is displayed to the left of the drive
name.
7)
File list (GOT)
Displays the program types, file names/titles, sizes, dates, and times of all the files within the drive
selected in the target drive list (GOT).
(The date and time show those of updated files.)
A file to be read can be selected from the file list. (The selected file is highlighted.)
For selecting the file name selected in the file list (target controller), the file selection in the file list
(target controller) is canceled.
8)
Total file size
Displays the total data size of files selected in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT).
9)
Number of selected files
Displays the total number of files selected in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT).
10)
Message display area
6)
4
Displays error messages and others.
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
No.
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
4 - 17
(1) Password input window
After the password authentication has succeeded, the password is authenticated automatically for the following
files with the same password.
(The password input window is not displayed.)
(a) Displayed screen
1)
2)
3)
4)
4)
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
1)
Password type
Description
2)
Password input area
3)
File name
4)
Keys
Displays the type of the password to be input. (Program password/Comment password)
Set the password.
Displays the file name.
Keys for operations in the password input window shown in (b) (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key
Function
Closes the password input window and cancels the password input operation.
Switches the key type to the value.
Switches the key type to the alphabet (uppercase).
Switches the key type to the alphabet (lowercase).
Deletes all the input values and characters.
Deletes an input value or character.
Authenticates the password set in the password input area.
4 - 18
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
4.4.2
Key functions
The following shows the functions of the keys used for operating the PLC read screen.
Key
Function
Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the PLC read screen appears.
The key is disabled when the last screen is the GOT utility screen or user-created monitor screen.
Displays the communication setting window.
(
13.5.2 (1) Communication setting window)
Exits the SFC monitor and returns the screen to the SFC monitor startup screen.
4
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Available only when [0:Program Memory] is selected from the target drive list (target controller).
Touching the key selects all the SFC program files, common comment files, and comment files for the selected SFC
program files in the file list (target controller).
When files with the same name are displayed in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT), touching the key
selects a file as shown below.
• For SFC program files
When the updated dates and times differ between the files, touching the key selects the file in the file list (target
controller).
When the updated dates and times are the same between the files, touching the key selects the file in the file list
(GOT).
• For comment files
When the updated dates and times differ between the files, touching the key selects the latest file.
When the updated dates and times are the same between the files, touching the key selects the file in the file list
(GOT).
Writes the file selected in the file list (target controller) into the SD card displayed in the target drive list (GOT).
The file written into the SD card on the PLC read screen is stored in the SEQDAT folder.
After writing, among files other than comment files in the SD card, files that are not selected in the file list (GOT) are
deleted. Then, the program list window appears.
(2) Program list window
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
4 - 19
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
(1) Communication setting window
(a) Displayed screen
4) 2)
1) 3)
1) 3)
4) 2)
5)
(When the CH No. is input)
6)
(When the network No., station No.,
and CPU No. are input)
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
1)
CH No. input area
2)
Network No. input area
3)
Description
Station No. input area
Set the CH No. for the target controller.
Set the network No. for the target controller.
Set the station No. of the target controller.
When the station No. is set to the host station (FF), set the network No. to 0.
4)
CPU No. input area
Set the CPU No.
5)
CH No. selection key
Select a CH No.
6)
Keys
Keys for operations in the communication setting window shown in (b). (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key
Function
Closes the communication setting window.
When any of the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. is not input and the monitor target is
not set, the communication setting window does not close.
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
Deletes all the input values and characters.
Deletes an input value or character.
Moves the cursor when the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No.
input area.
When the cursor is in the CPU No. input area and settings for the CH No., network No., and station
No. are completed, the communication setting window closes and the PLC read screen appears.
4 - 20
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
(2) Program list window
The GOT displays the read SFC programs in a list.
(a) Displayed screen
2)
4
3)
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
Description
1)
SFC program file list
Displays the file names and execution statuses of the read SFC programs.
The execution statuses show execution types set for the programs.
A touched SFC program file is highlighted.
2)
Keys
Keys for operations in the program list window shown in (b). (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key
Function
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Displays the blocks of the SFC program file selected in the SFC program file list on the block list
screen.
(
4.5 How to Operate Block List Screen)
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
4 - 21
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
1)
4.5 How to Operate Block List Screen
On the block list screen, the GOT displays blocks within the read SFC program in a list.
The following describes how to operate the block list screen.
4.5.1
Displayed contents
The following describes the configuration of the block list screen, menus and key functions on the screen.
1)
2)
3)
4)
6)
4)
5)
4)
7)
No.
Item
1)
PLC name
2)
Target controller
Displays the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No of the target PLC CPU as shown
below.
• CH No. network No.-station No./CPU No.
3)
Program name
Displays the file name (without the extension) of the displayed program.
4)
Keys
5)
Block list
Description
Displays the label set in the PLC name setting for the target PLC CPU.
Keys for operations on the block list screen shown in section 13.6.2. (Touch input)
Displays the block numbers and block titles in the displayed program.
The block numbers are not displayed with no block.
Active blocks are highlighted.
Selecting a block title displays the block data on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
(
4 - 22
4.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen)
6)
Block information list
Displays block information for each block.
When devices are set for the block information, the set devices are displayed in the corresponding
cells.
7)
Message display area
Displays error messages and others.
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.5 How to Operate Block List Screen
4.5.2
Key functions
The following shows the functions of the keys used for operating the block list screen.
Key
Function
Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the block list screen appears.
The key is disabled when the last screen is the GOT utility screen or user-created monitor screen.
Sets the device test mode.
Touching the key in the device test mode cancels the device test mode.
(
4.7 Test Operation)
Displays menus used for operations on the block list screen.
(
4
4.5.3 Display menu)
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
Exits the SFC monitor and returns the screen to the SFC monitor startup screen.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
4.5.3
Menus
The following shows operations for the menus displayed on the block list screen.
 Display menu
Key
Function
Displays the comment file list window.
Reference section
13.7.3  Display menu (1)
Displays the program list window.
Displays the PLC read screen.
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.5 How to Operate Block List Screen
13.5.2 (2)
4.4
4 - 23
4.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
On the SFC diagram monitor screen, the GOT monitors and displays data of the block selected on the block list screen in
the SFC diagram.
The following describes how to operate the SFC diagram monitor screen.
4.6.1
Displayed contents
 SFC diagram monitor screen
The following describes the configuration of the SFC diagram monitor screen, menus and key functions on the
screen.
1) 2) 3)
11)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
5)
9)
10)
5)
Step status display
Active :
Inactive :
12)
13)
14)
No.
Item
Description
1)
Target controller
Displays the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the target PLC CPU as shown
below.
• CH No. network No.-station No./CPU No.
2)
Program name
Displays the file name of the displayed program.
3)
Block No.
Displays the block No. of the displayed block.
4)
Block title
Displays the block title of the displayed block.
5)
Keys
Keys for operations on the SFC diagram monitor screen shown in section 13.7.2. (Touch input)
Block switching tab
Displays the block No. of the block displayed in the SFC diagram display area.
Touching a tab displays the corresponding block data in the SFC diagram display area. (Tabs
displayed to the right of the touched tab are removed.)
7)
Block information display area
Displays the block information of the displayed block.
When the displayed block is in any status of the block information, the corresponding device is
highlighted.
When the block information is set, the set devices are displayed.
8)
Column No.
9)
Row No.
6)
Displays the column numbers.
Displays the row numbers.
(Continued to next page)
4 - 24
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
No.
Item
Description
Displays a SFC program in the SFC diagram format.
• Step display
Step No.
Step
Operation output sequence program*1
Comment
4
Jump destination block No.
Touching a step displays the zoom window.
SFC diagram display area
(
(1) Zoom window)
Touching a step with a jump destination block No. displays a block switching tab, and then
the jump destination block data is displayed in the SFC diagram display area.
• Transition condition display
Transition condition No.
Transition condition
Transition condition sequence program*1
Comment
Touching a transition condition displays the zoom window.
(
11)
Device current value display area
12)
Message display area
13)
Automatic scroll status display area
Displays the current values of word devices displayed in the SFC diagram display area.
Displays error messages and others.
Displays [Scrolling automatically] with the automatic scroll mode.
Nothing is displayed without the automatic scroll mode.
(
14)
Number of active steps
(1) Zoom window)
n Setting automatic scroll mode)
Displays the number of active steps in the displayed block.
Touching the item displays the active step list window.
(
13.7.3  (2) Active step list window)
*1 Operation output/transition condition sequence programs are displayed in the MELSAP-L program display mode only.
(
4.6.3 Display menu)
POINT
Displayed contents of SFC diagram monitor screen
(1) Display mode at first display of SFC diagram monitor screen
The display mode state at the first display of the SFC diagram monitor screen differs depending on the SFC
program format.
SFC program format
State at the first display
MELSAP3 format
Without MELSAP-L program display mode
MELSAP-L format
With MELSAP-L program display mode
For the display mode of SFC programs, refer to the following.
n Setting display mode of SFC programs
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
4 - 25
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
10)
(2) Comment display at first display of SFC diagram monitor screen
The following shows the order of comment files to be used at the first display of the SFC diagram monitor
screen after reading data from the PLC. (When the SD card has no comment file, no comment is displayed.)
Priority order
Comment files used for SFC diagram monitor screen
1
Comment files by program within the SEQCMNT folder in the SD card
2
Common comment files within the SEQCMNT folder in the SD card
3
Comment files by program within the SEQDAT folder in the SD card
4
Common comment files within the SEQDAT folder in the SD card
(1) Zoom window
The GOT can display operation output/transition condition sequence programs in the ladder format.
(a) Displayed screen
1)
2)
3)
ON/OFF status display of contacts and coils
ON :
OFF :
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
Description
1)
Type
2)
Ladder program display area
3)
Keys
• For displaying operation output sequence program
The step number and step comment are displayed.
• For displaying transition condition sequence program
The transition condition number and transition condition comment are displayed.
Displays an operation output/transition condition sequence program.
Comments and notes are displayed in the zoom comment display mode.
(
4.6.3 Display menu)
Keys for operations in the zoom window shown in (b). (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key
Function
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
4 - 26
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
4.6.2
Key functions
The following shows the functions of keys used for operating the SFC diagram monitor screen.
Key
Function
Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the SFC diagram monitor screen appears.
The key is disabled when the last screen is the GOT utility screen or user-created monitor screen.
Sets the device test mode.
Touching the key in the device test mode cancels the device test mode.
(
4.7 Test Operation)
Displays menus used for operations on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
(
4
4.6.3 Search menu)
Displays menus used for operations on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
4.6.3 Display menu)
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
(
Displays menus used for operations on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
(
4.6.3 Monitoring Mode menu)
Exits the SFC monitor and returns the screen to the SFC monitor startup screen.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
Scrolls the display area right and left by one column.
Scrolls the display area right and left by one page.
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
4 - 27
4.6.3
Menus
The following shows operations for the menus displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
 Search menu
Key
4 - 28
Function
Reference section
Displays the device/contact/coil search window.
(1)
Displays the step No./transition condition No. search window.
(2)
Displays the step No./transition condition No. search window.
(2)
Displays the device/contact/coil search window.
(1)
Displays the device/contact/coil search window.
(1)
Displays the step list window.
(3)
Displays the block list screen.
4.5
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
(1) Device/contact/coil search window
The GOT can search for devices in a SFC program.
(a) Displayed screen
1)
1)
2)
2)
4
(For alphabet input )
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
1)
Device input area
Description
2)
Keys
Set a device to be searched.
Keys for operations in the device/contact/coil search window shown in (b) (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key
Function
Deletes all the input values and characters.
Deletes an input value or character.
Switches the key type to the value.
Switches the key type to the alphabet.
Searches for the input device in the upward direction.
When multiple blocks are set, the GOT searches for the device in descending order of the block No.
When the device is found without the MELSAP-L program display mode, the GOT displays an
operation output/transition condition sequence program corresponding to the step or transition
condition with the device in the zoom window.
Search for the input device in the downward direction.
When multiple blocks are set, the GOT searches for the device in ascending order of the block No.
When the device is found without the MELSAP-L program display mode, the GOT displays an
operation output/transition condition sequence program corresponding to the step or transition
condition with the device in the zoom window.
HINT
Precautions for device/contact/coil search window
Searching for any bits in word devices is not available.
Specify word devices for searching for any bits.
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
4 - 29
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
(For numerical input)
(2) Step No./transition condition No. search window
The GOT can search for steps and transition conditions in a block.
(a) Displayed screen
1)
2)
1)
2)
3)
(Step No. search window)
3)
(Transition condition No. search window)
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
Description
1)
Block No. input area
2)
Step No./transition condition
No. input area
3)
Keys
Set the block No. of the block to be searched.
The GOT searches for a step or transition condition in the set block.
Set the step No. or transition condition No. of the step or transition condition to be
searched.
Keys for operations in the step No./transition condition No. search window shown in (b)
(Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key
Function
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
• When the cursor is in the block No. input area
Moves the cursor to the step No./transition condition No. input area.
• When the cursor is in the step No./transition condition No. input area
Searches for a step or transition condition in the set block.
When the searched step or transition condition is found, the step No./transition condition No.
search window closes and the GOT displays data of the step or transition condition on the SFC
diagram monitor screen. (The step or transition condition is highlighted.)
Deletes an input value or character.
Deletes all the input values and characters.
4 - 30
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
(3) Step list window
The GOT displays steps in a block.
(a) Displayed screen
1)
2)
4
3)
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
1)
Block No.
2)
Keys
3)
Step list
Description
Displays the block No. of the displayed block.
Keys for operations in the step list window shown in (b) (Touch input)
Displays the step numbers and step comments of the steps in the displayed block.
Selecting a step searches for the step, and the GOT displays the step data on the SFC
diagram monitor screen. (Active steps are highlighted.)
(b) Key functions
Key
Function
Displays the active step list window.
(
(2) Active step list window)
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
4 - 31
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
2)
 Display menu
Key
Function
Reference section
Sets the MELSAP-L program display mode.
Touching the key in the MELSAP-L program display mode cancels the
MELSAP-L program display mode.
4.3.3 Setting display
mode of SFC programs
Sets the zoom comment display mode.
Touching the key in the zoom comment display mode cancels the zoom
comment display mode.
4.3.3 Setting zoom
comment display mode
Displays the comment file list window.
Sets the automatic scroll mode.
Touching the key in the automatic scroll mode cancels the automatic
scroll mode.
(1)
4.3.3 Setting automatic
scroll mode
Displays the active step list window.
(2)
Displays the active block list window.
(3)
Displays the program list window.
13.5.2 (2)
Displays the PLC read screen.
4.4
Starts the ladder monitor.
Touching the key with a device selected can automatically search for the
12.
device with the ladder monitor.*1
*1
For the automatic search with the ladder monitor, settings for automatically reading sequence programs are required.
For settings for automatically reading sequence programs, refer to the following.
When setting with GOT utility
User's Manual for the GOT used
When setting with GT Designer3
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
4 - 32
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
(1) Comment file list window
The GOT displays the comment file list.
(a) Displayed screen
2)
4
2)
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
Description
1)
Comment file list
Among comment files stored in the SD card, the file names and titles of the comment files
and common comment files used for the displayed SFC program are displayed.
For switching comments, select a comment file to be used.
For hiding comments, select [Do not display comments].
A selected comment file is highlighted.
2)
Keys
Keys for operations in the comment file list window shown in (b) (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key
Function
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Closes the comment file list window and displays the SFC diagram monitor screen with the
comments of the file selected from the comment file list.
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
4 - 33
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
1)
(2) Active step list window
The GOT displays active steps in the displayed block.
(a) Displayed screen
1)
2)
3)
2)
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
Description
1)
Block No.
2)
Keys
3)
Active step list
Displays the block No. of the displayed block.
Keys for operations in the active step list window shown in (b) (Touch input)
Displays the step numbers and step comments of the active steps in the displayed block.
Selecting a step searches for the step, and the GOT displays the step data on the SFC
diagram monitor screen.
(b) Key functions
Key
Function
Displays the step list window.
4.6.3 Search menu (3) Step list window
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
POINT
Precautions for active step list window
When the statuses of steps change, the displayed contents of the active step list in the active step list window
change. Therefore, selecting a step may be difficult depending on the frequency of the step status change.
When selecting a step is difficult, select a step from the step list in the step list window.
4.6.3 Search
4 - 34
menu (3) Step list window
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
(3) Active block list window
The GOT displays active blocks in the read SFC program.
(a) Displayed screen
1)
4
1)
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
Description
1)
Keys
2)
Active block list
Keys for operations in the active block list window shown in (b) (Touch input)
Displays the block numbers and block titles of active blocks in the read SFC program.
Selecting a block displays the block data on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
(b) Key functions
Key
Function
Displays the block list screen.
(
4.5 How to Operate Block List Screen)
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
POINT
Precautions for active block list window
When the statuses of blocks change, the displayed contents of the active block list in the active block list window
change. Therefore, selecting a block may be difficult depending on the frequency of the block status change.
When selecting a block is difficult, select a block from the block list on the block list screen.
4.5 How to Operate Block List Screen
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
4 - 35
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
2)
 Monitoring Mode menu
Key
4 - 36
Function
Reference section
Displays the device values in the device current value display area as 16-bit
decimal numbers.
4.3.3 Switching display
formats between decimal
and hexadecimal numbers
Displays the device values in the device current value display area as 16-bit
hexadecimal numbers.
4.3.3 Switching display
formats between decimal
and hexadecimal numbers
Displays the device values in the device current value display area as 32-bit
decimal numbers.
4.3.3 Switching display
formats between decimal
and hexadecimal numbers
Displays the device values in the device current value display area as 32-bit
hexadecimal numbers.
4.3.3 Switching display
formats between decimal
and hexadecimal numbers
Displays the device values in the device current value display area as 32-bit
floating-point numbers with the exponential representation.
4.3.3 Switching display
formats between decimal
and hexadecimal numbers
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
4.7 Test Operation
In the device test mode of the SFC monitor, device values can be changed on the screen.
For setting the device test mode, refer to the following.
4.5.2 Key functions
4.6.2 Key functions
The test operation of devices is available by touching devices on the following screens in the device test mode.
Screen applicable to device test mode
Reference section
4.5.1 Displayed contents
Block information list on the block list screen
SFC diagram display area on the SFC diagram monitor screen
4.6.1 SFC diagram monitor
screen (1)
Ladder program display area in the zoom window
Touching a device displays the device test window.
(1) When touching bit devices
A bit device is switched between ON and OFF states in the device test window.
(2) When touching word devices
The GOT writes the value input in the device test window into the selected word device.
 How to operate device test window
(1) Bit devices
(a) Displayed screen
1)
2)
The following table shows the displayed contents.
Item
1)
Device
2)
Keys
Description
Displays the selected device.
Keys for operations in the device test window shown in (b).
(b) Key functions
Key
Function
Turns on the bit device and writes the device state to the PLC CPU.
Turns off the bit device and writes the device state to the PLC CPU.
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.7 Test Operation
4 - 37
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.6.1 SFC diagram monitor
screen
Device current value display area on the SFC diagram monitor screen
No.
4
(2) Word devices
(a) Displayed screen
1)
2)
3)
1)
2)
3)
4)
4)
(Monitoring mode : 16-bit integer (DEC))
(Monitoring mode : 32-bit integer (HEX))
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No.
Item
Description
1)
Device
2)
Device value input area
3)
Input mode
4)
Keys
Displays the selected device.
Set the value to be written into the selected device.
Displays the current input mode. (DEC: decimal number. HEX: hexadecimal number)
Keys for operations in the device test window shown in (b).
(b) Key functions
Key
Function
Closes the device test window.
Switches the input modes. (DEC, HEX)
Writes the value input in the device value input area into the PLC CPU.
Deletes an input value or character.
Deletes all the input values and characters.
4 - 38
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.7 Test Operation
4.8 Error Messages and Corrective Action
The following shows the error messages for the SFC monitor and the corrective actions.
Description
Corrective action
Failed to write the value to the device.
In the device test mode, the GOT fails to
write the value into the device of the PLC
CPU.
(1) Check the communications between the GOT and PLC
CPU, and make sure that the GOT communicates with the
PLC CPU.
(2) Check if the target device is writable with prameters of the
target PLC CPU.
Failed to communicate with CPU.
The GOT cannot communicate with the
target PLC CPU.
Check the communications between the GOT and PLC CPU,
and make sure that the GOT communicates with the PLC
CPU.
A file access error occurs.
(1) When no SD card is installed, install a SD card.
(2) When the SD card access switch is off, turn on the switch.
(3) Check if the SD card is formatted with FAT16.
When the SD card is not formatted with FAT16, format the
SD card with FAT16 and install the card in the GOT.
File access error. Confirm the SD card.
Failed to get the information.
• The GOT cannot communicate with the
PLC CPU.
• A file with faulty file name is selected.
• Check the communications between the GOT and PLC
CPU, and make sure that the GOT communicates with the
PLC CPU.
• Select the file after changing the message display
language to one which can display the file name in the
utility.
• Change the file name with GX Developer.
Failed to save files because of an
insufficient capacity of SD card.
The SD card has insufficient space for
storing files.
(1) Delete files in the SD card.
(2) Install a large capacity SD card.
The file(file name) is broken. The file is
unselected.
The file read from the SD card is broken.
(1) Do not select broken files.
(2) Overwrite the broken file with the unbroken file.
Failed to write (file name) to SD card.
The GOT fails to write the file into the SD
card.
(1) When no SD card is installed, install a SD card.
(2) When the SD card access switch is off, turn on the switch.
(3) Check if folders and files within the SEQDAT folder in the
SD card are writable. When the folders and files are not
writable, make sure that the folders and files are writable.
(4) Check if the SD card is formatted with FAT16.
When the SD card is not formatted with FAT16, format the
SD card with FAT16 and install the card in the GOT.
Change the Data save location of
Q/QnA ladder monitor to A: or B:
The SFC monitor is started with [Data save
location] is set to a drive other than [A: Builtin SD card] and [B:Memory card] in the
MELSEC-Q/L/QnA ladder monitor setting.
Set [Data save location] to [A: Built-in SD card] or [B:Memory
card] in the MELSEC-Q/L/QnA ladder monitor setting of the
GOT utility.
The ladder block is too big to display.
The GOT cannot display a sequence
program in the zoom window because the
program has a ladder block with 25 or more
lines.
Split the ladder block.
The specified block does not exist.
Confirm the program.
The GOT cannot display the specified block
data in the SFC diagram because the
specified block does not exist.
Correct the program with GX Developer and operate the GOT
for reading the file from the PLC.
The file(file name) is broken. Perform
PLC Read and read the file again.
The GOT cannot display the program file
data on the block list screen or SFC diagram
monitor screen because the program file is
broken.
Operate the GOT for reading the file from the PLC.
The device range has been changed.
Please read the file again.
The GOT cannot read the target device
values of the SFC monitor because the
device range is changed in the PLC
parameter setting during the SFC monitor.
Operate the GOT for reading the file from the PLC.
Cannot read programs other than SFC
program.
The program file specified by a key on the
block list screen or the SFC diagram monitor
screen is not a SFC program.
Specify a SFC program by a key on the block list screen or
the SFC diagram monitor screen.
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.8 Error Messages and Corrective Action
4 - 39
4
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
Error message
4 - 40
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
4.8 Error Messages and Corrective Action
5.
NETWORK MONITOR
5.1 Features
The network monitor function enables the GOT to monitor and display the statuses of the MELSECNET/H,
MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET(II), CC-Link IE controller networks, and CC-Link IE field networks.
The features of the network monitor are described below.
the line monitor
The line monitor enables you to monitor the statuses of all network lines connected to the host.
In addition, you can also perform detailed monitoring of a desired network and monitoring of other stations by touch
input on the line monitor.
(GOT wirh VGA or higher resolution)
(GOT wirh QVGA resolution)
 Monitoring available for the detailed network information with the detailed monitor
Dedicated monitor screens are displayed according to the network type of the connected host.
Network type:MELSECNET(II), master station
MELSECNET(II), local station
MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H, control station and normal station
MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H, remote master station
CC-Link IE controller network, control station and normal station
CC-Link IE field network, master station and local station
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.1 Features
5-1
5
NETWORK MONITOR
 Selectable from detailed monitoring or other station monitoring for a desired network by
 Monitoring available for other stations statuses with the other station monitor
You can monitor the following statuses of other stations connected to the network.
• Communication status of each station
• Data link status of each station
• Parameter status of each station
• CPU action status of each station
• CPU RUN status of each station
• Loop status of each station
Other station monitor menu
Other station communication status monitor
5-2
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.1 Features
5.2 Specifications
5.2.1
System configuration
This section describes the system configuration of the network monitor.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1
 Target controller
Controller
5
QCPU (Q mode), motion controller (Q series)*1
LCPU
ACPU/QCPU (A mode)
Motion controller (A series)
*1
For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be
monitored.
 Connection type
This function can be used in the following connection types.
(1) When the GOT is connected to a QCPU (Q mode), motion controller (Q series), QnACPU, or motion
controller (A series)
(
Function
Name
Description
: Available,
: Partly restricted,
Connection type between GOT and controller
Bus
connection
Direct
CPU
connection
Computer
link
connection
Ethernet
connection
*6
MELSEC
NET/H
connection,
MELSEC
NET/10
*5
connection
Monitors the statuses of the
following networks.
• MELSECNET/H network
• MELSECNET/10 network
• MELSECNET(II) network
• CC-Link IE controller
network
• CC-Link IE field network
Network
monitor
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
: Unavailable)
CC-Link IE
controller
connection*1,
CC-Link IE
field
CC-Link
connection
ID*3
G4*4
connection*2
*5
Indicates the CC-Link IE controller network connection.
Indicates CC-Link IE field network connection.
Indicates CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station).
Indicates CC-Link connection (via G4).
When the GOT is connected to the MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10, use a QCPU and a network module (QJ71LP21,
QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, QJ71LP21G, or QJ71BR11) of function version B or a later version.
Network monitor cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.2 Specifications
5-3
NETWORK MONITOR
QnACPU
(2) When the GOT is connected to an ACPU/QCPU (A mode)
(
Function
Name
Description
: Available,
: Partly restricted,
: Unavailable)
Connection type between GOT and controller
Bus
connection
Direct CPU
connection
Computer link
connection
Ethernet
connection
MELSECNET/10
connection
CC-Link
connection
ID*1
Monitors the statuses of the
following networks.
• MELSECNET/H network
• MELSECNET/10 network
• MELSECNET(II) network
• CC-Link IE controller
network
• CC-Link IE field network
Network
monitor
*1
*2
*3
G4*2
*3
Indicates CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station).
Indicates CC-Link connection (via G4).
Monitoring is not possible when the target CPU is AnUCPU and a MELSECNET/10 network module is used.
 Required extended system application
The extended system applications shown below are required.
1.2 Required extended system application for the function
(1) Extended system application
Write the package data that has the extended system application for the sequence program monitor (SFC) to
the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
(2) Extended system application space
To write the extended system application to the GOT, certain space of the user area must be reserved for the
application.
For the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data
using other user areas, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
5-4
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.2 Specifications
5.2.2
Network information that can be monitored
The network information that can be monitored with the network monitor and the link types are as follows.
(
Function
Network Information
MELSEC
NET(II)
master
station
MELSEC
NET(II)
local
station
MELSEC
NET/10,
MELSEC
NET/H
control
station
MELSEC
NET/10,
MELSEC
NET/H
normal
station
MELSEC
NET/10,
MELSEC
NET/H
remote
master
station
: Can be monitored,
CC-Link IE
controller
network
control
station
: Cannot be monitored)
CC-Link IE
controller
network
normal
station
CC-Link IE
field
network
master
station
CC-Link IE
field
network
local
station
Network category display
Network number display
Station number display
5
Host operation mode
Line monitor
Host loop line status
Loopback execution status
NETWORK MONITOR
Link scan time display
Data link system loop status
Host communication status
*1
Host number
Host
information
Host
Network number
Group number
Specified control station
Current control station
Control station
information
Communication information
Detailed monitor
Sub-control-station link
Remote-I/O-master-station
station number
Total of linked stations
Largest connected stations
Largest data-linked station
Data link
information
Communication status
Causes of interrupted
communication
Causes of data link stoppage
Constant link scan
Constant link scan
BWY receive
BWY from the master station
BW receive
BW from the master station in
the higher loop
(Continued to next page)
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.2 Specifications
5-5
Function
Network Information
MELSEC
NET
(II) master
station
MELSEC
NET
(II) local
station
MELSEC
NET/10,
MELSEC
NET/H
control
station
MELSEC
NET/10,
MELSEC
NET/H
remote
master
station
MELSEC
NET/10,
MELSEC
NET/H
normal
Station
CC-Link IE
controller
network
control
station
CC-Link IE
controller
network
normal
station
Forward loop status
*2
*2
*2
*3
*3
Reverse loop status
*2
*2
*2
*3
*3
Loopback station (forward loop)
*2
*2
*2
*3
*3
Loopback station (reverse loop)
*2
*2
*2
*3
*3
Loop switching frequency
*2
*2
*2
CC-Link IE
field
network
master
station
Detailed monitor
Loopback
PORT1 Loop
*4
PORT2 Loop
*4
Loop Back Sta.1
*4
Loop Back Sta.2
*4
#of Loop Switching
Parameter settings
Designation of reserved station
Host status
Communications mode
Designation of transmission
*2
*2
*2
Transmission status
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
Communication status of each
station
Communications status of each
station
Parameter status of each station
Other station monitor
CPU action status of each
station
CPU RUN status of each station
Loop status of each station
*1
*2
Monitoring is only possible when connected to a MELSECNET(II) local station.
Monitoring is possible only when using a MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 loop system.
*3
The loop names vary depending on the network system to be monitored as shown below.
MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10,
MELSECNET(II) network systems
*4
5-6
CC-Link IE controller network
Forward loop
OUT-side loop
Reverse loop
IN-side loop
Monitoring is possible only when using a loopback function.
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.2 Specifications
CC-Link IE
field
network
local
station
5.2.3
Access range
In bus connection, direct CPU connection, computer link connection, or Ethernet connection, only the host station can be
monitored.
In MELSECNET/H connection or MELSECNET/10 connection, only the control station can be monitored.
In CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station), only the master station can be monitored.
In CC-Link connection (via G4), only the host and master stations can be monitored.
When the GOT is connected to the remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system, no stations can be monitored.
The GOT cannot monitor stations on the MELSECNET/G network system.
The access range other than above is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller.
For details of the access range, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1
NETWORK MONITOR
5
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.2 Specifications
5-7
5.2.4
Precautions
(1) Station monitored as the host
The station monitored as the host differs depending on the connection type.
Connection type
Station monitored as the host
Bus connection, direct CPU connection, computer link connection
Connected station (target)
Ethernet connection
Station set as the host with the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3
MELSECNET/H connection,
MELSECNET/10 connection
CC-Link IE controller network connection
Control station
CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station),
CC-Link connection (Via G4),
CC-Link IE field network connection
Master station
(2) When the network monitor cannot be displayed correctly
The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly in the following cases.
(a) When the network module is performing offline testing
The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly during offline testing.
Set the network module mode to online.
(b) When the network parameter has been changed
The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly when the network parameter is changed.
Restart the network monitor.
(c)
When there is a network parameter error
The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly when there is a network parameter error.
Review the network parameter.
(d) When the network parameter has not been set to the QCPU
The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly when the network parameter is not set to the QCPU.
Be sure to set the network parameter when monitoring the network with the GOT.
(e) When changing the head addresses on CPU side to which refresh parameter is set
The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly if the SB and SW head addresses on CPU side are
changed while refresh parameter is set in the network parameter for the QCPU.
To monitor the network with the GOT, set the SB and SW head addresses on CPU side to default.
However, for CC-Link IE field network connection, set the SB and SW head addresses on CPU side
according to the position where the network module is installed.
Installation position of the network module
1st
0000
2nd
0200
3rd
0400
4th
0600
(3) When monitoring MELSECNET/H, CC-Link IE controller network, or CC-Link IE field network
Even if a network module on the MELSECNET/H, CC-Link IE controller network, or CC-Link IE field network is
being monitored, a MELSECNET/10 display is provided in either of the following cases:
• The normal station has been started due to a communication error (cable disconnection, etc.)
• The monitor target is the remote master station.
(4) When monitoring MELSECNET(II)
When connected to a QnACPU and the master station of the MELSECNET(II), monitoring cannot be done with
the keyword being defined.
(5) When the CPU type of the connection target of the GOT is AnNCPU or AnACPU
Even when using the network module of the MELSECNET/10, the network information that can be monitored is
the content of the MELSECNET(II).
5-8
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.2 Specifications
(6) Display of loop status for CC-Link IE field network
In ring topology with CC-Link IE field network, if an error occurs in a local module which is not directly connected
to a master module and the network comes into loopback status, information cannot be acquired from the
master station.
Therefore, in the above case, the loop status cannot be displayed on the line monitor normally.
・When an error occurs in a local station which is directly connected to a master station
Local station
Error
Master station
The loop status can
be displayed normally.
Local station
GOT
5
・When an error occurs in a local station which is not directly connected to a master station
Local station
NETWORK MONITOR
The loop status cannot
be displayed normally.
Error
Master station
Local station
GOT
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.2 Specifications
5-9
5.3 Operations for display
This section describes the flow until the operation screen for the network monitor is displayed after the network monitor
is installed in the GOT.
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT.
Starting from the utility
Display the utility.
Starting from the special
function switch
(Network monitor) set in the
project data
Touch the special function switch.
Refer to the following manual for how to set the special
function switch.
After the utility is displayed,
touch [Debug]
[Network monitor] from the Main Menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the User's Manual
for the GOT used.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
Set the channel number.
Set the channel number of the
controller targeted to the network.
Communication setting window
The network monitor startup
The network monitor starts after a
channel number is selected.
Exit
5 - 10
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.3 Operations for display
POINT
(1) How to display the utility
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
(2) Displaying communication setting window
After turning on the GOT, the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the network
monitor only.
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch the Ch : button on the
network monitor screen. (
5.4 Operation Procedures)
5
NETWORK MONITOR
(3) If the project data has not been downloaded
The network monitor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to the
GOT.
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.3 Operations for display
5 - 11
 Changing screens
Utility Main Menu
or
user-created monitor screen
Communication setting window
END
Touch Ch :
Other station monitor menu screen
Line monitor
END
Touch a
module.
RET
Touch a box.
RET
(Select a box)
RET
Detailed monitor
(Select a
menu item)
Other station monitor screen
END
END
5 - 12
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.3 Operations for display
5.4 Operation Procedures
This section describes the information and key functions displayed on the network monitor screen.
The display on the network monitor screen varies slightly depending on the GOT used, and a screen for the GT1575-V is
used for the descriptions in this section.
5.4.1
Line monitor
This section describes the structure of the monitor screen and the common operations used when executing the line
monitor.
 Display contents and keys functions
This section describes the line monitor screen configuration and the function of keys displayed on the screen after
starting the network monitor.
(1) Displayed contents
5
2)
3)
7)
4)
8)
NETWORK MONITOR
1)
5)
9)
No.
6)
Display contents
1)
This shows the operation mode of the host. (On-line, Off-line, Test*1)
2)
This shows the status of the F-loop (Forward loop). (OK, NG)*2
3)
This shows the status of the R-loop (Reverse loop). (OK, NG)*2
4)
This shows whether the loopback was executed or not. (Executed, Not executed)
5)
This shows the link scan time required for the control station and the normal station, for the remote master station and the remote I/O
station, and for the master station and all the sub-stations.
Maximum (the maximum value of link scan time)
Minimum (the minimum value of link scan time)
Current (the current value of link scan time)
6)
This shows the communication status of the host. (Only for MELSECNET(II) local station)
P-MTR WAIT
:Ready to receive parameters from the master station.
Cyclic com
:Normal communication
Com. suspension :Communication is suspended because the host is disconnected.
7)
This shows the network category, network number, and station number.
(Continued to next page)
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.4 Operation Procedures
5 - 13
No.
Display contents
For the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network systems, the loop status is displayed as shown below.
(Forward loop: F, Reverse loop: R)
(a) Forward loop: OK
Reverse loop: OK
(b) Forward loop: OK
Reverse loop: NG
F
(c) Forward loop: NG
Reverse loop: OK
F
R
F
R
(d) Loopback in execution
R
(e) Forward loop: NG
Reverse loop: NG
(f) MELSECNET/10 coaxial bus
(OK)
(g) MELSECNET/10 coaxial
bus (NG)
F
F
R
R
For the MELSECNET(II)network system, the loop status is displayed as shown below. (Forward loop: F, Reverse loop: R)
(a) Data link in execution in forward loop
(b) Data link in execution in reverse loop.
(c) Loopback is performed in the forward/
reverse loop direction.
F
F
F
R
R
R
(d) Loopback is performed in the forward loop
direction only.
(e) Loopback is performed in the reverse
loop direction only.
(f) Data link is not available.
8)
F
F
F
R
R
R
For the CC-Link IE controller network, the loop status is displayed as shown below.
(a) Normal status
(b) Loopback in execution
(c) All stations with errors
For the CC-Link IE field network, the loop status is displayed as shown below.
(a) Normal status (ring topology)
(d) Error status (ring topology)
9)
5 - 14
(b) Loopback in execution on PORT1 side
(ring topology)
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.4 Operation Procedures
PORT1
PORT1
PORT2
PORT2
(e) Normal status (star topology/line
topology)
This shows the number of installed network modules.
(c) Loopback in execution on PORT2 side
(ring topology)
(f) Error status (star topology/line topology)
*1
[Test] is only displayed when using MELSECNET(II).
When using a system other than MELSECNET(II), [Off-line] is displayed even during testing of the forward or reverse loop.
*2
The loop names vary depending on the network system to be monitored as shown below.
MELSECNET/H,
MELSECNET/10,
MELSECNET(II) network systems
CC-Link IE controller network
CC-Link IE field network
Forward loop
OUT-side loop
PORT1-side loop
Reverse loop
IN-side loop
PORT2-side loop
POINT
When the GOT target is AnACPU or AnNCPU
"MELSECNET(II)" is displayed even if a MELSECNET/10 network module is installed.
In addition, if there is a master station and local station, module 1 of the line monitor is displayed as "Master
station".
Display on the GOT
1st module
2nd module
Module 1
Module 2
Local station
Master station
Master station
Local station
NETWORK MONITOR
Network module
5
(2) Key functions
This section describes the function of keys to be used for the line monitor operations.
Key
Function
Exits the line monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was started.
Switches to the detailed monitor screen that corresponds to the module displayed on the current monitor
screen.
This key is effective for each screen.
Switches to the other station monitor menu that corresponds to the network displayed on the current
monitor screen.
This key is effective for each screen.
Displays the communication setting window.
Changes the monitoring destination CPU using the controller number.
(For multi-CPU system connection only)
The controller number is displayed according to the number of CPUs loaded.
Touch
to switch the displayed module to the next one.
Touch
to switch the displayed module to the previous one.
/
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.4 Operation Procedures
5 - 15
5.4.2
Detailed monitor
This section describes the detailed monitor and the common operations used when executing the line monitor.
 Display contents and keys functions: acting as a MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10
Control station/normal station
This section describes the contents of the detailed monitor and the function of on-screen keys. All these are
displayed and used when the host acts as the control station/normal station on the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/
10.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
4)
5)
2)
6)
3)
No.
1)
Item
TsSt' Info
Display contents
• This Station's #
• Network #
• Group #
: Indicates the station number of the host.
: Indicates the network number.
: Indicates the group number.
• Spc Ctrlr Sta
: Indicates the station number of the station that is specified as a control
station.
: Indicates the station number of a station that is currently acting as the
control station.
: Indicates whether the host is communicating with the control station or the
sub-control station.
: Indicates whether there is a sub-control station link.
: Displays the station number of the remote I/O master station for X/Y
communication block1 and block 2.
Displays "None" when there is no setting.
• Curr Ctrl Sta
2)
Ctrl St Info
• Com Info
• SubCtrl Sta Com
• Rmt I/OMstSt*1
• Total of L-Sta
• Largest Nrm Sta
• Largest DL-Sta
• Com Status
3)
D-Link Info
• Causes of Ssp
• Causes of Stop
: Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked. The maximum
number is defined by common parameters.
: Indicates the maximum station number of the station performing a
communication in a normal condition.
: Indicates the maximum station number of the station that is data-linked.
: Shows the current communications status of the host. (D-Link in prog/DLink Stop (A)/D-Link Stop (H)/B-Pass excut/Disconnection/Loop test/Set
Conf. test/Sta Odr. Conf./Com. test/Offline test/Reset. in prgr.)
: Indicates the causes why the communications were interrupted. This
indicates "Normal" if communications are normal. (Normal/Offline/Offline
Test/Line error/Disconnection/Initialize/Others (error codes))
: Indicates the causes why the data link was stopped. This indicates
"Normal" if communications are normal. (Stop disignat/No common para/
Host Para error/Host CPU error/Com. suspension/Others)
(Continued to next page)
5 - 16
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.4 Operation Procedures
4)
Item
Constant LS
Display contents
Indicates the predetermined time of constant link scans.
• FLoop
• RLoop
• FLoop Back Station
5)
*2
LoopBK Info
• RLoop Back Station
• # of Loop Switching
6)
TsSt' Sta
*1
*2
•
•
•
•
•
Parameter Setting
Reserved Sta
Communication Mode
Transmission Mode
Transmission Stat
: Shows the status of the forward loop lines of the host.
(Normal/LoopBK Trans/D-Link Impo)
: Shows the status of the reverse loop lines of the host.
(Normal/LoopBK Trans/D-Link Impo)
: Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along
the forward loop.
Displays "---" when the loopback is operating normally.
: Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along
the reverse loop.
Displays "---" when the loopback is operating normally.
: Indicates the cumulative number of times for which loops have been
switched.
:
:
:
:
:
Common Param, Common + Spec if, Default Param, Default + Specif
Indicates the availability of a reserved station. (Have/None)
Indicates either "Normal mode" or "Constant LS."
Indicates either "Normal Trans" or "Multiple Trans."*2
Indicates either "Normal Trans" or "Multiple Trans."*2
This is not displayed when the CPU type of the GOT connection target is AnNCPU or AnACPU
"---" is displayed when coaxial bus connections are established.
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the detailed monitor.
Key
5
Function
Returns to the line monitor.
Exits the detailed monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was executed.
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.4 Operation Procedures
5 - 17
NETWORK MONITOR
No.
 Display contents and keys functions: acting as a MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 remote
master station
This section describes the screen configuration of the detailed monitor and the function of on-screen keys when the
host acts as the remote master station on the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
4)
5)
2)
6)
3)
No.
1)
2)
Item
Display contents
TsStí Info
• This Sations #
• Network #
• Group #
: Indicates the station number of the host.
: Indicates the network number.
: Not displayed. ("---" is displayed.)
Ctrl St Info
•
•
•
•
:
:
:
:
Spc Ctrl Sta
Curr Ctrl Sta
Com Info
SubCtrl-Sta Com
• Total of L-Sta
• Largest Nrm Sta
• Largest DL-Sta
• Com Status
3)
D-Link Info
• Causes of Ssp
• Causes of Stop
4)
Constant LS
Not displayed. ("---" is displayed.)
Not displayed. ("---" is displayed.)
Not displayed. ("---" is displayed.)
Not displayed. ("---" is displayed.)
: Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked, which is set by
common parameters.
: Indicates the maximum station number of the station that is connected in a
normal condition.
: Indicates the maximum station number of the station that is performing
data link.
: Shows the current communications status of the host. (D-Link in prog/DLink Stop (A)/D-Link Stop (H)/B-Pass excut/Disconnection/Loop test/Set
Conf. test/Sta Odr. Conf./Com. test/Offline test/Reset. in prgr.)
: Indicates the causes why the communications were interrupted. This
indicates "Normal" if communications are normal. (Normal/Offline/Offline
Test/Line error/Disconnection/Initialize/Others (error codes))
: Indicates the causes why the data link was stopped. This indicates
"Normal" if communications are normal. (Stop disignat/No common para/
Host Para error/Host CPU error/Com. suspension/Others (error codes))
Indicates the predetermined time of constant link scans.
(Continued to next page)
5 - 18
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.4 Operation Procedures
No.
Item
Display contents
• FLoop
• RLoop
• FLoop Back Station
5)
*1
LoopBK Info
• RLoop Back Station
• # of Loop Switching
6)
TsSt' Sta
*1
•
•
•
•
•
Parameter Setting
Reserved Sta
Communication Mode
Transmission Mode
Transmission Stat
: Shows the status of the forward loop lines of the host.
(Normal/LoopBK Trans/D-Link Impo)
: Shows the status of the reverse loop lines of the host.
(Normal/LoopBK Trans/D-Link Impo)
: Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along
the forward loop.
Displays "---" when the loopback is operating normally.
: Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along
the reverse loop.
Displays "---" when the loopback is operating normally.
: Indicates the cumulative number of times for which loops have been
switched.
:
:
:
:
:
Not displayed. ("---" is displayed.)
Indicates the availability of a reserved station. (Have/None)
Indicates either "Normal mode" or "Constant LS."
Indicates either "Normal Trans" or "Multiple Trans."*1
5
Indicates either "Normal Trans" or "Multiple Trans."*1
"---" is displayed when coaxial bus connections are established.
The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the detailed monitor.
Key
Function
Returns to the line monitor.
Exits the detailed monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was started.
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.4 Operation Procedures
5 - 19
NETWORK MONITOR
(2) Key functions
 Display contents and keys functions: acting as a MELSECNET(II) master station
This section describes the screen configuration of the detailed monitor and the function of on-screen keys when the
host acts as the master station on the MELSECNET(II).
(1) Displayed contents
1)
3)
2)
No.
Item
Display contents
1)
TsStí Info
This Stationís #
This Stationís
2)
D-Link Info
Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked, which is defined by common parameters.
• FLoop
• RLoop
• FLoop Back Station
3)
LoopBK Info
• RLoop Back Station
• # of Loop Switching
: This shows the station number of the host.
: Indicates the category of the host.
: Shows the status of the forward loop lines of the host. (Normal/NG)
: Shows the status of the reverse loop lines of the host. (Normal/NG)
: Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along
the forward loop.
When loopback is normal, "---" is displayed.
When there is no loopback station, "F" is displayed.
: Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along
the reverse loop.
When loopback is normal, "---" is displayed.
When there is no loopback station, "R" is displayed.
: Indicates the cumulative number of times for which loops have been
switched.
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the detailed monitor.
Key
Function
Returns to the line monitor.
Exits the detailed monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was started.
5 - 20
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.4 Operation Procedures
 Display contents and keys functions: acting as a MELSECNET(II) local station
This section describes the screen configuration of the detailed monitor and the function of on-screen keys when the
host acts as the local station on the MELSECNET(II).
(1) Displayed contents
1)
6)
2)
3)
4)
5)
5
Item
Display contents
• This Station's #
• This Station's
: Indicates the station number of the host.
: Indicates the category of the host.
• Total of L-Sta
: Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked, which is
defined by common parameters.
1)
TsStí Info
2)
D-Link Info
3)
Com status
This shows the communication status of the host.
(Parameter wait/Cyclic comm/Com. suspension)
4)
BWY From Master
This shows the status of receiving Device BWY from the master station.
OK: Data is being received by cyclic communication.
NG: Unable to receive because the host is disconnected, etc.
5)
BW From Hostmaster
This shows the status of receiving Device BW from the master station of a dual-layer system.
OK: Data is being received by cyclic communication.
NG: Unable to receive because the host is disconnected, etc.
6)
LoopBK Info
•
•
•
•
•
FLoop
RLoop
FLoop Back Station
RLoop Back Station
# of Loop Switching
:
:
:
:
:
Shows the status of the forward loop lines of the host. (Normal/NG)
Shows the status of the reverse loop lines of the host. (Normal/NG)
Not displayed. ("---" is displayed.)
Not displayed. ("---" is displayed.)
Not displayed. ("---" is displayed.)
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the detailed monitor.
Key
Function
Returns to the line monitor.
Exits the detailed monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was started.
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.4 Operation Procedures
5 - 21
NETWORK MONITOR
No.
 Display contents and keys functions when monitoring CC-Link IE controller network
This section describes the screen configuration of the detailed monitor and the functions of on-screen keys when the
GOT monitors a control station or normal station on the CC-Link IE controller network set as the host station.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
4)
5)
2)
6)
3)
No.
1)
Item
TsSt' Info
Display contents
• This Station's#
• NetWork#
• Group#
: Displays the host station number.
: Displays the network number of the host station.
: Displays the group number.
• Spc Ctrl Sta
• Curr Ctrl Sta
: Displays the station number set as the control station.
: Displays the station number of the station currently operating as the
control station.
: Displays whether the GOT communicates with the control station or subcontrol station.
: Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)
: Displays the station numbers of the I/O master stations for block 1 and
block 2.
[None] is displayed with no setting.
• Com Info
2)
CtrlSt Info
• SubCtrl Sta Com
• RmtI/OMstSta
3)
D-Link Info
• Total of L-Sta
: Displays the total number of stations on the monitored network set for
common parameters.
• Largest Nrm Sta
: Displays the maximum station number of the station communicating
normally.
• Largest DL-Sta
: Displays the maximum station number of the station performing a data
link.
• Com Status
: Displays the current communication status of the host station.
(D-Link in prog., D-Link stopped, B-Pass excut, B-Pass stopped, Offline
test, Offline)
• Cause of Ssp*1
: Displays the reason for the interrupted communication.
[Normal Comm] is displayed with normal communications.
(Cable disconnct, Wrong cable, Checking cables, Disconnct/retrn, Offline
mode, Offline test, Self-check mode)
• Cause of Stop*2
: Displays the reason for the interrupted data link.
[Normal] is displayed with normal data links.
(Stop disignat, D-Link time up, Testing line, Param not rcvd, Invlid Host
No., Set Rsvd Sta., Dup Host No., Dup CtrlSta No., Sta No. not set, Invlid
NTWK No., Host Para error, Params in comm., CPU stop error, CPU pwr
stp err)
(Continued to next page)
5 - 22
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.4 Operation Procedures
No.
Constant LS
Display contents
Displays the set contact link scan time.
• OUT Loop
• IN Loop
5)
LoopBK Info
• OUT Loop Back Sta.
• IN Loop Back Sta.
• #of Loop Switching
• Parameter Setting
6)
•
•
•
•
TsSt' Sta
*1
*2
Reserved Sta
Communication Mode
Transmission Mode
Transmission Stat
: Displays the OUT-side loop line status of the host station.
(Normal, LoopBK Trans, All Sta. NG)
: Displays the IN-side loop line status of the host station.
(Normal, LoopBK Trans, All Sta. NG)
: Displays the station number of the OUT-side loopback station.
[---] is displayed with normal loopbacks.
: Displays the station number of the IN-side loopback station.
[---] is displayed with normal loopbacks.
: Displays the accumulated number of switching loops.
: Displays [No parameters], [Common Param], [Unique param], or
[Common+unique].
: Displays whether a reserved station exists or not.
: Displays [Normal Mode] or [Constant LS].
: Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)
: Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)
5
When the station is in the hardware test mode, self-loopback test mode, circuit test mode, or station-to-station test mode, [Offline
test] is displayed.
For duplication of the control station or station number, [Dup CtrlSta No.] is displayed.
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the detailed monitor.
Key
Function
Returns to the line monitor.
Exits the detailed monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was started.
 Display contents and keys functions when monitoring a master/local station on the CCLink IE field network
This section describes the screen configuration of the detailed monitor and the functions of on-screen keys when the
GOT monitors a master station or local station on the CC-Link IE field network set as the host station.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
4)
5)
2)
6)
3)
No.
1)
2)
Item
Display contents
TsSt' Info
• This Station's#
• NetWork#
• Group#
: Displays the host station number.
: Displays the network number of the host station.
: Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)
CtrlSt Info
•
•
•
•
:
:
:
:
Spc Ctrl Sta
Curr Ctrl Sta
Com Info
SubCtrl Sta Com
Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)
Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)
Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)
Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)
(Continued to next page)
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.4 Operation Procedures
5 - 23
NETWORK MONITOR
4)
Item
No.
3)
4)
Item
Display contents
D-Link Info
Constant LS
• Total of L-Sta
: Displays the total number of stations on the monitored network set for
common parameters.
• Largest Nrm Sta
: Displays the maximum station number of the station communicating
normally.
• Largest DL-Sta
: Displays the maximum station number of the station performing a data
link.
• Com Status
: Displays the current communication status of the host station.
(D-Link in prog., B-Pass excut, B-Pass stopped, Offline test, Offline)
• Cause of Ssp*1
: Displays the reason for the interrupted communication.
[Normal Comm] is displayed with normal communications.
(Cable disconnct, Disconnct/retrn, Offline mode, Offline test)
• Cause of Stop
: Displays the reason for the interrupted data link.
[Normal] is displayed with normal data links.
(Stop disignat, D-Link time up, No Slave Sta., Param not rcvd, Invlid Host
No., Set Rsvd Sta., Dup Host No., Dup Master Sta., Sta No. not set, Host
Para error, Params in comm., Station Type, CPU stop error, Ring
connection)
Displays the set contact link scan time.
• PORT1 Loop
• #of Loop Switching
: Shows the status of the PORT1-side loop.
(Normal/LoopBK Trans/D-Link Impo)
: Shows the status of the PORT2-side loop.
(Normal/LoopBK Trans/D-Link Impo)
: Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback.
[---] is displayed with normal loopbacks.
: Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback.
[---] is displayed with normal loopbacks.
: Displays the accumulated number of switching loops.
•
•
•
•
•
:
:
:
:
:
• PORT2 Loop
5)
LoopBK Info
• Loop Back Sta.1
• Loop Back Sta.2
6)
TsSt' Sta
*1
Parameter Setting
Reserved Sta
Communication Mode
Transmission Mode
Transmission Stat
Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)
Displays whether a reserved station exists or not.
Displays [Normal Mode] or [Constant LS].
Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)
Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)
When the station is in the hardware test mode, offline test mode, or self-loopback test mode, [Offline test] is displayed.
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the detailed monitor.
Key
Function
Returns to the line monitor.
Exits the detailed monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was started.
5 - 24
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.4 Operation Procedures
5.4.3
Other station monitor
This section describes the structure of the monitor screen and the common operations used when executing the other
station monitor.
 Display contents and keys functions: other station monitor menu
This section describes the other station monitor menu screen and the function of on-screen keys. The menu screen
for the other station monitor is displayed by touching a module number displayed on the host monitor screen.
By this other station monitor menu, each of the other station monitor can be specified.
(1) Displayed contents
2)
3)
1)
4)
5
5)
No.
1)
Item
COM STA
Display contents
Switches to the communication status monitor for other stations.*1
(
2)
D-Link
P-MTR
CPU OP
CPU RUN
Loop
5.4.8 Other station CPU RUN status monitor)
Switches to the loop status monitor for other stations.*4
(
*1
*2
*3
*4
5.4.7 Other station CPU operation status monitor)
Switches to the CPU RUN status monitor for other stations.*3
(
6)
5.4.6 Other station parameter status monitor)
Switches to the CPU operation status monitor for other stations.*3
(
5)
5.4.5 Other station data link status monitor)
Switches to the parameter status monitor for other stations.*1
(
4)
5.4.4 Other station communication status monitor)
Switches to the data link status monitor for other stations.*2
(
3)
NETWORK MONITOR
6)
5.4.9 Other station loop status monitor)
This cannot be selected when a MELSECNET(II) local station is selected using the line monitor.
This cannot be selected when a MELSECNET(II) master station or local station is selected using the line monitor.
This cannot be selected when a remote I/O station is selected using the line monitor.
The other station loop status monitor is not available in the following conditions.
• When a local station on the MELSECNET(II)network system is selected using the line monitor
• When a MELSECNET network system with coaxial cables is used
• When a station on the CC-Link IE controller network or CC-Link IE field network is selected using the line monitor
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the function of keys to be used for the other station monitor operations.
Key
to
Function
Switches to each monitor for other stations.
Returns to the line monitor.
Exits the other station monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network monitor function
was started.
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.4 Operation Procedures
5 - 25
5.4.4
Other station communication status monitor
This section describes the screen configuration of the other station communication status monitor and the function of
keys displayed on it.
This screen cannot be displayed for a MELSECNET(II) local station.
(1) Displayed contents
3)
2)
1)
No.
Display contents
1)
Displays the communication status by station number. (OK/ERR)
The station numbers displayed do not indicate the number of station numbers in the network, rather the maximum number of
communication stations.
For CC-Link IE field network, station number 1 to 120 are displayed regardless of the number of station numbers in the
network.
2)
Any station in an abnormal condition is highlighted.
3)
Reserved stations are displayed as normal stations.
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the other station communications status
monitor operations.
Key
Function
Returns to the other station monitor.
Exits the other station communication statuses monitor screen and returns to the screen where the
network monitor was started.
Switches the screen display of stations. (1 to 80 stations/81 to 120 stations)
5 - 26
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.4 Operation Procedures
5.4.5
Other station data link status monitor
This section describes the screen configuration of the other station data link status monitor and the function of on-screen
keys.
This screen cannot be displayed for a MELSECNET(II) master station or local station.
(1) Displayed contents
3)
2)
5
1)
Display contents
1)
Displays the data link status by station number. (OK/NO)
The station numbers displayed do not indicate the number of station numbers in the network, rather the maximum number of
communication stations.
For CC-Link IE field network, station number 1 to 120 are displayed regardless of the number of station numbers in the
network.
2)
Any station to which data link is not performed is highlighted.
3)
Reserved stations are displayed as having a data link established.
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the function of keys that are used for the operations of other station data link status
monitor.
Key
Function
Returns to the other station monitor.
Exits the other station data link status monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network
monitor was started.
Switches the screen display of stations. (1 to 80 stations/81 to 120 stations)
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.4 Operation Procedures
5 - 27
NETWORK MONITOR
No.
5.4.6
Other station parameter status monitor
This section describes the screen configuration of the other station parameter status monitor and the function of onscreen keys.
This screen cannot be displayed for a MELSECNET(II) local station.
(1) Displayed contents
3)
2)
4)
1)
No.
Display contents
1)
Displays the parameter status by station number.
The station numbers displayed do not indicate the number of station numbers in the network, rather the maximum number of
communication stations.
For CC-Link IE field network, station number 1 to 120 are displayed regardless of the number of station numbers in the
network.
2)
Any station whose parameters are monitored is highlighted.*1
3)
Any station in an abnormal condition is highlighted.
4)
Reserved stations are displayed as normal stations.
*1
Only [Parameter Err Sta.] is displayed when connecting to a MELSECNET(II) master station.
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the function of keys that are used for the operations of the other station parameter status
monitor.
Key
Function
Returns to the other station monitor.
Exits the other station parameter status monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network
monitor was started.
Switches the screen display of stations. (1 to 80 stations/81 to 120 stations)
5 - 28
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.4 Operation Procedures
5.4.7
Other station CPU operation status monitor
This section describes the screen configuration of the other station CPU operation status monitor and the function of onscreen keys.
This screen cannot be displayed for a remote I/O network system.
(1) Displayed contents
2)
3)
5
No.
NETWORK MONITOR
1)
Display contents
1)
Displays the CPU operation status by station number. (OK/ERR)
The station number displayed does not indicate the station number in the network, rather the maximum number of
communication stations.
For CC-Link IE field network, station number 1 to 120 are displayed regardless of the number of station numbers in the
network.
2)
Any station that stays in an abnormal condition or out of operation is highlighted.
3)
Reserved stations and unconnected stations are displayed as normal stations.
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the function of keys that are used for the operations of the other station CPU operation
status monitor.
Key
Function
Returns to the other station monitor.
Exits the other station CPU operation status monitor screen and returns to the screen where the
network monitor was started.
Switches the screen display of stations. (1 to 80 stations/81 to 120 stations)
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.4 Operation Procedures
5 - 29
5.4.8
Other station CPU RUN status monitor
This section describes the other station CPU RUN status monitor and the function of on-screen keys.
This screen cannot be displayed for a remote I/O network system.
(1) Displayed contents
2)
1)
No.
Display contents
1)
Displays the CPU operation status by station number. (RUN/STOP)
"DOWN" is displayed for stations with communication errors.
Up to 64 stations are displayed regardless of the number of stations in a network.
For CC-Link IE controller network or CC-Link IE field network, station number 1 to 120 are displayed regardless of the number
of station numbers in the network.
2)
"---" is displayed for a reserved station and the statuses of stations beyond the maximum communication stations, or when a
MELSECNET(II) local station has been selected in the line monitor.
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the function of keys that are used for the operations of the other station CPU RUN status
monitor.
Key
Function
Returns to the other station monitor.
Exits the other station CPU RUN status monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network
monitor was started.
Switches the screen display of stations. (1 to 80 stations/81 to 120 stations)
5 - 30
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.4 Operation Procedures
5.4.9
Other station loop status monitor
This section describes the screen configuration of the other station loop status monitor and the function of on-screen
keys.
The other station loop status monitor is not available in the following conditions.
• When a local station on the MELSECNET(II)network system is selected using the line monitor
• When a MELSECNET network system with coaxial cables is used
• When a station on the CC-Link IE controller network or CC-Link IE field network is selected using the line monitor.
(1) Displayed contents
3)
4)
5
1)
No.
Display contents
1)
The F-loop (forward loop) status and the R-loop (reverse loop) status are displayed.
2)
The station numbers displayed do not indicate the number of station numbers in the network, rather the maximum number of
communication stations.
3)
Any station that stays in an abnormal condition is highlighted.
4)
Reserved stations are displayed as normal stations.
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the function of keys that are used for the operations of the other station loop status
monitor.
Key
Function
Returns to the other station monitor.
Exits the other station loop status monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network
monitor was started.
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.4 Operation Procedures
5 - 31
NETWORK MONITOR
2)
5.5 Error Message and Corrective Action
The following shows the error messages that are displayed during the network monitor operation and how to handle
them.
Error message
Contents of error
Communication channel setup error
There is no channel for
communication.
Can not Communication
Communication could not be
established with the PLC CPU.
Key Word error
A keyword has been set in the
parameter when monitoring the
MELSECNET(II) master station of
the QnACPU.
5 - 32
5. NETWORK MONITOR
5.5 Error Message and Corrective Action
Action to take
Set the channel number in the Communication Settings of the utility.
• Check the connections between the controller and the GOT for
disconnected connectors and cables.
• Check if an error has occurred in the controller.
Release the set keyword.
6.
Q MOTION MONITOR
6.1 Features
The Q motion monitor enables the servo monitoring and parameter setting of the motion controller CPU.
The following are the features of the Q motion monitor.
 Various servo monitor data can be displayed on multiple monitor screens
The Q motion monitor function has multiple monitor screens, on which you can monitor servo data in a variety of
patterns.
(Display examples)
Error List
Q MOTION MONITOR
Present Value Monitor
6
• Displays the history of errors that occurred on and after the
leading edge of PLC ready (M2000).
• Monitors and displays the feed current values and actual
current values of all running axes.
(
6.4.4 Present Value Monitor screen)
(
Positioning Monitor
Error List Designated-Axis
• Monitors the details of the positioning data set to any axis.
(
6.4.8 Positioning Monitor screen)
6.4.6 Error List screen)
• Displays the latest errors that occurred on the specified axis.
(
6.4.7 Error List Designated-Axis screen)
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.1 Features
6-1
 Servo parameters can be changed by writing
(Write example: Changing the setting of the auto tuning function)
Parameter setting screen
Parameter setting window appears
Parameter setting screen
Change the auto tuning mode from "1" to "2".
Parameter setting is changed.
1.
By performing writing from the parameter setting screen, write the servo parameter setting (basic parameters/
adjustment parameters) to the motion controller CPU.
2.
To change a servo parameter setting, enter the necessary numerical value or option number from the automatically
displayed key window, and write it to the motion controller CPU.
6-2
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.1 Features
6.2 Specifications
6.2.1
System configuration
This chapter describes the system configuration of the Q motion monitor.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1
 Target motion controller CPU of the Q motion monitor
Motion controller CPU
Motion controller CPU (Q series)*1*2
*2
Use the following production number motion controller CPU when using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU.
• For bus connection and direct CPU connection
Q172CPU: Production number K******* or later
Q173CPU: Production number J******* or later
• For a connection other than bus connection and direct CPU connection
Q172CPU: Production number N******* or later
Q173CPU: Production number M******* or later
When using the OS (SV13 or SV22) with the Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, or Q173CPUN, install the following version.
SW6RN-SV13Q
connection)
: 00H or later (00E or later when using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU with a bus connection or direct CPU
SW6RN-SV22Q
connection)
: 00H or later (00E or later when using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU with a bus connection or direct CPU
 Connection type
This function can be used in the following connection types.
(1) When the GOT is connected to a QCPU (Q mode), QnACPU, or motion controller CPU
(
Function
Name
Description
Servo
monitor
Monitors the present
value, positioning error
and other servo-related
items on a variety of
monitor screens.
Parameter
settings
Changes the setting of
the servo parameter.
*1
*2
*3
*4
: Available,
: Partly restricted,
: Unavailable)
Connection type between GOT and controller
Bus
connection
Direct CPU
connection
Computer
link
connection
Ethernet
connection
*4
MELSEC
NET/H
connection,
MELSEC
NET/10
connection
CC-Link IE
controller
connection
*1
CC-Link
connection
ID*2
G4*3
Indicates the CC-Link IE controller network connection.
Indicates CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station).
Indicates CC-Link connection (via G4).
Q motion monitor cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.2 Specifications
6-3
6
Q MOTION MONITOR
*1
 Required exteded system application
The extended system applications shown below are required.
1.2 Required extended system application for the function
(1) Exteded system application
Write the package data that has the extended system application for the Q motion monitor to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
(2) Exteded system application space
To write the extended system application to the GOT, certain space of the user area must be reserved for the
application.
For the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data
using other user areas, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
 Required special data
Write the Q motion monitor data to the GOT.
The available memory space of the user area for writing varies depending on the Q motion monitor data to be used.
Refer to the capacity of the Q motion monitor data in the following table and calculate the required space for writing.
For the procedure for writing to the GOT and for checking the available memory space of the user area and
information about the data using other user areas, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
 Servo amplifiers whose parameter can be set
The Q motion monitor allows you to set the parameter of servo amplifiers shown below.
Motion controller CPU
6-4
Servo amplifier
Q172CPU, Q173CPU
MR-H-B, MR-J-B, MR-J2-B, MR-J2S-B, MR-J2M, MR-J2-03B5
Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU
MR-J3-B, MR-J3-BS, MR-J3W-B, MR-J3-B-RJ006, MR-J3-B-RJ004
Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU
MR-J3-B, MR-J3-BS, MR-J3W-B, MR-J3-B-RJ006, MR-J3-B-RJ004, MR-J3-B-RJ080W
Q172DSCPU, Q173DSCPU, Q170MSCPU
MR-J3-B, MR-J3-BS, MR-J3W-B, MR-J3-B-RJ006, MR-J3-B-RJ004, MR-J3-B-RJ080W,
MR-J4-B, MR-J4W-B
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.2 Specifications
6.2.2
Access range
For the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, and CC-Link IE controller network connections, the GOT can monitor the
motion controller CPU on the control station only.
In CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station), only the motion controller CPU in master station can be monitored.
In Ethernet connection, only the motion controller CPU in host station can be monitored.
The access range other than that mentioned above is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a
controller.
For details of the access range, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1
6.2.3
Precautions
(1) Main OS software package for motion controller
The only Main OS software package that can be used is SV13 or SV22.
(2) When setting parameters for Q172HCPU or Q173HCPU
6
Q MOTION MONITOR
When setting parameters for Q172HCPU or Q173HCPU, after parameter entry, set the switch on the CPU to
STOP and RUN again, or reset the CPU.
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.2 Specifications
6-5
6.3 Operations for Display
This section describes the flow until the Q motion monitor operation screen is displayed after the Q motion monitor
(Option OS) is installed in the GOT.
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT.
Starting from the utility
Starting from the special function
switch (Q motion monitor) set in
the project data
Touch the special function switch.
Display the utility.
After the utility is displayed,
touch [Monitor]
[Motion monitor] from the Main Menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the User's Manual
for the GOT used.
Refer to the following manual for how to set the special
function switch.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
Set the channel number.
Set the channel number of the
controller monitoring the Q motion.
Communication setting window
The System Configuration screen is
displayed.
Touch a motion controller CPU to
monitor. Touching Motion Monitor
displays the monitor menu.
Continued on the next page
6-6
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.3 Operations for Display
(From preceding page)
Parameter setting
Motion monitor
Monitor menu screen appears.
Has the motion parameter
changing password been
registered?
No
Yes
Enter the parameter changing password.
6.4.11
Parameter setting screen appears.
Select the menu item.
6
The monitor screen of the selected
function appears.
Present Value Mon
6.4.4
SFC Error History
6.4.5
Error List
6.4.6
Error List Axis
6.4.7
Positioning Monitor
6.4.8
Servo Monitor
6.4.9
Present Value Hist.
6.4.10
Select the servo parameter to be set.
Q MOTION MONITOR
Perform operation for the selected
monitor function.
6.4.11
CHG
Change the servo parameter setting.
6.4.11
Write the new servo parameter setting.
6.4.11
POINT
(1) How to display the utility
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
User's Manual for the GOT used
(2) Displaying communication setting window
After turning on the GOT, the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the Q motion
monitor only.
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch the Ch:
the Q motion monitor screen. (
button on
6.4 Operation Procedures)
(3) If the project data has not been downloaded
The Q motion monitor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to the
GOT.
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.3 Operations for Display
6-7
 Changing screens
Start
Utility Main Menu
or
user-created monitor screen
Communication
setting window
Ch:
END
System Configuration screen (
8.4.1)
(Select the motion controller
CPU to be monitored.)
Sys. Conf
Sys. Conf
Parameter Set.
Motion Monitor
END
END
Monitor menu screen (
Mon. Menu
8.4.3)
(Menu selection)
Monitor screen of selected function
(
Refer to 8.4.4 and thereafter)
END
Password input key window (
8.4.11)
Sys. Conf
Parameter setting screen
(
8.4.11)
END
HINT
Screen displayed at next startup
At next startup, the last exited screen is displayed.
However, the last exited screen will not be displayed when the GOT is restarted due to an installation of the OS,
turning the GOT power from off to on, or a reset.
6-8
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.3 Operations for Display
6.4 Operation Procedures
This section explains screen operations to be performed when using the Q motion monitor.
The display screen of the Q motion monitor varies slightly with the GOT used.
This section mainly uses the screen of the GT1575-V for explanation.
6.4.1
System configuration screen layout
This section describes the configuration of the System Configuration screen that is displayed after startup of the Q
motion monitor and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen.
 Displayed contents
2)
1)
2)
2)
No.
Description
1)
The CPU numbers are displayed for CPUs and the control CPU number for the installed module.
To choose the motion controller CPU for servo monitor/servo parameter setting, touch the respective display
position.
2)
Displays the keys used with the operation on the System Configuration screen.(Touch input)
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the System Configuration screen.
Key
Function
Displays the communication setting window.
Exits the monitor and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
Selects the motion controller CPU where servo monitor/servo parameter setting is performed.
Changes the System Configuration screen to the monitor menu screen.
(
6.4.3 Monitor Menu screen)
Changes the System Configuration screen to parameter setting screen.
(
6.4.11 Parameter setting screen)
Scrolls the display one stage up or down to display the system configuration of the currently undisplayed stage
immediately before/after the currently displayed stage.
: Scrolls down one stage.
: Scrolls up one stage.
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.4 Operation Procedures
6-9
Q MOTION MONITOR
6
6.4.2
Setting method for other station monitoring
The following shows the setting methods for monitoring other stations with Q motion monitor.
6 - 10
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.4 Operation Procedures
1.
In the communication setting window, select one from
channels No.1 to 4.
For the operation on the communication setting screen, refer
to the following.
(1) Communication setting window
2.
When the channel No. is selected, the screen on the left is
displayed.
Set the network number of the target controller and the CPU
station number.
3.
After selecting the station number, touch the enter key. The
communication setting window closes and the system
configuration of the set monitor destination is displayed.
(1) Communication setting window
(a) Displayed screen
2)
3) 1)
3) 1)
2)
4)
5)
(When the network No., station No.,
and CPU No. are input)
(When the CH No. is input)
The following table shows the displayed contents.
1)
2)
Item
Description
CH No. input area
Network No. input area
6
Setting range
Set the CH No. for the target
controller.
1 to 4
Set the network No. for the target
controller.
Differs depending on the connection type.
• Bus connection, direct CPU connection, computer link
connection: 0
• Ethernet connection, CC-Link IE controller network
connection: 1 to 239
• MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10: 0 (host loop) / 1 to
255 (specified loop)
• CC-Link (ID/G4) connection: 0
Differs depending on the connection type.
• Bus connection, direct CPU connection, computer link
connection: FF (host station)
• Ethernet connection: 1 to 64
• MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10: 0 (master station) / 1
to 64 (local station)
• CC-Link IE controller network connection: 1 to 120
• CC-Link (ID/G4) connection: 0 (master station) / 1 to 64
(local station)
3)
Station No. input area
Set the station No. of the target
controller.
When the station No. is set to the
host station (FF), set the network
No. to 0.
4)
CH No. selection key
Select a CH No.
-
5)
Keys
Keys for operations in the
communication setting window
shown in (b). (Touch input)
-
(b) Key functions
Key
Function
Closes the communication setting window.
When any of the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. is not input and the monitor target is
not set, the communication setting window does not close.
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
Deletes all the input values and characters.
Deletes an input value or character.
Moves the cursor when the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No.
input area.
When the cursor is in the CPU No. input area and settings for the CH No., network No., and station
No. are completed, the communication setting window closes and the PLC read screen appears.
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.4 Operation Procedures
6 - 11
Q MOTION MONITOR
No.
6.4.3
Monitor Menu screen
The Q motion monitor allows you to monitor various servo monitor data on multiple monitor screens.
To display any of the monitor screens, make a selection on the monitor menu screen.
Item
Present Value Mon.
SFC Error History
Error List
(
6.4.4 Present Value Monitor screen)
Displays the history of errors that occurred in SFC programs from when the motion CPU was powered on or reset.
(
6.4.5 SFC Error History screen)
Displays the history of errors that occurred on and after the leading edge of PLC ready (M2000).
(
6.4.6 Error List screen)
Error List Axis
Displays the latest errors that occurred on the specified axis. (
Positioning Monitor
Monitors the details of the positioning data set to any axis. (
Servo Monitor
Monitors the servo monitor/servo amplifier. (
Present Value Hist.
6 - 12
Description
Monitors and displays the feed current values and actual current values of all running axes.
6.4.7 Error List Designated-Axis screen)
6.4.8 Positioning Monitor screen)
6.4.9 Servo Monitor screen)
Displays the history of encoder present values, servo command values and monitor present values of the ABS axis
at servo amplifier power-on/off or at home position return. (
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.4 Operation Procedures
6.4.10 Present Value History Monitor screen)
6.4.4
Present Value Monitor screen
This section describes the display data of the Present Value Monitor screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
 Displayed contents
1)
1)
No.
1)
2)
2)
2)
4)
3)
3)
Item
Ax
Function
The axis numbers of the running axes being monitored are displayed.
The feed present values or actual present values of the running axes are
displayed.Touching the display part of the monitored value switches to the
positioning monitor screen of the touched axis number.
Feed PV/Actual PV
(
6.4.8 Positioning Monitor screen)
Whether the servo ready signals, major/minor errors and servo error detection
signals are ON (lit) or OFF (not lit) are displayed.Touching the error indication part
3)
SV RDY, ERR DT, SV ERR
"
" switches to the Error List Designated-Axis screen of the touched axis number.
(
4)
Bit device screen
6.4.7 Error List Designated-Axis screen)
The common bit devices are always monitored and displayed.
• Error detection type bit devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displayed in red
• General status type bit devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displayed in green
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys used for operation of the Present Value Monitor screen.
Key
/
Function
Touching the key alternates the monitor item between the "feed present value" and "actual present value".
(Only in the real mode)
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
Exits the present value monitor and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
Switches the displayed axis number.
(Displayed only for Q173CPU, Q173HCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, Q172DSCPU, and Q173DSCPU
monitoring.)
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
6.4.12 Hard copy output
The operation of this key is invalid.
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.4 Operation Procedures
6 - 13
Q MOTION MONITOR
6
6.4.5
SFC Error History screen
This section describes the display data of the SFC Error History screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
 Displayed contents
SFC Error History screen displays the history of error which occurs in the motion SFC programs.
5)
1)
No.
2)
4)
3)
Item
Description
1)
M/D H:M
Displays the dates and time when SFC errors occurred.
The eight latest errors are displayed for the history of errors.
The 128 errors are displayed for Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU,
Q172DSCPU, and Q173DSCPU.
2)
Program No.
Displays the SFC program numbers where SFC errors occurred.
3)
Err Code
Displays the error codes of the errors that occurred.
4)
Error Definition
Displays the definitions of the SFC errors that occurred.
5)
Page
Displays the page number and the total number of pages of the SFC error history.
(Only with Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, Q172DSCPU, and
Q173DSCPU)
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys used for operation of the SFC Error History screen.
Key
Function
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
Exits the SFC Error History screen and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
(
6.4.12 Hard copy output)
The operation of this key is invalid.
Clears the error history. (Only with Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, Q172DSCPU, and Q173DSCPU)
Scrolls the history display up and down by eight histories when the SFC error history is displayed.
(by four histories for QVGA)
(Only with Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, Q172DSCPU, and Q173DSCPU)
6 - 14
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.4 Operation Procedures
6.4.6
Error List screen
This section describes the display data of the Error List screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
 Displayed contents
The error list screen displays the error which occurs in the motion controller CPU.
(Errors occurred in motion SFC programs are also displayed.)
7)
1)
No.
1)
2) 3)
4)
5)
6)
Item
M/D H:M
Description
The dates and time when errors occurred are displayed.
The eight latest errors are displayed.
The 128 errors are displayed for Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU,
Q172DSCPU, and Q173DSCPU.
The axis numbers and axis types of the axes where errors occurred are
displayed.
2)
Ax
Virtual axis
Synchronous encoder axis
: Virtual
: Sync
SV P. No.
The servo program numbers that were being executed when the error occurred
are displayed.
The execution destination of the servo program in error is not displayed.Using
the servo program number, refer to the execution destination.
4)
Err Code
Displays the types and error codes of the errors that occurred.
The error types are displayed as indicated below.
• Minor error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minor
• Major error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Major
• Servo error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servo
• Servo program setting error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servo P
• Real/virtual switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch
• Test mode request error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test
• Manual pulse generator setting error . . . . . . . . . . Manual
• PCPU ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-WDT
• SSCNET ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication error
5)
Error Definition
The definitions of the errors that occurred are displayed.
6)
Set Data
The program number in error is displayed if the set data has any errors.
7)
Page
Displays the page number and the total number of pages of the error list.
(Only with Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, Q172DSCPU, and
Q173DSCPU)
3)
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.4 Operation Procedures
6 - 15
Q MOTION MONITOR
6
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the Error List screen.
Key
Function
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
Exits the Error List screen and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
6.4.12 Hard copy output
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
Scrolls the history display up and down by eight histories when the error list is displayed.
(Only with Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, Q172DSCPU, and Q173DSCPU)
6 - 16
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.4 Operation Procedures
6.4.7
Error List Designated-Axis screen
This section describes the display data of the Error List Designated-Axis screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
 Displayed contents
(In real mode)
(In virtual mode)
7)
6)
7)
6)
1)
2)
5)
3)
4)
8)
No.
1)
Item
Description
Axis No.
Displays the axis number currently being monitored.
2)
Out Module
Displays the output module axis number currently being monitored.
3)
Virt. Axis
Displays the virtual axis number currently being monitored.
4)
Sync. Enco.
Displays the synchronous encoder axis number currently being monitored.
5)
Program No.
Displays the servo program numbers that were being executed when the error
occurred.
6)
Err Code
Displays the error codes of the minor/major/servo error, servo program setting
error, real/virtual switching error information (error code: hexadecimal), personal
computer link communication error code and motion CPU WDT error that are
currently occurring.
7)
Error Definition
Displays the definitions of the errors that occurred.
8)
9)
MAN-PLS Axis ERR
Test REQ ERR
Each 1-Pulse
1M Error
Displays the axes where a 1-pulse input magnification setting error occurred.
MAN-PLS Ax
ERR
Displays the errors of the axis numbers set to the manual pulse generators P1 to
P3.
Each MANPLS SM ERR
Displays the errors of the smoothing magnifications set to the manual pulse
generators P1 to P3.
Displays the axis numbers that are being started at a test mode request.
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.4 Operation Procedures
6 - 17
Q MOTION MONITOR
6
9)
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation of the Error List Designated-Axis
screen.
Key
Function
(Only in the real mode)
/
/
Switches the axes to be monitored.
(Only in the virtual mode)
(Display example: When axis 1 is
monitored)
Returns to the previous screen.
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
Exits the Error List Designated-Axis monitor screen and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor
was started.
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
6.4.12 Hard copy output
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
6 - 18
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.4 Operation Procedures
6.4.8
Positioning Monitor screen
This section describes the display data of the Positioning Monitor screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
 Displayed contents
(In virtual mode)
(In real mode)
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6
No.
1)
6)
7)
Item
Data Item
7)
Description
Displays the axis numbers of the running axes being monitored.
For the virtual axis, the axis type is displayed.
• Roller
• Ballscrew
• Rotary table
• Cam
Displays the data during positioning control of the PCPU.
2)
Feed PV
• Feed PV
:
• Actual PV
:
• Dvt. Counter
:
• EXE Prog No.
• Min/Major SV ERR
• M Code • T Limit
:
:
:
Target address output to the servo amplifier (value
of the roller surface speed for the roller axis)
Actually traveled present value (no value is
displayed for the roller axis)
Difference between feed present value and actual
present value
Servo program number in execution
rror code of the latest minor/major/servo error
The M code and torque limit of the servo program
in execution
3)
EXE Cam No.
Displays the cam number currently controlled.
4)
EXE Stroke
Displays the stroke amount currently controlled.
5)
Cam Ax. 1 Rev.
Displays the present value within one cam axis revolution pulse.
6)
Status
Displays ON and OFF of the symbols that represent the axis-by-axis control statuses.
• In the ON status, the symbol is lit green.
• At error or servo error detection, the symbol is lit red.
7)
CMD Signal
Displays ON and OFF of the positioning command signals.
In the ON status, the signal is lit green.
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.4 Operation Procedures
6 - 19
Q MOTION MONITOR
1)
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys used for operation of the positioning monitor screen.
Key
(Display example: When axis 1
is monitored)
Function
Changes the axes to be monitored.
Returns to the previous screen.
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
Exits the positioning monitor and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
6.4.12 Hard copy output
The operation of this key is invalid.
6 - 20
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.4 Operation Procedures
6.4.9
Servo Monitor screen
This section describes the display data of the Servo Monitor screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
 Displayed contents
1)
2)
3)
4)
6
Item
Description
1)
Ax
Displays the axis number currently being monitored.
2)
Motor Speed
Displays the actual speed of the servo motor.
3)
Motor Current
Displays the motor current value at the rated current of 100%.
4)
Servo Alarm
Displays the alarm detected by the servo amplifier.
Q MOTION MONITOR
No.
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for operation of the servo monitor screen.
Key
(Display example: When axis 1
is monitored)
Function
Changes the axes to be monitored.
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
Exits the servo monitoring and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
6.4.12 Hard copy output
The operation of this key is invalid.
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.4 Operation Procedures
6 - 21
6.4.10
Present Value History Monitor screen
This section describes the display data of the Present Value History Monitor screen and the key functions displayed on
the screen.
 Displayed contents
1)
2)
3)
4)
No.
1)
2)
3)
4)
6 - 22
Item
Description
Ax
Displays the axis number of the axis currently being monitored.
HP Data
Displays the following values monitored at home position return.
• Home position return completion time
• Encoder present value
Multi-revolution data of absolute position reference point data
Within-one-revolution position of absolute position reference point data
• Servo command value
• Monitor present value
MON Val
Displays the following present monitor values.
• Present time
• Encoder present value
Present multi-revolution data of encoder present value
Present within-one-revolution position of encoder present value
• Present servo command value
• Present monitor present value
PWR ON/PWR OFF
Displays the four past present values of the ABS axis at servo amplifier power-on/off.
[At power-on]
• Power-on time
• Encoder present value
Multi-revolution data of initial encoder
Single-revolution data of initial encoder
• Servo command value after recovery
• Monitor present value after recovery
• Alarm occurrence information at present value recovery (error code of minor/major error)
[At power-off]
• Servo amplifier power-off time
• Encoder present value
Multi-revolution data of encoder present value before servo amplifier power-off
Single-revolution data of encoder present value before servo amplifier power-off
• Servo command at servo amplifier power-off
• Monitor present value at servo amplifier power-off
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.4 Operation Procedures
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys used for operation of the Present Value History Monitor screen.
Key
Changes the axes to be monitored.
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
Exits the Present Value History Monitor screen and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was
started.
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
6.4.12 Hard copy output
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
6
Q MOTION MONITOR
(Display example: When axis 1
is monitored)
Function
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.4 Operation Procedures
6 - 23
6.4.11
Parameter setting screen
You can set the servo parameters (basic parameters/adjustment parameters) of the connected motion controller CPU.
This section describes the display data of the parameter setting screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
 Displayed screen
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used with the operation on the parameter setting screen.
Key
Function
Changes the servo parameter setting of the selected item.
Selects the servo parameter setting item.
Changes the axis whose parameter setting will be made.
Returns to the System Configuration screen.
Exits the parameter setting and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
6.4.12 Hard copy output
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
6 - 24
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.4 Operation Procedures
 Inputting the password
The password input key window appears for accessing the parameter setting screen when the password setting data
for changing motion parameters is written to the GOT with GT Designer3.
6
(1) Function
• If the password does not match, an error message is displayed. Touching Sys. Conf returns to the System
Configuration screen.
• Only numbers and letters A to F can be used for the password setting. (Up to 8 characters)
• The password for changing the motion parameters is set with GT Designer3.
For details of the setting password, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
(2) Operations
(a) Inputting the password
Touch the key window and enter a password.
After entering the password, touch Enter to set the password.
To edit the input characters, touch Del to delete the characters, and then input the new characters.
(b) Canceling password input
Touch
to return to the monitor screen.
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.4 Operation Procedures
6 - 25
Q MOTION MONITOR
• If the password matches, the parameter setting screen is displayed.
 Parameter setting operation
The following describes the procedure of changing the setting of the [Auto Tuning] item as an example of the
parameter setting operation.
1.
Select the item whose parameter is to be set
with the
,
keys, and touch the CHG
key.
2.
As the parameter setting window appears,
enter the parameter setting with
Alphanumeric , and touch Enter to confirm
the setting.
To cancel the parameter setting operation,
touch
at the top right of the screen to
close the parameter setting window.
3.
As the confirmation window appears, touch
OK to write the parameter setting to the
motion controller CPU.
To cancel writing of the parameter setting,
touch Cancel .
4.
After writing is completed, the parameter
setting screen whose display has been
updated to the new parameter setting is
displayed.
(Touch)
(Touch)
(Touch)
6 - 26
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.4 Operation Procedures
6.4.12
Hard copy output
This section describes how to store a screen to the data strage in BMP/JPEG file format or print it with a printer when
executing the Q motion monitor.
Hard copy methods differ depending on the GOT to be used.
(1) GOT with VGA or higher resolution
Hard copy output operations are performed by touching the "Print Screen" or "Cancel Print" key displayed on the
screen.
Q MOTION MONITOR
6
Touch [Print Screen]
A BMP/JPEG file will be stored on the
data strage inserted in the GOT.
The Q motion monitor screen will be printed
with the printer connected to the GOT.
(2) GOT with QVGA resolution
Hard copy output operations are performed by turning ON/OFF the start or abort trigger device that has been set
in the GT Designer3.
POINT
• Install the extended function OS (Printer) to the GOT when printing a Q motion monitor screen.
• The output target (data strage) of hard copy can be set in [Hard Copy] of GT Designer3.
For details of hard copy setting, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.4 Operation Procedures
6 - 27
6.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action
This section describes the error messages that may be displayed during Q motion monitor operation and their corrective
action.
Error message
Error definition
Corrective action
No. PLC Communications
Communication cannot be established
with the PLC CPU of the monitor
target.
This PLC type is not supported
A motion controller CPU that cannot
be monitored was selected on the
System Configuration screen.
Controller's OS type is different
The motion controller OS installed in
the motion controller CPU (Q172CPU,
Q173CPU) of the monitor target is
other than SV13 or SV22.
It is not a version for GOT
The version of the motion controller
OS installed in the motion controller
CPU of the monitor target is not
compatible with the Q motion monitor.
Monitor data not found
The monitor data was not installed or
was deleted.
Unused axis selected
The axis number selected has not
been set.
It is not possible to select
During servo parameter setting, an
item that cannot be set has been
selected.
Select an item that can be set.
Incorrect setting range
A value that is outside the setting
range has been set.
Set the value within the setting range.
Unmatched password
The password that was input as the
motion parameter changing password
is incorrect.
Input the correct password.
Communication channel setup error
A communication driver that is
compatible with the Q motion monitor
is not installed.
Install a compatible communication driver.
Unsupport amp. selected
The axis number set with a servo
amplifier whose parameter cannot be
set has been selected.
Set the axis number with a servo amplifier whose parameter
can be set.
• Check the status of the connection between the controller
and the GOT (disconnected or cut cables).
• Check if an error has occurred in the controller.
Select a motion controller CPU that can be monitored on the
System Configuration screen. (
6.2.1 Target motion
controller CPU of the Q motion monitor)
Install SV13 or SV22 in the motion controller CPU (Q172CPU,
Q173CPU) of the monitor target as the motion controller OS.
Install a motion controller OS that is compatible with the Q
motion monitor in the motion controller. (
GOT2000
Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3
Version1)
Download the monitor data of the motion monitor.
• Select the axis number that has been set.
• Set the axis using the peripheral software.
POINT
How to clear a displayed error message
For errors that occur with the connection to a controller (communication error, etc.), the error message does not
disappear even after the cause of the error has been removed.
To delete the error message, restart the GOT.
6 - 28
6. Q MOTION MONITOR
6.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action
7.
INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.1 Features
With the intelligent module monitor, you can use dedicated screens to monitor the buffer memory of the intelligent
function module and make changes to the data.
In addition, you can monitor the signal statuses of the I/O modules.
The features of the intelligent module monitor are described below.
 Realized monitoring with dedicated screens
You can monitor the intelligent function module(s) and I/O module(s) and make changes to the data using dedicated
screens.
There is no need to create screens for monitoring or data changes, thereby reducing the drawing workload.
(1) For intelligent function module
Select a monitor from the menu
Monitor screen
Select a menu
(2) For I/O module
The status of I/O signals to and from an external module is monitored.
Monitor screen
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.1 Features
7
INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
As a menu of monitor items is displayed, select an item from the menu, and the corresponding monitor screen is
then displayed.
Details of the buffer memory and the I/O signal statuses between the buffer memory and the PLC CPU are
displayed in text, numerical values, and graphs on the monitor screens.
7-1
 Enabled data change by write operations
The values are written into the buffer memory of the intelligent function module by writing values from the monitor
screen.
(Writing example)
Monitor screen
When changing a change-permitted channel
Select writing
7-2
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.1 Features
7.2 Specifications
7.2.1
System configuration
This section describes the system configuration of the intelligent module monitor.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1
 Targeted equipments for the intelligent module monitor
(1) PLC CPU
PLC
QCPU (Q mode), motion controller (Q series)*1
QSCPU
LCPU
*1
For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be
monitored.
7
(2) Intelligent function module
PLC CPU
Intelligent function module
LCPU
QD73A1, QD75D
Output module
(N), QD75P
(N), QD75MH, QD75M, QD77MS, Input module,
L60AD4, L60DA4, LD62, LD62D, LD75D, LD75P, LD77MH, LD77MS, Input module
(LX40C6, LX41C4, LX42C4), Output module (LY10R2, LY41NT1P, LY42NT1P)
You can use the system monitor [BM MONITOR] to monitor intelligent function modules other than those listed
above.
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.2 Specifications
7-3
INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
Q64AD, Q68ADV, Q68ADI, QD62, Q64DA, Q62DA, QD62D, QD62E, QD65PD2,
QCPU (Q mode)
 Connection type
This function can be used in the following connection types.
( : Available,
Function
Name
Description
Bus
connection
Direct
CPU
connection
Computer
link
connection
*6*8
*6
MELSECNET/H
Ethernet
connection*9
connection*7,
MELSECNET/10
connection*7
Monitors buffer
memory of intelligent
function module and
signal statuses of I/O
modules
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
: Unavailable)
Connection type between GOT and PLC CPU
*6*7
Intelligen
t module
monitor
: Partly restricted,
CC-Link IE
controller
connection*2*7,
CC-Link IE field
CC-Link
connection
ID*4*6
G4*5*6
connection*3
*1
For the MELSECNET/10 connection, use a QCPU and network module (QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, and
QJ71BR11) with the function version B or later.
Indicates the CC-Link IE controller network connection.
Indicates CC-Link IE field network connection.
Indicates CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station).
Indicates CC-Link connection (via G4).
The QSCPU does not support the connection type.
The LCPU does not support the connection type.
When the GOT is connected to LCPU, use L6ADP-R2.
Intelligent module monitor cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.
 Required extended system application
The extended system application shown below are required.
1.2 Required extended system application for the function
(1) Extended system application
Write the package data that has the extended system application for the intelligent module monitor to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
(2) Extended system application space
To write the extended system application to the GOT, certain space of the user area must be reserved for the
application.
For the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data
using other user areas, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
 Required memory space for use of the intelligent module monitor
To check the required memory space for use of the intelligent module monitor, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
The memory space required for storing data into the internal memory of the GOT is the same as the memory space
required for storing data into the hard disk of a personal computer.
7-4
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.2 Specifications
7.2.2
Access range
 When using bus connection/direct CPU connection/computer link connection
• The intelligent module monitor can monitor intelligent function modules on the bases of the connected station and
other stations.
• The intelligent module monitor can only monitor systems of the following combinations when computer link
connection is applied.
PLC CPU used
Computer link/serial communication module used*1
QCPU (Q mode)
QJ71C24
LCPU
LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2
*1
For details of module names, refer to the GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1.
• The following restrictions apply when monitoring other stations of MELSECNET/II data link systems.
Only the host and master stations can be monitored when the connected station is a local station.
Regardless of the type of connected station, no stations other than ACPU can be monitored.
• When connected to a remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/H network system, the remote I/O station on the
MELSECNET/H network system is displayed as QCPU in the system configuration display of the intelligent
module monitor.
• A diagnosis of the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/H network system is not performed.
• Intelligent function modules on the base of remote I/O stations other than those on the MELSECNET/H network
system are not monitored.
 When using MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, or CC-Link IE controller network
7
• The intelligent module monitor can monitor intelligent function modules on the bases of the control station and
normal stations.
• To monitor another network, routing parameters have to be set to the GOT side and PLC side. (Only with the
MELSECNET/H communication unit or CC-Link IE controller network communication unit)
For the routing parameter setting, refer to the following.
Routing parameter setting for the GOT
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1
Routing parameter setting for PLC CPU
For MELSECNET/H communication unit
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
For CC-Link IE controller network communication unit
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual
 When using CC-Link IE field network connection
The intelligent module monitor can monitor intelligent function modules on the bases of the master station and local
stations.
To monitor another network, routing parameters have to be set to the GOT side and PLC side.
For the routing parameter setting, refer to the following.
Routing parameter setting for the GOT
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1
Routing parameter setting for PLC CPU
The User's Manual of the CC-Link IE field network system master/local module to be used
 When using CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station/via G4)
• The intelligent module monitor can monitor intelligent function modules on the bases of the master station and
local stations.
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.2 Specifications
7-5
INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
connection
 When using Ethernet connection
• The intelligent module monitor can monitor the intelligent function module on the base of the PLC CPU assigned
the IP address.
(The station assigned in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer2 can be monitored.)
• To monitor another network, routing parameters have to be set to the GOT side and PLC side.
For the routing parameter setting, refer to the following.
Routing parameter setting for the GOT
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1
Routing parameter setting for PLC CPU
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
 When the intelligent module monitor monitors the master station of the MELSECNET/II
network on which any remote I/O station exists
• Intelligent function modules on the base of remote I/O stations are not monitored.
7.2.3
Precautions
 Special function modules that cannot be monitored
Modules displayed as "SP" on the System Configuration screen cannot be monitored using the intelligent module
monitor.
To monitor these modules, use the system monitor function [BM MONITOR].
 Monitoring intelligent function modules with restrictions
(1) When monitoring an I/O module
Only the output signal can be monitored for an I/O module for which "Output " is displayed on the System
Configuration screen.
For input signals, monitor X of the PLC CPU device with the system monitor function.
 Editing and reusing intelligent module monitor data
The project data for the intelligent module monitor cannot be edited by modifying or adding an object.
However, the data can be used on a user-created monitor screen.
 Display provided when the QA1S6
extension base unit is used with the QCPU (Q
mode)
This precaution pertains to a situation where the QA1S6 extension base unit is connected to the QCPU (Q mode)
in a station connected to the GOT.
In this case, the abbreviated format is displayed for the following intelligent function modules on the System
Configuration screen.
You can use the unit detail information to check the full format of the module displayed with the abbreviated format.
Unsupported intelligent function modules are displayed as "SP", and the corresponding modules cannot be
monitored.
Installed module
A1S63ADA
A1SJ71PT32-S3
Model name displayed
63ADA
J71PT32-
A1SJ71ID1-R4
J71ID
A1SJ71ID2-R4-S1
A1S64TCTT(BW)-S1
64TCTT/R
A1S64TCRT(BW)-S1
7-6
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.2 Specifications
7.3 Operations for Display
This subsection describes the flow until the operation screen for the intelligent module monitor is displayed after the
intelligent module monitor (Option OS) is installed in the GOT.
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT.
Starting from
the utility
Display the utility.
Starting from the special function
switch (intelligent module monitor)
set in the project data
Touch the special function switch.
Starting from
the MELSEC-L
troubleshooting
Activate [Intelligent module monitor] on
the MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen.
Touch [Intelligent
module monitor].
Refer to the following manual for how to
set the special function switch.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
7
10.4 Operation Procedures
INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
After the utility is displayed,touch [Debug]
[Intelligent module monitor] from the
Main Menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the
User's Manual for the GOT used.
Set the channel number, network
number, station number.
Set the channel number, network number
and station number of the PLC CPU
connected to the GOT.
Communication setting window
(Continued to next page)
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.3 Operations for Display
7-7
(Continued from previous page)
Display the System Configuration screen.
System Configuration NETWK No. [0] PLC STATION [FF]
NET
END
PC No.
MAIN
CPU
Ext.1
OUT64 IN64
AJ71
PT32-S3
Y 0
Y 40
X,Y 80
IN16
OUT32 AJ71
A62LS
Y120
Y130
X,Y180
X,Y150
A616AD
Ext.2
X,Y200
IN64
SP
Y 40
X,Y A0
SP
X,Y230
AJ71
PT32-S3
X,Y 80
A616DA
X,Y100
A616TD
X,Y260
Specify the module to be monitored.
When starting, the module format and related data are
not displayed.
When reading of module data from the PLC CPU is
complete, the module format and related data is displayed.
When using the QCPU (Q mode), QSCPU or LCPU
the PLC CPU status (PC information monitor screen) and
module error information and others (Unit Detail Info Screen)
can be checked. See Sec. 7.4.1.
When END is selected, the intelligent module monitoring
ends and the display moves to the original screen where
the intelligent module monitor function was begun.
See Secs. 7.4.1, 7.4.6.
Display the intelligent module monitor menu.
See Sec. 7.4.6.
Select from the menu.
The Intelligent Module Monitor Screen is displayed by
selecting it from the menu.
See Sec. 7.4.6.
Display the monitor screen for the intelligent
module.
Check the data for the module with the
displayed contents.
See Sec. 7.4.5.
See Sec. 7.5.
Change the data.
Change the current value of the specified
area.
Carry out the following operation when changing the
current values of the buffer memory that is displayed
on the monitor screen.
See Sec. 7.4.7.
POINT
(1) How to display the utility
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
User's Manual for the GOT used
(2) Displaying communication setting window
After turning on the GOT, the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the intelligent
module monitor only.
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch the
the intelligent module monitor screen.
ChNET
PLCNo.
button on
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
(3) If the project data has not been downloaded
The intelligent module monitor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded
to the GOT.
7-8
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.3 Operations for Display
 Changing screens
The following describes how to change the screen.
(1) When using QCPU (Q mode), Q series motion controller CPU, QSCPU, or LCPU
Utility Main Menu
or
user-created monitor screen
At the first startup
Communication setting window
Error details screen
(QSCPU, LCPU only)
Error cause/
Error record
Icon of
PLC CPU
System configuration screen
(Basic mode)
System configuration screen
(info. mode)
PC information screen
7
(QCPU, LCPU)
Icons of the
I/O module
I/O module monitor screen
Operation details screen
(QSCPU only)
Continuous error release screen
(LCPU only)
Unit detail info screen
Positioning monitor screen
(LCPU only)
Icon
Icon of
intelligent
function
module
Monitor menu
Menu
Intelligent module monitor screen
Data area No.
setting window
Set/Reset
window
I/O monitor screen
(LCPU only)
High-speed counter monitor screen
(LCPU only)
Current
value
Data change window
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.3 Operations for Display
7-9
INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
Operation
log
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
This section describes the operations of the screens when using the intelligent module monitor.
7.4.1
Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions
This section describes the configuration of the System Configuration screen that is displayed after startup of the
intelligent module monitor and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen.
 When using the QCPU (Q mode), QSCPU or LCPU
(1) Displayed contents
1)
2)
3)
Item
1)
2)
Description
Displays the channel number, network number and station number of the monitored station.
Displays the model name, I/O points, and start I/O number for the modules installed in the monitored station.
The model name of the module and related data are displayed at the end of the module data readout from the
PLC CPU.
For an intelligent function module that cannot be monitored, the model name is displayed as "SP".
The module icon becomes the key to switch to the screen where the monitoring of that module is performed.
The communication setting window is displayed for the MELSECNET/H connection or MELSECNET/10
connection.
7.4.2 Setting method for other station monitoring
Displays the CPU Nos. for the CPUs and the control CPU number for the installed modules when there are
multiple CPU systems.
3)
7 - 10
Display keys used for the operations on the System Configuration screen shown in (2). (Touch input)
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used with the operation on the DEVICE MONITOR
screen.
Key
Function
Displays the communication setting window.
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
The screen switches to the PC Information monitor screen.
Icon of intelligent function
module
7.4.3 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions
In intelligent module monitor mode:
Switches to the screen where the intelligent module monitoring for that module is performed.
In unit detail info mode:
Switches to the screen displaying detailed information of the selected module.
Switches the System Configuration screen to Info. mode.
7.4.4 Composition of the unit detail info screen and key functions
Switches the System Configuration screen to Basic mode.
Scrolls the display one stage up or down to display the system configuration of the currently undisplayed stage
immediately before/after the currently displayed stage.
Operations can be performed when the system configuration has three or more extension bases.
: Scrolls one stage up.
: Scrolls one stage down.
7
INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
Icon of PLC CPU
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
7 - 11
7.4.2
Setting method for other station monitoring
The following shows the setting methods for monitoring other stations with intelligent module monitor.
7 - 12
1.
When the intelligent module monitor is started for the first time,
the communication setting window is automatically opened by
displaying the system configuration screen.
Otherwise, touch the ChNET
button in the System Configuration
PLCNo.
screen to display the communication setting window.
2.
In the communication setting window, select one from channels
No.1 to 4.
For the operation on the communication setting screen, refer to
the following.
(1) Communication setting window
3.
When the channel No. is selected, the screen on the left is
displayed.
Set the network number of the target controller and the CPU
station number.
4.
After selecting the station number, touch the enter key. The
communication setting window closes and the system
configuration of the set monitor destination is displayed.
For further operations, refer to the following.
7.4.6 Specifying a module to monitor and selecting
monitor menu
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
(1) Communication setting window
(a) Displayed screen
3) 1)
2)
3) 1)
2)
4)
5)
(When the network No., station No.,
and CPU No. are input)
(When the CH No. is input)
The following table shows the displayed contents.
Item
1)
CH No. input area
2)
Network No. input
area
3)
Station No. input
area
4)
CH No. selection key
5)
Keys
Description
Setting range
Set the CH No. for the target
controller.
1 to 4
Set the network No. for the target
controller.
Differs depending on the connection type.
• Bus connection, direct CPU connection, computer link
connection: 0
• Ethernet connection, CC-Link IE controller network
connection, CC-Link IE field network connection: 1 to 239
• MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10: 0 (host loop) / 1 to 255
(specified loop)
• CC-Link (ID/G4) connection: 0
Set the station No. of the target
controller.
When the station No. is set to the
host station (FF), set the network
No. to 0.
Differs depending on the connection type.
• Bus connection, direct CPU connection, computer link
connection: FF (host station)
• Ethernet connection: 1 to 64
• MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10: 0 (control station) / 1 to
64 (normal station)
• CC-Link IE controller network connection: 1 to 120
• CC-Link IE field network connection: 0 (master station) / 1 to
120 (local station)
• CC-Link (ID/G4) connection: 0 (master station) / 1 to 64
(local station)
Set the CPU No.
-
Keys for operations in the
communication setting window
shown in (b). (Touch input)
-
(b) Key functions
Key
Function
Closes the communication setting window.
When any of the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. is not input and the monitor target is
not set, the communication setting window does not close.
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
Deletes all the input values and characters.
Deletes an input value or character.
Moves the cursor when the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No.
input area.
When the cursor is in the CPU No. input area and settings for the CH No., network No., and station
No. are completed, the communication setting window closes and the PLC read screen appears.
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
7 - 13
7
INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
No.
7.4.3
Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions
This section describes the structure of the PC Information monitor screen that is displayed by specifying the QCPU (Q
mode), QSCPU or LCPU on the System Configuration screen, and the key functions displayed on the screen.
The GOT displays the PC Information monitor screen only when using the following controllers.
• QCPU (Q mode)
• QSCPU
• LCPU
 When using the QCPU (Q mode) or LCPU
(1) The PC information monitor screen.
(a) Displayed contents
2)
1)
5)
3)
2)
4)
2)
Item
Description
1)
Displays the channel number, network number and station number of the monitored station.
2)
Displays the keys that are used for the operation on the PC information monitor screen.
3)
Displays the operating status of the PLC CPU.
4)
Displays the currently occurring errors.
When using the LCPU, touch the error cause to display the error detail screen.
(2) Error details screen
5)
Displays the error record.
Up to 100 error records can be displayed.
When using the LCPU, touch the error record to display the error detail screen.
(2) Error details screen
(b) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the PC information
monitor screen.
Key
Function
Switches the screen to the System Configuration screen.
7.4.1 Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
Scrolls the display one page up or down.
: Scrolls one page up.
: Scrolls one page down.
Displayed only when LCPU is used.
Shifts to the Continuation error clear screen.
(3) Continuation error clear screen
7 - 14
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
(2) Error details screen
(a) Displayed contents
1)
2)
3)
Item
Description
1)
Displays the channel number, network number and station number of the monitored station.
2)
Displays the keys that are used for the operation on the error details screen.
3)
Displays the common error information and individual error information based on the information stored in
SD4 and SD5 of the LCPU.
For the common error information and the individual error information, refer to the following.
7
(b) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the error details screen.
Key
Function
Returns the screen to the PC Information monitor screen.
7.4.3 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
7 - 15
INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
(3) Continuation error clear screen
(a) Displayed contents
2)
1)
2)
2)
2)
3)
Item
1)
Description
Displays the channel number, network number and station number of the monitored station.
2)
Displays the keys that are used for the operation on the Continuation error clear screen.
3)
Displays the continuous error status that can be released, and the error messages.
The following shows the continuous error status.
• Specification: User specification error
• Minor: Minor error
Touch the check box of each continuous error to switch between releasing or not the error.
(b) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the Continuation error
clear screen.
Key
Function
Returns the screen to the PC Information monitor screen.
7.4.3 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
Targets all continuous errors for the continuous error releasing.
Unselects all continuous errors for the continuous error releasing.
Scrolls the display one stage up or down.
Releases the checked continuous errors.
POINT
Precautions for releasing continuous errors
(1) If the error messages are the same, the errors are released regardless of the error code. Therefore, some
error codes may be released even without the user intend to.
(2) The annunciator memorizes the number of annunciators detected in the CPU modules.
When canceling multiple annunciators, perform the error releasing multiple times.
(3) Even after executing the error releasing, the detected error record is not deleted.
7 - 16
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
 When using the QSCPU
(1) PC Information monitor screen
(a) Displayed contents
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
2)
Description
1)
Displays the channel number, network number, and station number of the monitored station.
2)
Displays the keys that are used for the operation on the System Configuration screen shown in (b).
3)
Displays the QSCPU operation status. (RUN/STOP)
4)
Displays the safety CPU operation mode. (Safety mode/Test mode)
7
Displays the error being occurred.
Touching the error displays the Error details screen.
When using the QSCPU (3) Error details screen)
(
5)
6)
No.
:
Displays the error code.
Detail
:
Displays the detail code of the error log.
([----] is displayed when no detail code exists.)
Error cause
:
Displays the error details.
Touching the item displays the Error details screen.
Date, Time
:
Displays the date and the time that the error occurs.
Set the items to be displayed in the log list.
When using the QSCPU (1) (b) Key functions)
(
Displays the operation status, error information, and others of the monitored PLC CPU. (Log list)
Type
:
Displays the log types. (Ope: Operation log, Err: Error log)
No.
:
Displays the operation codes or error codes.
Detail
:
Displays the 4-digit detail codes of the operation logs or the error logs for the errors
occurred in the CC-Link Safety system remote I/O module.
([----] is displayed when no detail code exists.)
Operation/Error message
7)
Date, Time
:
Displays the operation details or error messages.
Displays "BROKEN OPERATION/ERROR LOG" when the log data is damaged.
:
Displays the dates and the time of operations or the dates and time that errors occur.
Touching an operation log displays the Operation details screen.
(
When using the QSCPU (2) Operation details screen)
Touching an error log displays the Error details screen.
(
When using the QSCPU (3) Error details screen)
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
7 - 17
INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
Item
(b) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the System
Configuration screen.
Key
Function
Switches the screen to the System Configuration screen.
7.4.1 Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
Switches the log types to be displayed in the log list.
All log
Error log
Operation log
: Displays all the logs (error logs, operation logs).
: Displays the error logs only.
: Displays the operation logs only.
Sorts the log list in ascending or descending order.
Switches the numbers of logs displayed in the log list.
32 items
100 items
: Displays the latest 32 logs.
: Displays the latest 100 logs.
(When the number of displayed logs is switched from 100 to 32, 100 logs are displayed before touching
the Update key.)
Obtains the latest log information from the PLC CPU and updates the log list.
(The displayed log data before touching the Update key is deleted.)
Scrolls the display one page up or down.
: Scrolls one page up.
: Scrolls one page down.
(2) Operation details screen
(a) Displayed contents
2)
1)
3)
4)
Item
Description
1)
Displays the channel number, network number, and station number of the monitored station.
2)
Displays the keys that are used for the operation on the System Configuration screen shown in (b).
3)
Displays the information of the error touched in the PC information monitor screen.
4)
Displays the detailed operating information according to the operation log information stored in the
QSCPU.
(b) Key functions
Key
Function
Returns the screen to the PC Information monitor screen.
7.4.3 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
7 - 18
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
(3) Error details screen
(a) Displayed contents
2)
1)
3)
2)
1)
3)
2)
4)
(Example) Error details screen for
safety CPU error
(Example) Displaying individual error
information for safety remote I/O station
Description
1)
Displays the channel number, network number, and station number of the monitored station.
2)
Displays the keys that are used for the operation on the System Configuration screen shown in (b).
3)
Displays the information of the error touched in the PC information monitor screen.
Displays the common error information and the individual error information according to the information
stored in SD4 and subsequent devices of the QSCPU.
For the common error information and the individual error information, refer to the following.
4)
QSCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
When the individual error information for the safety remote I/O station is displayed, the numerical notation
of the displayed data can be switched between decimal and hexadecimal numbers. (When the CC-Link
Safety system master module cannot receive the error information from the safety remote I/O station,
[****] is displayed for unreceived items.)
(b) Key functions
Key
Function
Returns the screen to the PC Information monitor screen.
7.4.3 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
Switches the numerical notation of the displayed data between decimal and hexadecimal numbers. (Only
when the individual error information for the safety remote I/O station is displayed)
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
7 - 19
7
INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
Item
4)
7.4.4
Composition of the unit detail info screen and key functions
This section describes the structure of the Unit Detail Info screen that is displayed by specifying a module on the System
Configuration screen at Info. mode, and the key functions displayed on the screen.
The GOT displays the Unit Detail Info screen only when using the following controllers.
• QCPU (Q mode)
• QSCPU
• LCPU
 Displayed contents
2)
1)
3)
2)
Item
Description
1)
Displays the channel number, network number and station number of the monitored station.
2)
Displays keys used for the operations on the System Configuration screen.
3)
Displays the operating status, error information and other information of the targeted PLC CPU.
Up to 10 error information events can be displayed.
 Key functions
The following table shows the functions of the keys used for the operation on the Unit Detail Info screen.
Key
Function
Switches the screen to the System Configuration screen.
7.4.1 Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
Displayed only when displaying information of the LCPU built-in I/O module.
This button is available when [Positioning axis 1] or [Positioning axis 2] is set to [Use] in the parameter.
Shifts to the positioning monitor screen.
(1) Positioning monitor screen
Displayed only when displaying information of the LCPU built-in I/O module.
This button is available when [High-speed counter 1] or [High-speed counter 2] is set to [Use] in parameter.
Shifts to the high-speed counter monitor screen.
(2) High-speed counter monitor screen
Displayed only when displaying information of the LCPU built-in I/O module.
Shifts to the I/O monitor screen.
(4) I/O monitor screen.
7 - 20
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
(1) Positioning monitor screen
(a) Displayed contents
2)
1)
3)
2)
2)
Description
1)
Displays the channel number, network number and station number of the monitored station.
2)
Displays the keys used for the operations in the positioning monitor screen.
3)
Displays the operation status of the positioning function.
The operation status is displayed or hidden according to the parameter settings of built-in functions.
7
(b) Key functions
The following table shows the functions of the keys used for the operation on the positioning monitor
screen.
Key
Function
Return to the unit detail info screen.
7.4.4 Composition of the unit detail info screen and key functions
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
/
(Error reset)
/
(Home position return request
OFF)
Resets the error of the axis 1 or axis 2.
Turns off the home position return request for axis 1 or axis 2.
POINT
Precautions for using the positioning monitor screen.
When the parameter settings of a built-in function is changed by programming software or others of the connecting
device during the positioning monitor screen display, return to the unit detail info screen and display the position
monitor screen again.
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
7 - 21
INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
Item
(2) High-speed counter monitor screen
(a) Displayed contents
2)
1)
3)
4)
2)
Item
1)
Description
Displays the channel number, network number and station number of the monitored station.
2)
Displays the keys used for the operation in the high-speed counter monitor screen.
3)
Displays the operation status of the high-speed counter function.
The operation status is displayed or hidden according to the parameter settings of built-in functions.
4)
Displays the current value of the CH1 and CH2.
Touch the current value and the data change window is displayed.
(3) Data change window
(b) Key functions
The following table shows the functions of the keys used for the operation on the high-speed counter
monitor screen.
Key
Function
Return to the unit detail info screen.
7.4.4 Composition of the unit detail info screen and key functions
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
Reflects the preset value entered in the data change window to the PLC CPU.
/
Reset the error of CH1 or CH2.
POINT
Precautions for using the high-speed counter monitor screen.
(1) When the parameter settings of a built-in function is changed by programming software or others of the
connecting device during the high-speed counter monitor screen display, return to the unit detail info screen
and display the high-speed counter monitor screen again.
(2) The preset value preset from the high-speed counter monitor screen is valid for the subsequent presets,
unless it is set again in the sequence program.
(3) If the preset from the high-speed counter monitor screen and the preset by the sequence program are
executed simultaneously, the setting value by the sequence program may be preset.
7 - 22
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
(3) Data change window
(a) Displayed contents
2)
1)
2)
Item
Description
1)
Displays the entered value.
2)
Displays the keys used in the operation of the data change window.
(b) Key functions
The following table shows the functions of the keys used for the operation on the data change window.
Key
7
Function
Closes the data change window.
/
/
Changes the data change target.
INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
/
Sets the entered value to the preset value.
Deletes one character of the entered value.
Deletes all entered values.
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
7 - 23
(4) I/O monitor screen.
(a) Displayed contents
2)
1)
4)
3)
5)
Item
Description
1)
Displays the channel number, network number and station number of the monitored station.
2)
Displays the keys used for the operations in the I/O monitor screen.
3)
Displays the status and values of functions assigned to the input signal.
4)
Displays the status of functions assigned to the output signal.
5)
Displays the setting status of the output mode during error, for the output signal.
(b) Key functions
The following table shows the functions of the keys used for the operation on the I/O monitor screen.
Key
Function
Return to the unit detail info screen.
7.4.4 Composition of the unit detail info screen and key functions
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
7 - 24
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
7.4.5
Composition of the intelligent module monitor screen and key functions
This section describes the structure of the monitor screen that is displayed by specifying a module on the System
Configuration screen (in Basic mode when the QCPU (Q mode), QSCPU or LCPU is used), and the key functions
displayed on the screen.
 Displayed contents
1)
3)
2)
7
Description
1)
Displays the model name of the module being monitored.
2)
Displays the buffer memory data of the module in its current form or in a graph.
The status of I/O signals to and from PLC CPU is monitored.
All data are displayed when the readout from the intelligent function module is completed.
When testing, execute testing after moving the cursor to the display position of the target data.
3)
Displays keys used for the operations on the monitor screen.
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of keys that are used for the operations on the monitor screen.
Key
Function
Starts testing (SET/RST) of the I/O signal between the PLC CPU and the intelligent function module.
Starts changing (writing) the current values of the buffer memory of the intelligent function module displayed on
the screen.
Closes the current monitor and returns to the screen displaying monitor menu.
This operation can only be used when the intelligent function module has a monitor menu.
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
7 - 25
INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
Item
7.4.6
Specifying a module to monitor and selecting monitor menu
This section uses the positioning module (AD71) as an example to describe the operations when starting the intelligent
module monitor to monitor a desired module.
Operation procedure
Display System Configuration screen.
See Sec.6.4.1
Specify module to be monitored (Touch display position of module.)
(1)
Display screen that shows monitor menu.
From among the modules installed in the
corresponding base unit, specify the intelligent
function module whose format is displayed.
* : For modules where the format is not displayed,
monitor with the system monitor function (See
Sec.2.).
Specify input/output modules according to Sec. 6.6.
(2) Specify the menu corresponding to the type of
data to be monitored.
(3) With modules for which the monitor menu cannot all
be displayed in one screen, touch the
keys
at the right of the screen to scroll the display menu.
Specify menu to be monitored
(Touch display position of menu.)
Display monitor screen of specified menu.
(4) Check the contents of the display. Carry out the
subsequent operation according to Sec. 6.5.
(5) Carry out tests for the displayed data according to
Sec.6.4.7.
Change current value of buffer memory
Turn output signal from PLC CPU on and off
Proceed to Sec. 6.4.7 and Sec. 6.5
7 - 26
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
7.4.7
Testing of the intelligent function module
WARNING
• When testing the operation (changing a current buffer memory value) of the intelligent module monitor, read this
manual carefully to fully understand the operation.
For devices that perform significant operations for the system, never perform test operation to change data.
Doing so can cause accidents due to false outputs or malfunctions.
Testing can be performed for all buffer memory data displayed on the current monitor screen.
This section describes the operations for changing the current value of the buffer memory and turning on and off the
output signal from the PLC CPU to the intelligent function module.
POINT
(1) Perform testing for the buffer memory that can be written from the PLC CPU and output signals that
are output from the PLC CPU.
(2) It is recommended that testing be performed with the PLC CPU in STOP status.
If the PLC CPU is tested during RUN status, the test monitor display returns to display values output from the
sequence program and output statuses.
7
INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
Operation procedure
Display monitor screen.
2)
Data
Chg.
SET/
(Touch)
, RESET
3)
1)
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
7 - 27
1)
Display key window on monitor screen.
Data is touched (changes current value of buffer memory)
Chg.
All of the following operations can be carried out by touching the keys
in the displayed key window.
When you touch at the upper left of the key window, the key window
closes and the display returns to the monitor screen.
(1) Move the cursor to the position where the data to be tested
is displayed. (*1) (
: Up/down
: Left/right)
(2) Use the numeric keys to specify the value to be changed. (*2)
The DEL key can be used to clear individual characters among those
input.
When
When
(Touch: input confirmation)
3)
(Test continues)
(Test ends)
(Touch)
2)
*1
*2
7 - 28
SET/
is touched (tests the I/O signal)
RESET
All of the following operations can be carried out by touching the keys
in the displayed key window.
When you touch at the upper left of the key window, the key window
closes and the display returns to the monitor screen.
(1) Use the alphabetic character keys to specify the name of the device
to be tested, and then touch
. (*1)
(2) Use the numeric keys to specify the device number, and then touch
.
(3) Use the numeric keys to specify "Set" or "Reset".
0 : OFF
1 : ON
Do not perform the following tests.
If these tests are performed, the module may not operate correctly or the buffer memory/input signal may return to the output
value/output status from the intelligent function module.
1) Testing of read-only buffer memory from the PLC CPU.
2) Testing of input signals from the intelligent function module to the PLC CPU.
When testing buffer memory data, specify the change value in the following way.
1) For data where 16/32 bits are displayed with one number, specify a new value in decimal format.
2) For data where one number of 16/32 bits is displayed as a percent, such as with an A/D conversion module, specify a new
value corresponding to the percentage in decimal format.
Example:
When the set value of the offset or gain is 0 to 2000 and you intend to change it to "50%", input "1000".
3) For data where 16 bits are displayed with "0" or "1" for each bit, specify a new value with changing the data to a decimal.
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
7.5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens
To display the intelligent module monitor screen on the GOT, write special data (intelligent module monitor data) to be
monitored.
For the capacity of the special data to be written to the GOT and the writing procedure, refer to the following.
➠ 7.2.1 System configuration
The intelligent module monitor screen differs depending on the connected module.
This section describes the screen using a typical intelligent module monitor screen.
The screen configuration may differ depending on the intelligent module monitor used.
For the buffer memory address of the module and others, refer to the following.
? User's Manual of the intelligent function module used
• Example) QD73A1 Positioning & Parameter Data Monitor Screen
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
2)
3)
4)
5)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)
25)
26)
27)
10)
11)
12)
7
INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
1)
6)
7)
8)
9)
13)
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens
7 - 29
7.6 Operating I/O Module Monitor Screen
This section describes the operation of the various screens in the intelligent module monitor function, when monitoring
input or output modules.
7.6.1
Specifying the module to be monitored
This section describes how to start monitoring for an input or output module with the intelligent module monitor function.
Operation procedure
Display the System Configuration screen.
Specify the module to be monitored
See Sec. 6.4.1
(Touch the position at which the module is displayed.)
(1)
Display the monitor screen for the specified module.
(2) For information on confirming the displayed contents and
subsequent operation, please see Sec. 6.6.2.
* Tests cannot be conducted on input or output modules.
To Sec. 13.2
7 - 30
From among the modules installed in the corresponding
base unit, specify the module whose "Input" or "Output"
is displayed.
Refer to Section 6.4.1 for the way to specify the intelligent
function module.
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.6 Operating I/O Module Monitor Screen
7.6.2
Monitor screen configuration and key functions
This section describes the configuration of monitor screens displayed by specifying the input module on the system
configuration screen, and explains the functions of keys displayed on the screen.
 Displayed contents (for an input module)
2)
1)
3)
4)
Description
7
1)
Displays the type of object module (input or output module).
2)
Displays keys used for the operations on the monitor screen.
3)
Displays the name of the signal being monitored (X or Y).
4)
Displays the number and status of the I/O signal.
The statuses of input and output signals are displayed after they are read out from the corresponding module.
Displays up to 64 points.(
: ON,
: OFF)
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of keys that are used for the operations on the monitor screen.
Key
Function
Closes the current monitor and returns to the System Configuration screen.
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.6 Operating I/O Module Monitor Screen
7 - 31
INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
Item
7.7 Error Messages and Corrective Action
This section describes the error messages displayed when the intelligent module monitor is executed, and corrective
action.
Error message
Description
Corrective action
Communication channel setup error
There is no channel for communication.
Check that the channel number is correctly set in the
Communication Settings.
Communications error
Communication could not be established
with the PLC CPU.
Check the connection status between the PLC CPU and
the GOT (disconnected or cut cables).
Has an error occurred in the PLC CPU?
Monitor Data Can Not Find
The special data (intelligent module
monitor data) has not been downloaded
to the GOT.
Download the special data (intelligent module monitor
data) to the GOT.
This PLC type is not supported
The intelligent module monitor selected
an unsupported PLC CPU.
7 - 32
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
7.7 Error Messages and Corrective Action
Use the PLC CPU supported by the intelligent module
monitor.
7.2.1 System configuration
8.
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.1 Features
Various monitor functions, changes to the parameter settings and test operations can be performed on the servo
amplifier connected to the GOT.
The features of the servo amplifier monitor are described below.
 Real-time display of the servo amplifier status
8.4.3 Monitor functions, 8.4.4 Alarm function
A list of the status of the servo amplifier connected to the GOT and the alarm details can be displayed in real-time.
(Display examples)
Monitor
Alarm display
• Displays monitor data of the servo amplifier in a list.
• Displays the details (number, name, occurrence time and cause of
alarm) of the alarm currently occurring in the servo amplifier. The alarm
can also be reset.
 Various diagnostics of the servo amplifier can be performed
8.4.5 Diagnostics function
There are multiple diagnostics functions to enable various diagnostics of the servo amplifier to be performed.
(Display examples)
DI/DO display
• Displays a list of the ON/OFF status of the external I/O signals of the servo
amplifier.
Amplifier information display
• Displays the servo amplifier software number and servo motor information
(model name, ID and encoder resolution).
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.1 Features
8-1
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8
 Writing of the servo parameters is enabled
8.4.6 Parameter setting
The servo amplifier parameters can be read, changed and written to the servo amplifier.
 Various test operations can be performed
8.4.7 Test operations
Various test operations can be performed on the connected servo amplifier.
(Display examples)
JOG operation
• The servo amplifier rotates while the Forward or Reverse key is touched.
8-2
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.1 Features
Motor less operation
• Simulates motion of the servo motor within the servo amplifier even when the
servo motor is not connected.
8.2 Specifications
8.2.1
System configuration
This section describes the system configuration of the servo amplifier monitor.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1
 Servo amplifiers targeted for the servo amplifier monitor
Servo amplifier
MELSERVO-J2-Super series
MELSERVO-J2M series
MELSERVO-J3 series*1
MELSERVO-J4 series*2
*1
Only MR-J3- A is supported.
*2
Only MR-J4- A is supported.
 Connection type
This function can be used in the following connection types.
(
Name
Servo
amplifier
monitor
: Unavailable)
Connection type between GOT and servo amplifier
Description
8
Direct connection
Servo amplifier monitor,
changing the servo parameter
settings and test operations
 Required extended system application
The extended system applications shown below are required.
1.2 Required extended system application for the function
(1) Extended system application
Write the package data that has the extended system application for the servo amplifier monitor to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
(2) Extended system application space
To write the extended system application to the GOT, certain space of the user area must be reserved for the
application.
For the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data
using other user areas, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.2 Specifications
8-3
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
Function
: Available,
 List of servo amplifier types that can be monitored and functions
The list of servo amplifier types that can be monitored and their functions is shown below.
(1) MELSERVO-J2-Super series and MELSERVO-J2M series
(
: Monitoring is possible with the servo amplifier monitor
: Monitoring is not possible with the servo amplifier monitor - : Function unavailable)
MELSERVO-J2-Super series
Function
MR-J2S- A
MR-J2S- CP
MELSERVO-J2M series
MR-J2M-P8A
MR-J2M- DU
-
-
Model selection
Baud rate*1
Setup
Station No. Selection*1
Station selection
Axis selection
-
Automatic demo
-
-
Display all
High speed monitor
Monitor
Multi-axis listing
-
-
-
-
Trend graph
I/O Input/Output display
-
-
Display
Alarm
History
Amplifier data
I/O display
Function device
display
-
No motor rotation
-
Total power-on time
Software number
display
Diagnostic
Motor data display
-
Tuning data
-
Amplifier information
Absolute encoder data
-
Automatic voltage
control
-
Axis name setting
Unit composition
listing
-
-
-
-
Parameter list
-
Tuning
-
-
Change list
Parameters
Test
IFU parameter
-
DRU parameter
-
-
Parameter copy
-
-
Device setting
-
-
-
Basic setting
-
-
-
-
Gain/Filter
-
-
-
-
Extension setting
-
-
-
-
I/O setting
-
-
-
-
Jog
-
Positioning
-
Operation w/o motor
-
Forced output
-
Program test
Single-step feed
-
-
-
(Continued to next page)
8-4
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.2 Specifications
(
: Monitoring is possible with the servo amplifier monitor
: Monitoring is not possible with the servo amplifier monitor - : Function unavailable)
MR-J2-Super series
Function
Point-data
Advancedfunction
MR-J2S- A
Point table
MR-J2S- CP
MR-J2M-P8A
MR-J2M- DU
-
-
-
Machine analyzer
-
-
Gain search
-
-
Machine simulation
-
-
-
-
Robust disturbance
compensation
*1
MR-J2M series
-
-
Set the baud rate and station number setting with Communication Settings.
For how to set the connecting device settings, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
(2) MELSERVO-J3 series and MELSERVO-J4 series
: Monitoring is possible with the servo amplifier monitor
: Monitoring is not possible with the servo amplifier monitor - : Function unavailable)
Function
MELSERVO-J3 series
MELSERVO-J4 series
MR-J3- A
MR-J4- A
Model selection
Setup
Station selection
Connection Setting
Display all
Monitor
I/O Monitor*1
Trend graph
8
Display
History
Alarm Onset Data
Drive Recorder
-
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
(
No motor rotation
Diagnostic
System Configuration*2
Life Diagnosis
Machine Diagnosis
Amplifier information
*2
Absolute encoder data
I/O Display*1
Parameter Setting
Parameters
Axis Name Setting
Jog
Positioning
Operation w/o motor
Test
Forced output
Program test
Test Mode Information
One-touch Tuning
-
Tuning
Adjustment
Machine Analyzer
Advanced Gain Search
*1
*2
It is displayed with "DI/DO display screen" in "Diagnostic".
It is displayed with "Amplifier information display screen" in "Diagnostic".
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.2 Specifications
8-5
 Required special data
Download the package data in the servo amplifier monitor data above to the GOT.
The available memory space shown in the table above is required in the user area to download the servo amplifier
monitor to the GOT.
For the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data using
other user areas, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
8.2.2
Access range
The access range is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller.
For details of the access range, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1
8.2.3
Precautions
(1) Before using the servo amplifier monitor
Read the manual of the connected servo amplifier carefully and make sure you understand the contents before
performing servo amplifier monitoring.
(2) Test operation
Be sure to read the precautions listed below before performing a test operation.
8.4.7 Test operations
(3) Time displayed on the servo amplifier monitor
If the time data of the GOT is incorrect, the time on the servo amplifier monitor will not be displayed correctly.
Refer to the following for the GOT clock data.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
(4) Setting details
Use the same settings for the servo amplifier monitor on the GOT (Setup screen (
amplifier.
If the settings are different, proper communications may not be performed.
8.4.2)) and the servo
(5) Servo amplifier monitored
One servo amplifier can be selected to be monitored among 32 servo amplifiers.
If multiple servo amplifiers are connected, select one servo amplifier to monitor.
(6) Background processing during parameter being input or output
Do not monitor the device of the servo amplifier parameter by the function which is operated background (such
as device data transfer, logging, recipe, advanced recipe) while parameters are being input or output. Data may
not be written or read normally or a communication error may occur.
8-6
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.2 Specifications
8.3 Operations of Display
This section describes the flow until the servo amplifier monitor operation screen is displayed after the servo amplifier
monitor (Option OS) is installed in the GOT.
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT.
Starting from the utility
Starting from the special
function switch
(Servo Amplifier Monitor)
set in the project data
Touch the special function switch.
Display the utility.
After the utility is displayed,
touch [Monitor]
[Servo amplifier monitor]
from the Main Menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the User's Manual
for the GOT used.
Refer to the following manual for how to set the special
function switch.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
Set the channel number.
8
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
Set the channel number of the servo
amplifier connected to the GOT.
Communication setting window
Set the setup.
Set the model type etc. of the servo
amplifier to be monitored.
Continued to next page
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.3 Operations of Display
8-7
From previous page
Select a function to monitor.
Select the servo amplifier monitor to use.
End
POINT
(1) How to display the utility
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
(2) Displaying communication setting window
After turning on the GOT, the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the servo
amplifier monitor only.
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch the Ch:
the servo amplifier monitor screen.
(
button on
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens)
(3) If the project data has not been downloaded
The servo amplifier monitor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to
the GOT.
8-8
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.3 Operations of Display
 Changing screens
The following describes how to change the screen.
Start
At the second
or later startup
Utility
or
user-created
monitor screen
At the first startup
Communication setting window
End
Touch
Ch: .
Setup
8
Setup
Fix
End
Touch any of the functions.
Menu
Setup
(
Section 8.4.2)
Monitor
(
Section 8.4.3)
Alarm
(
Section 8.4.4)
Diagnostics
(
Section 8.4.5)
Parameters
(
Section 8.4.6)
Test
(
Section 8.4.7)
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
MENU
HINT
To exit by touching End
At next startup of the servo amplifier monitor, the last exited screen is displayed.
If using the same screen frequently, exiting with the End button is convenient.
However, the last exited screen is not displayed if the servo amplifier monitor screen data was deleted due to an
installation of package data, turning the GOT power from off to on, or a reset.
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.3 Operations of Display
8-9
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
This section describes the operations of the screens when using the servo amplifier monitor.
The display screen of the servo amplifier monitor varies slightly with the GOT used.
8.4.1
Servo amplifier monitor
With the servo amplifier monitor, various monitor functions, parameter setting changes and test operations can be
performed on the servo amplifier connected to the GOT.
To display a function, make a selection on the function selection menu screen.
(Function selection menu screen)
1)Setup . . . . . . . . . . Selects the servo amplifier type to monitor, the station number setting (station number selection), and the IFU station number.
(
8.4.2)
2)Monitor . . . . . . . . . Displays all monitor data of the servo amplifier in real-time.
(
8.4.3)
3)Alarm . . . . . . . . . . Displays the alarm that is currently occurring and the history. Also resets the alarm and clears the history.
(
8.4.4)
4)Diagnostics . . . . . . Performs the following various diagnostics on the connected servo amplifier.
(
8.4.5)
• DI/DO display
• Function device display
• Amplifier information display
:
:
:
• ABS data display
• Unit composition list display
:
:
Displays the ON/OFF status of the external I/O signals.
Displays the ON/OFF status of the I/O function devices.
Displays the model name, ID and encoder resolution of the servo motor connected to the
servo amplifier.
Displays the absolute position data of the absolute position detection system.
Displays a list of servo amplifier unit composition.
5)Parameters . . . . . . Displays the parameter data and changes the parameter settings.
(
8.4.6)
6)Test . . . . . . . . . . . . Performs various test operations (JOG operation, positioning operation, motor-less operation and DO forced output).
(
8 - 10
8.4.7)
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8.4.2
Setup
This is used to set the communication with the servo amplifier.
POINT
(1) Before making the settings on the setup screen, also make the same settings on the servo amplifier
side.
If the settings on this screen and the settings on the servo amplifier do not match, proper communications
may not be performed.
(2) The settings on the setup screen return to the initial state when the GOT is turned off or reset.
After turning on the power to the GOT, perform the settings on the setup screen again.
 Setup screen
This section describes the display data of the setup screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
2)
3)
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8
* [Axis number] and [Capacity setting] cannot be set.
No.
Item
Description
1)
Model
Displays the model of the servo amplifier to be connected.
2)
Station
Displays the station number (00 to 31) of the servo amplifier to communicate with.
3)
IFU Station
Displays the serial communication station number of the IFU (interface unit).
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8 - 11
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the setup screen.
Key
Function
Sets the model of the servo amplifier to be connected.
Sets the station number (00 to 31) of the servo amplifier to communicate with.
*1
Sets the serial communication station number of the IFU (interface unit).
Sets the setup details and returns to the function selection menu screen.
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
Displays the communication setting window.
*1
8 - 12
This is valid only when MR-J2M-P8A is connected.
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8.4.3
Monitor functions
Displays all monitor data of the servo amplifier in real-time.
 Monitor screen
The following describes the display data of the monitor screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
(1)
Displayed contents
1)
2)
3)
10)
11)
12)
4)
5)
6)
13)
14)
15)
7)
8)
9)
Item
Description
1)
Cumulative feedback pulses
Counts the feedback pulses from the servo motor encoder and displays the result.
• When the set value exceeds "9999999", counting begins from "0".
• During reverse rotation, the – sign is added.
2)
Servo motor speed
Displays the speed of the servo motor.
• The value is displayed with the 0.1r/min unit rounded off.
• During reverse rotation, the – sign is added.
3)
Droop pulses
Displays the droop pulses of the deviation counter.
• During reverse rotation, the – sign is added.
4)
Cumulative command pulses
Counts the position command input pulses and displays the result.
• Since the value before multiplication of the electrical gear (CMX/CDV) is displayed, it may not match the
cumulative feedback pulse display.
• During reverse rotation command, the – sign is added.
5)
Command pulse frequency
Displays the frequency of the position command input pulse.
• The value before multiplication of the electrical gear (CMX/CDV) is displayed.
• During reverse rotation command, the – sign is added.
Analog speed command
voltage (during speed control
6)
Displays the input voltage of the analog speed command (VC).
mode)*1
Analog speed limit voltage
(during torque control mode)*1
Analog torque command
voltage (during position/speed
7)
8
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
No.
Displays the input voltage of the analog speed limit (VLA).
Displays the voltage of the analog torque limit (TLA).
control mode)*1
Analog torque limit voltage
(during torque control mode)*1
Displays the voltage of the analog torque limit (TC).
(Continued to next page)
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8 - 13
No.
Item
Description
8)
Regenerative load ratio
Displays the ratio of the regenerative power to the permissible regenerative power in %.
• The permissible regenerative power differs depending on the presence/absence of the regenerative brake option.
Set parameter No. 0 correctly according to the regenerative brake option. (Set to 80% or lower as a guide.)
9)
Effective load ratio
Displays the continuous effective load torque.
• The effective value is displayed on the assumption that the rated torque is 100%.
10)
Peak load ratio
Displays the maximum torque generated.
• The maximum value for the past 15 seconds is displayed on the assumption that the rated torque is 100%.
11)
Instantaneous torque
Displays the instantaneous torque.
• The value of the generated torque is displayed in real time on the assumption that the rated torque is 100%.
12)
Within one-revolution position
Displays the within one-revolution position in the servo motor in pulse units of the encoder.
• When the value exceeds the maximum pulse count, it returns to 0.
13)
ABS counter
Displays the distance from the home position (0) in the absolute position detection system as the multi-revolution
counter value of the absolute position encoder.
14)
Load inertia moment ratio
Displays the estimated ratio of the servo motor shaft-equivalent load inertia moment to the servo motor's inertia
moment.
15)
Bus voltage
Displays the voltage (between P and N) of the main circuit converter.
*1:
This is displayed only when the MR-J2S-
A is connected.
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the monitor screen.
Key
Function
Clears the values of [Cumulative feedback pulses] and [Cumulative command pulses] to 0.
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
6.4.12 Hard copy output
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
8 - 14
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8.4.4
Alarm function
The following alarms are displayed.
• Alarm display : Displays the alarm that is currently occurring. (
• Alarm history : Displays the history of alarms that occurred. (
Alarm display screen)
Alarm history screen)
The screen changes as follows after Alarm is selected on the function selection menu screen.
Function selection menu screen
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8
Alarm display screen
Alarm history screen
POINT
If the alarm display screen data has not been downloaded to the GOT, the message "Monitor data not found" is
displayed and the subsequent screens are not displayed.
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8 - 15
 Alarm display screen
The following describes the display data of the alarm display screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
2)
3)
No.
Item
Description
1)
Alarm Number
Displays the number of the alarm that occurred.
2)
Alarm Name
Displays the name of the alarm that occurred.
Time of Alarm
Displays the date and time when the alarm occurred.
• The alarm occurrence time is displayed on the basis of the clock data of the GOT.
• If there is an error in the servo amplifier before it is connected to the GOT, an alarm is displayed when the servo
amplifier is connected to the GOT.
In this case, the time when the servo amplifier is connected to the GOT is displayed as the alarm occurrence time.
3)
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for operations of the alarm display screen.
Key
Function
Resets the alarm.
• The reset alarm is stored as the latest alarm.
Changes to the alarm history screen (
Alarm history screen).
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
8.4.8 Hard copy output
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
8 - 16
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
 Alarm history screen
The following describes the display data of the alarm history screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
No.
2)
3)
4)
Item
5)
Description
1)
Seq No.
Displays the alarm history, starting from the latest alarm, in order.
• Later alarms have smaller Seq Nos. (0 indicates the latest alarm)
• Up to six alarms can be displayed in the alarm history.
2)
Alarm No.
Displays the number of the alarm that occurred.
3)
Alarm Name
Displays the name of the alarm that occurred.
4)
Time (hour)
Displays the energization time of the servo amplifier until alarm occurrence on the assumption that the time at factory
shipment is "0".
5)
Detail (hex)
Displays the code for detailed alarm information.
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for operations of the alarm history screen.
Key
Function
Clears the alarm history stored in the servo amplifier.
Changes to the Alarm Display screen (
Alarm display screen).
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
8.4.8 Hard copy output
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8 - 17
8.4.5
Diagnostics function
This function performs the following various diagnostics on the connected servo amplifier.
• DI/DO display
: Displays the ON/OFF status of the external I/O signals.
• Function device
display
(
DI/DO display screen)
: Displays the ON/OFF status of the I/O function devices.
(
Function device display screen)
• Amplifier information : Displays the model name, ID and encoder resolution of the servo motorconnected to the servo
display
amplifier.
• ABS data display
• Unit composition list
display
8 - 18
(
Amplifier information display screen)
: Displays the absolute position data of the absolute position detection system.
(
ABS data display screen)
: Displays a list of servo amplifier unit compositions.
(
Unit composition list display screen)
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
(1) Changing screens
The screen changes as follows after Diagnostics is selected on the function selection menu screen.
Depending on the model of the connected servo amplifier, some screens may not be displayed.
Refer to the following for the screens that cannot be displayed.
8.2.1 List of servo amplifier types that can be monitored and functions
Function selection menu screen
[MR-J2M-
DU monitor]
DI/DO display screen
Function device display screen
Amplifier information display screen
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8
Unit composition list screen
ABS data display screen
POINT
If the DI/DO display screen data or function device display screen data (only when monitoring the MR-J2M- DU)
has not been downloaded to the GOT, “Monitor data not found” is displayed and the subsequent screens are not
displayed.
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8 - 19
 DI/DO display screen
The following describes the display data of the DI/DO display screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
No.
1)
Item
Description
Input/Output Signal
Displays whether the DI/DO signal is ON (lit) or OFF (not lit).
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the DI/DO display screen.
Key
Function
*1
Displays the DI/DO signal of the extension IO unit.
Function device display screen).
Changes to the function device screen (
Changes to the amplifier information screen (
Amplifier information display screen).
Changes to the unit composition list screen (
Unit composition list display screen).
Changes to the ABS data screen (
ABS data display screen).
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
8.4.8 Hard copy output
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
*1
8 - 20
This is valid only when MR-J2M-P8A is connected.
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
 Function device display screen
The following describes the display data of the function device display screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
1)
[When MR-J2S-
1)
Item
Input/Output Function
Description
Displays the ON (
) or OFF (
) status for each I/O signal.
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the function device display
screen.
Key
8
Function
DI/DO display screen).
Changes to the DI/DO display screen (
Changes to the ABS data screen (
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
No.
CP is monitored]
ABS data display screen).
Changes to the amplifier information screen (
Amplifier information display screen).
Changes to the unit composition list screen (
Unit composition list display screen).
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
8.4.8 Hard copy output
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8 - 21
 Amplifier information display screen
The following describes the display data of the amplifier information display screen and the key functions displayed
on the screen.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
No.
Item
Description
*1
Displays the model name of the servo amplifier.
Servo amplifier model.
Amplifier Firmware Version
*1
1)
Displays the software number of the servo amplifier connected to the GOT.
Accumulated power-on time
Displays the cumulative time of the control power-on after the product was shipped from the factory.
Num. of inrush cur. sw. time*1
Displays the number of times the rush relay has been turned on/off after the product was shipped from the factory.
Optional card model*1
Displays the model name of the option card installed in the servo amplifier.
If no option card is installed, then "No connection" is displayed.
Motor model*2
Displays the model name of the servo motor connected to the servo amplifier.
Motor
ID*2
Displays the ID of the servo motor connected to the servo amplifier.
*2
Displays the encoder resolution of the servo motor connected to the servo amplifier.
Encoder resolution
*1
This is displayed only for MR-J3- A or MR-J4- A.
*2
This is not displayed when monitoring the MR-J2M-P8A.
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the amplifier information
display screen.
Key
Function
DI/DO display screen).
Changes to the DI/DO display screen (
Function device display screen).
Changes to the function device screen (
Changes to the ABS data screen (
ABS data display screen).
Changes to the unit composition list screen (
Unit composition list display screen).
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
8.4.8 Hard copy output
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
8 - 22
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
 ABS data display screen
The following describes the display data of the ABS data display screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
2)
1)
2)
Item
Description
Absolute position data
Displays the absolute position data in the absolute position detection system with the following items.
• Motor edge pulse value
• Command pulse value
Encoder data
Displays the encoder data with the following items.
Current position
• Absolute encoder data
• CYC (Motor edge pulse value)
• CYC (Command pulse value)
• Number of motor rotations ABS
Position at power loss
• Absolute encoder data
• CYC0 (Motor edge pulse value)
• CYC0 (Command pulse value)
• Number of motor rotations ABS0
8
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the ABS data display screen.
Key
Function
Changes to the DI/DO display screen (
DI/DO display screen).
Changes to the function device screen (
Function device display screen).
Changes to the unit composition list screen (
Unit composition list display screen).
Changes to the amplifier information screen (
Amplifier information display screen).
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
8.4.8 Hard copy output
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8 - 23
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
No.
 Unit composition list display screen
The following describes the display data of the unit composition list screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
No.
2)
3)
4)
Item
5)
Description
1)
Type name
Displays the model name of the drive unit (DRU), interface unit (IFU) and option unit installed in each slot.
2)
AxNo.
Displays the axis number of the drive unit (DRU) and interface unit (IFU).
3)
State
Displays status of the drive unit (DRU) and interface unit (IFU) and the alarm/warning number.
4)
Motor model
Displays the model name of the motor connected to the drive unit (DRU).
5)
S/W version
Displays the software number of the drive unit (DRU) and interface unit (IFU).
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the unit composition list
screen.
Key
Function
DI/DO display screen).
Changes to the DI/DO display screen (
Changes to the ABS data screen (
ABS data display screen).
Changes to the amplifier information screen (
Changes to the function device screen (
Amplifier information display screen).
Function device display screen).
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
8.4.8 Hard copy output
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
8 - 24
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8.4.6
Parameter setting
You can use the parameter setting function to set the servo parameters (basic parameters/expansion parameter 1, 2) of
the connected servo amplifier.
The password input key window appears for accessing the parameter setting screen of the servo amplifier monitor when
the password is set with GT Designer3.
The screen changes as follows after Parameters is selected on the function selection menu screen.
Function selection menu screen (
Section 9.4.2)
Have you registered
the servo amplifier parameter
changing password?
*1
* 1 Set the servo parameter changing
password on GT Designer3.
For details of the parameter setting,
refer to the GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help.
No
Yes
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8
Password input key window
Enter the parameter changing password.
...
This
section 1
Parameter setting screen
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8 - 25
 Password input operation procedure
The following describes the procedure for inputting the password for changing the servo parameters.
(1) Functions
• If the input password matches, the parameter setting screen is displayed.
• If the input password does not match, an error message is displayed.
Touching
returns to the function selection menu screen.
• Numerical numbers and letters A to F can be used for a password.
(2) Operations
(a) Inputting the password
Touch 0 to 9 and A to F to input the password.
After inputting the password, touch Enter to set the password.
To edit the input characters, touch Del to delete the characters, and then input the new characters.
(b) Canceling password input
Touch
8 - 26
to return to the monitor screen.
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
 Parameter setting screen
The following describes the display data of the parameter setting screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
POINT
Parameters with an asterisk (*) preceding the name become valid after the parameters are set and the power of the
servo amplifier is turned off and then on again.
(1) Display screen
1)
2)
3)
4)
8
Item
Description
1)
Pr.
Displays the parameter number.
2)
Name
Displays the parameter name.
3)
Value
Displays the present set value of the parameter.
4)
Unit
Displays the setting unit for each parameter.
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used with the operations on the parameter setting
screen.
Key
Function
Selects the servo parameter setting item.
Displays the parameter items with scrolling a page up/down.
Changes the servo parameter settings read to the GOT internal memory.
Writes the servo parameter settings of the selected items to the servo amplifier.
Matches all parameter values presently displayed on the GOT with the servo amplifier parameter values.
Writes all parameter values presently displayed on the GOT to the parameters of the servo amplifier.
Reads all parameter values from the servo amplifier to the GOT and displays those values.
Returns all parameter values to their initial values.
(Continued to next page)
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8 - 27
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
No.
Key
Function
Switches between the parameter display for the drive unit (DRU) and interface unit (IFU) each time this is touched.
*1
*1
Selects the slot number of the drive unit (DRU).
*2
Changes the gain filter parameter.
Changes the extension setting parameter.
*2
*3
Changes the extension setting 2 parameter.
*3
Changes the extension setting 3 parameter.
*2
Changes the I/O setting parameter.
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
8.4.8 Hard copy output
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
*1:
This is displayed only when MR-J2M-P8A is connected.
*2:
This is displayed only when MR-J3- A or MR-J4- A is connected.
*3:
This is displayed only when MR-J4- A is connected.
POINT
Operations of when default is executed for the MR-J3- A parameters
The operation when default is executed differs depending on the displayed parameter screen, as shown in (1)
and (2) below.
(1) Basic setting, gain/filter or extension setting parameter screen
The 000BH processing (reference/writing is possible only for basic setting, gain/filter and extension setting
parameter) is performed.
(2) I/O setting parameter screen
The 000CH processing (reference/writing is possible for all parameters) is performed.
8 - 28
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
 Parameter setting operation
The following describes the procedure of changing the setting of the "Auto tuning" item as an example of the
parameter setting operation.
1.
Touch the Read All key.
The parameter values within the servo amplifier are
displayed on the screen.
2.
The parameter read confirmation window is
displayed.
Touch the OK key to read the parameter values
within the servo amplifier to the GOT.
3.
The read parameter values within the servo
amplifier are displayed on the screen.
Parameters that cannot be written or read are not
displayed on the parameter setting screen.
4.
Select the item whose parameter is to be set with
the
key, and touch the Change key.
or
(To next page)
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8 - 29
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8
(From previous page)
Parameter name
[setting field]
(Setting
range)
5.
6.
7.
As the parameter setting window appears, enter the
parameter setting with alphanumeric keys, and
touch Enter to confirm the setting.
To cancel the parameter setting operation, touch
to close the parameter setting window.
The parameter setting is changed on the parameter
setting screen. Select the changed parameter item,
and touch the Write key.
If there are multiple parameter items with changed
settings, touch the Write All key to write all
parameter items with changed settings.
A confirmation window appears.
Touch the OK key to write the parameter
setting(s) to the servo amplifier.
To cancel writing of the parameter setting(s), touch
Cancel key.
This completes the writing operation of the
parameter setting.
POINT
(1) The changes to the parameter setting are written to the E2PROM of the servo amplifier.
Consequently, the written parameter setting is retained even if the power of the amplifier is off.
(2) If the following parameter settings are changed on the servo amplifier, be sure to also change the
settings on the GOT setup screen (
8.4.2) in the same way.
If the settings on the setup screen and the servo amplifier do not match, normal communications with the
servo amplifier may not be performed.
• Station number setting
8 - 30
• IFU station number setting
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8.4.7
Test operations
This function performs the following test operations on the connected servo amplifier.
• JOG operation
: The servo motor rotates while the Forward or Reverse key is touched.
(
JOG operation screen)
• Positioning operation : This operation starts when the Forward or Reverse key is touched, and the servo motor
rotates by the preset distance.
(
Positioning operation screen)
• Motor-less operation : Simulates the motion of the servo motor within the servo amplifier even when the servo motor
is not connected.
(
Motor-less operation screen)
: Forcibly turns the output signals ON/OFF regardless of the output conditions of the servo
amplifier output signals.
(
)
8
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
• DO forced output
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8 - 31
(1) Changing screens
The screen changes as follows after Test is selected on the function selection menu screen.
Depending on the model of the connected servo amplifier, some screens may not be displayed.
Refer to the following for the screens that cannot be displayed.
8.2.1 List of servo amplifier types that can be monitored and functions
Function selection menu screen
*1
JOG operation screen
*2
*1
Positioning operation screen
*1
Motorless operation screen
DO forced output screen
*1 Not displayed for MR-J2M-P8A monitor
*2 Not displayed for MR-J2M- DU monitor
POINT
If the JOG operation screen data has not been downloaded to the GOT, "Monitor data not found" is displayed and
the subsequent screens are not displayed.
8 - 32
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
 Precautions for test operations
The following describes the precautions when performing a test operation of the servo amplifier monitor.
WARNING
• Do not operate the servo amplifier switches with wet hands. Doing so can cause an electric shock.
• Do not perform operations with the front cover of the servo amplifier removed. Doing so can cause an electric shock
since the high-voltage terminals and live parts are exposed.
• Do not open the front cover of the servo amplifier when the power is on or during operation. Doing so can cause an
electric shock.
CAUTION
• Be sure to read the precautions for test operation in the manuals of the servo amplifier before performing a test
operation.
• Check parameters of the servo amplifier before starting operation. Unexpected operations may occur depending on
the machine.
• The heat sink, regenerative brake resistor, servo motor and other parts of the servo amplifier may be hot while the
power is on or for a period after the power is turned off; therefore, do not touch or bring parts (cables etc.) close to
them. Doing so can cause fire or damage to the parts.
(1) Servo on
For test operation of JOG operation/positioning operation, the SON digital input signal of the servo amplifier is
turned on automatically in the servo amplifier to start operation, regardless of the ON/OFF status of the SON
signal of the digital I/O signal of the servo amplifier.
In addition, the servo amplifier does not accept any external command pulses and input signals (excluding
emergency stop) until the test operation screen is exited.
8
(2) Stop
POINT
To perform an emergency stop, turn off the emergency stop signal of the servo amplifier or turn off the input power.
(a) Use the following procedure to stop test operation from the servo amplifier monitor.
• JOG operation: Release the Forward or Reverse key.
• Positioning operation: Touch the
Pause
key.
(b) The servo motor stops if any of the following states occurs during test operation.
• The communication cable is disconnected.
• The screen is switched to another servo amplifier monitor screen or the servo amplifier monitor is exited.
However, during motor-less operation, the test mode is not canceled until the servo amplifier is powered
off.
 Preparations for test operations
When performing test operations, it is necessary to make the test operation settings on the connected servo
amplifier.
Refer to the manual of the connected servo amplifier for details of making settings on the servo amplifier to perform
test operations.
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8 - 33
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
The SON automatically turns on when touching the Forward or Reverse key on the JOG operation screen
or positioning operation screen of the servo amplifier monitor.
 JOG operation screen
This section describes the display data of the JOG operation screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
2)
3)
No.
1)
Item
Description
Motor speed
Displays the set speed of the servo motor.
2)
Acc/dec time
Displays the set acceleration/deceleration time constant.
3)
Momentary Switch Operation
Displays how to operate the JOG operation.
(2) Operation
(a) When selecting Momentary Switch Operation: Selecting Momentary
• Start operation
Touch the Forward or Reverse key.
• Stop operation
Release the Forward or Reverse key.
(b) When selecting Momentary Switch Operation: Not Selecting Momentary
• Start operation
Touch the Forward or Reverse key.
• Stop operation
Touch the
8 - 34
Pause
key.
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
(3) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the JOG operation screen.
Key
Function
Runs the servo motor in the forward rotation (CCW) direction.
Runs the servo motor in the reverse rotation (CW) direction.
Changes the speed of the servo motor.
Changes the acceleration/deceleration time constant.
Touching this changes the operation mode (momentary operation/no momentary operation).
Momentary Switch Operation: Selecting Momentary
The servo motor rotates while the Forward or Reverse key is touched. (Releasing your finger from these keys
stops the operation.)
Momentary Switch Operation: Not Selecting Momentary
The servo motor rotates while the Forward or Reverse key is touched, stops when the
touched.
Changes to the positioning operation screen (
Positioning operation screen).
Changes to the motor-less operation screen (
Motor-less operation screen).
Changes to the DO forced output screen (
Pause
key is
).
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
8
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
8.4.8 Hard copy output
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8 - 35
 Positioning operation screen
The following describes the display data of the positioning operation screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
2)
3)
No.
1)
Item
Description
Motor speed
Displays the set speed of the servo motor.
2)
Acc/dec time
Displays the set acceleration/deceleration time constant.
3)
Move distance
Displays the set distance.
(2) Operation
(a) MELSERVO-J2-Super series and MELSERVO-J2 series
• Start operation
Touch the Forward or Reverse key.
To resume operation that has been paused, touch the Forward key to resume forward rotation or the
Reverse key to resume reverse rotation.
• Stop operation
When the set distance has been reached, operation stops.
Touching the
If touch the
Pause
Pause
key pauses the operation.
key again after the operation is paused, the remaining distance is erased.
(b) MR-J3- A and MR-J4- A
• Start operation
Touch the Forward or Reverse key.
To resume the operation that has been paused, touch the Restart key to resume the rotation.
• Stop operation
When the set distance has been reached, operation stops.
Touching the Pause key pauses the operation. If touch the
paused, the remaining distance is erased.
8 - 36
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
Clear
key again after the operation is
(3) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the positioning operation
screen.
Key
Function
Runs the servo motor in the forward rotation (CCW) direction.
Runs the servo motor in the reverse rotation (CW) direction.
*1
Stops the rotation of the servo motor temporarily.
*2
Resumes the rotation of the paused servo motor.
*2
Deletes the remaining distance of the paused servo motor.
Changes the rotation speed of the servo motor.
Changes the acceleration/deceleration time constant.
Changes the distance.
Changes to the JOG operation screen (
JOG operation screen).
Motor-less operation screen).
Changes to the motor-less operation screen (
Changes to the DO forced output screen (
).
8
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
8.4.8 Hard copy output
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
*1:
This is displayed only when MELSERVO-J2-Super series or MELSERVO-J2M series is connected.
*2:
This is displayed only when MR-J3- A series or MR-J4- A is connected.
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8 - 37
 Motor-less operation screen
The following describes the display data of the motor-less operation screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
POINT
Start and end of the motor-less operation with MR-J4- A.
Changing the parameter PC60 (*COPD) starts and ends the motor-less operation.
PC60 (*COPD) can be changed by [Ext. setting] in the parameter setting screen.
Parameter setting screen
• Start: After setting PC60 (*COPD) to 1, turn on the servo amplifier again.
• End: After setting PC60 (*COPD) to 0, turn on the servo amplifier again.
(1) Displayed contents
(2) Operation
• Start operation
Touch the Start key.
• Stop operation
To cancel the motor-less operation, turn the power of the servo amplifier off.
(3) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the motor-less operation
screen.
Key
Function
Starts motor-less operation.
Changes to the JOG operation screen (
Changes to the positioning operation screen (
Changes to the DO forced output screen (
JOG operation screen).
Positioning operation screen).
DO forced output screen).
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
8.4.8 Hard copy output
(Continued to next page)
8 - 38
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
Key
Function
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
 DO forced output screen
The following describes the display data of the DO forced output screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
Item
8
Description
ON/OFF status of output
signals
Displays the ON/OFF status of the servo amplifier output signals.
• After this screen has been switched to another screen, all external I/O signals are turned off.
(2) Operation
When the name of an output signal is touched, the ON/OFF status of that signal is inverted and written to the
servo amplifier.
(3) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys used for the operations of the DO forced output screen.
Key
Function
(Output signal name)
*1
Touching the signal name of an output signal sets or resets the status for that signal.
• If the present output signal is ON, then the signal is turned off (RESET).
• If it is OFF, then it is turned on (SET).
Displays the external output signals of the extension I/O unit.
Changes to the JOG operation screen (
JOG operation screen).
Changes to the positioning operation screen (
Positioning operation screen).
Changes to the motor-less operation screen (
Motor-less operation screen).
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
Stores the displayed screen to the m5emory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
8.4.8 Hard copy output
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
*1:
This is displayed only when the MR-J2M-P8A is connected.
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8 - 39
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
No.
8.4.8
Hard copy output
This section describes how to store a screen to the SD card in BMP/JPEG file format it with a printer when executing the
amplifier monitor.
Hard copy output operations are performed by touching the "Print Screen" or "Cancel Print" key displayed on the screen.
Touch
[Print Screen].
BMP/JPEG file will be stored in the memory card
installed in the GOT.
The servo amplifier monitor screen will be
printed with the printer connected to the GOT.
POINT
The output target of hard copy can be set in [Hard Copy] of GT Designer3.
For details of hard copy setting, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
8 - 40
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
8.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action
This section describes the error messages that may be displayed during servo amplifier monitor operation and their
corrective action.
Error message
Error definition
Corrective action
Monitor data not found
The monitor data have not installed or
have been deleted.
Download the monitor data of the servo amplifier
monitor.
It is not possible to set.
An item that cannot be set was
selected.
Select an item that can be set.
• Check the connection state between the servo
amplifier and the GOT (connector disconnection,
cable wire break).
• Check if an error has occurred in the servo amplifier.
• Set the same values to the setup screen on the
servo amplifier monitor and the parameter setting on
the servo amplifier.
No AMP Communications
Communication can not be established
with the servo amplifier set as the
monitor destination.
This test mode cannot be selected. Operation
without Motor rotation.
Another test operation function has
started.
Exit the other test operation function.
SON
Make sure that operation is at a stop.
The servo amplifier SON signal is ON.
Turn off the servo amplifier SON signal.
Incorrect setting range
A value outside the setting range was
set when setting the servo parameter of
the servo amplifier.
Set the servo parameter of the servo amplifier within
the setting range.
Servo alarm has occurred. Alarm:**
An alarm occurred on the connected
servo amplifier.
Reset the alarm on the servo amplifier.
Unit not found
The drive unit is not installed in the
selected slot.
Select the slot where the drive unit is installed.
Unmatched password
The password that was input as the
password for changing the servo
amplifier parameter is incorrect.
Input the correct password.
Can't write to servo amp. Normally.
Failed to write the parameter.
Check the write data.
Check the setup information.
Please confirm forward or reversal stroke end
(LSP or LSN)
The servo amplifier LSP/LSN signal is
OFF.
Turn on the servo amplifier LSP/LSN signal.
Communication channel setup error
The channel No. setting or
communication driver setting is
incorrect.
Check the communication settings.
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8
• MR-J2M-P8A, MR-J3- A, or MRJ4- A was selected with the station
It is not possible to select.
No. selection setting set to [No].
• A channel with no station number
was selected for the MR-J2M-P8A.
• Set the station No. selection setting to [Yes].
• Select a channel with a station number.
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action
8 - 41
8 - 42
8. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
8.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action
9.
BACKUP/RESTORE
9.1 Features
Setting data, including a sequence program, parameters, and setting values, for a controller connected to the GOT can
be saved (backed up) in a memory card or USB memory in the GOT.
The following shows features of the backup/restore function.
GOT backup
The backup/restore function is applicable to controllers connected to the GOT.
For backing up the GOT setting data, use the GOT data package acquisition function.
For the GOT data package acquisition function, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
 Backing up or restoring system without personal computer for reducing downtime
Setting data for a controller connected to the GOT can be backed up, and the data can be restored to the controller.
With backing up setting data for a controller, the data can be restored to the controller with the GOT connected to the
controller even though the controller has to be replaced because of problems, including failures. As a result, the
system can be easily restored.
Backing up setting data to a data strage
Data strage
Restore the backup data
to the controller.
 Enabling creating the same system without personal computer
With restoring the backed up setting data to controllers in other systems, the same system can be created without a
personal computer.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.1 Features
9-1
BACKUP/RESTORE
HINT
9
 Improving security
When the backup/restore function is used, browsing and changing setting data is limited with a password and the
security is improved.
Password authentication
Data strage
Password authentication
 Automatically backing up data with trigger
By setting the trigger device or the days and time, the GOT can automatically back up setting data for controllers.
By controlling the backup with the set trigger device, the GOT can automatically back up setting data for controllers
after the data are changed.
By setting the days and time, the GOT can back up setting data for controllers periodically.
Setting GOT to back up data at 17:30 on Tuesdays
Trigger device: X100
X100:
OFF ON
Backing up
setting data to
a data strage
Backing up
setting data to
a data strage
Tuesday
17:30
X100: ON
Detected
 Batch backup/restoration can be performed to multiple controllers on the network
Batch backup/restoration can be performed to multiple controllers on the network per channel.
Target controllers for the backup/restoration can be specified per station.
9.3.4 Network batch backup/restore
Batch backup/restoration for
controllers on the network
NW No. : 1
Station No. : 3
NW No. : 1
Station No. : 2
Ethernet
NW No. : 1
Station No. : 1
9-2
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.1 Features
9.2 Specifications
9.2.1
System configuration
This section describes the system configuration for the backup/restore function.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1
 Target controller
Controller*1
QCPU(Q mode)*2*3*4
LCPU
Motion controller CPU(Q Series)*5*6
*1
When executing the network batch backup/restoration, use controllers compatible with the Ethernet connection.
For the controllers compatible with Ethernet connection, refer to the following.
*2
*3
*4
*5
Excluding the Q12PRHCPU, Q25PHCPU.
Use a PLC CPU with the function version of B or later.
The backup/restore function cannot be used with the redundant CPU.
Use the following production number motion controller CPU when using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU.
• For bus connection and direct CPU connection
Q172CPU: Production number K******* or later
Q173CPU: Production number J******* or later
• For connections other than bus connection and direct CPU connection
Q172CPU: Production number N******* or later
Q173CPU: Production number M******* or later
The operation system software of SV13 and SV22 are available only.
Use a motion controller CPU with the following OS installed when using the Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, or Q173CPUN.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1
*6
*7
• SW6RN-SV13Q :00H or later
(00E or later for using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU with the bus connection or direct CPU connection)
• SW6RN-SV22Q :00H or later
(00E or later for using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU with the bus connection or direct CPU connection)
To restore the backup data containing a special parameter, use the following version of CPU.
• FX3U(C) version: 3.10 or later
• FX3G(C) version: 2.00 or later
 Connection type
This function can be used in the following connection types.
(
Function
Name
Description
Backup/restore
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Backs up setting data for a controller
connected to the GOT and restores the
data to the controller.
: Applicable,
: Partly restricted,
: Inapplicable)
Connection type between GOT and controller
Bus connection
Direct CPU
Computer link
Ethernet
*1
connection
connection
connection
*4
*2
*5
*3*5
The LCPU does not support the connection type.
When the GOT is connected to LCPU, use L6ADP-R2.
Backup/Restore cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.
When the multiple CPU system is used, the restoration cannot be performed to a QCPU with the factory-settings or whose
memory is formatted.
The restoration cannot be performed to a QCPU with the factory-settings or whose memory is formatted.
 Required hardware
The backup / restore, data storage is required.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.2 Specifications
9-3
BACKUP/RESTORE
FXCPU*7
9
 Required extended system application
The extended system applications shown below are required.
1.2 Required extended system application for the function
(1) Extended system application
Write the package data that has the extended system application for the backup/restore to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
(2) Exteded system application space
To write the extended system application to the GOT, certain space of the user area must be reserved for the
application.
For the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data
using other user areas, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
 Data to be backed up and restored
The following shows data to be backed up and restored.
Data other than the the following data cannot be backed up and restored.
(1) Basic model QCPU
Item
File name
Parameter
Parameter for operating a programmable controller
PARAM.QPA
Intelligent function module
parameter
Parameter for intelligent function modules
IPARAM.QPA
Sequence program
Program that the CPU operates
MAIN.QPG
SFC program
Sequence program with the SFC programming format
MAIN-SFC.QPG
File register
Data stored in file registers
MAIN.QDR
Device comment
Device comment to be stored in a programmable controller
MAIN.QCD
Device initial value
Setting the device initial value
MAIN.QDI
*1
9-4
Description
The file register in the Flash card installed in the CPU is always restored without confirming saving.
Select whether restoring or not the file register stored in the SRAM card or standard RAM in the dialog box displayed when
restoration is executed.
When the file register is not restored, the existing file register is deleted.
Therefore, programs of the controller may not work normally.
If a problem occurs in the operation of the controller after restoration, perform the restoration again, including to the file register.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.2 Specifications
(2) High Performance model QCPU
Item
Description
File name
Parameter
Parameter for operating a programmable controller
PARAM.QPA
Intelligent function module
parameter
Parameter for intelligent function modules
IPARAM.QPA
Program
Program that the CPU operates (Including SFC program)
***.QPG
Device comment
Device comment to be stored in a programmable controller
***.QCD
Boot operation specification
file
Batch file for starting programs stored in ROM and others
AUTOEXEC.QBT
Device initial value
Setting the device initial value
***.QDI
Data stored in file registers
***.QDR
Sampling trace file*2
Sampling trace data that the specified device data is continuously
collected with the specified timing
***.QTD
Failure history data*2
Failure history data that are recorded self-diagnostic results
***.QFD
Programmable controller
user data
Any user-created data stored in a memory card
***.*** (Optional)
File register
The file register in the Flash card installed in the CPU is always restored without confirming saving.
Select whether restoring or not the file register stored in the SRAM card or standard RAM in the dialog box displayed when
restoration is executed.
When the file register is not restored, the existing file register is deleted.
Therefore, programs of the controller may not work normally.
If a problem occurs in the operation of the controller after restoration, perform the restoration again, including to the file register.
The item can be backed up only.
Parameter
Parameter for operating a programmable controller
PARAM.QPA
BACKUP/RESTORE
*1
*1
Intelligent function module
parameter
Parameter for intelligent function modules
IPARAM.QPA
9
Program
Program that the CPU operates (Including SFC program)
***.QPG
Device comment
Device comment to be stored in a programmable controller
***.QCD
Boot operation specification
file
Batch file for starting programs stored in ROM and others
AUTOEXEC.QBT
Device initial value
Setting the device initial value
***.QDI
File register*1
Data stored in file registers
***.QDR
Sampling trace file*2
Sampling trace data that the specified device data is continuously
collected with the specified timing
***.QTD
Programmable controller user
data
Any user-created data stored in a memory card
***.*** (Optional)
File for storing device data
Device data used for the SP.DEVST and S.DEVLD instructions
DEVSTORE.QST
Drive heading
The heading of the drive
QN.DAT
Remote password
Remote password settings
00000000.QTM
Monitor sequence extension
Data to increase the speed of monitors from other stations.
MONITOR.Q0*
Latch data backup file
Stores the backup data for the latch data backup function to the
standard ROM.
LCHDAT00.QBK
*2
(3) Universal model QCPU
Item
*1
*2
Description
File name
The file register in the Flash card installed in the CPU is always restored without confirming saving.
Select whether restoring or not the file register stored in the SRAM card or standard RAM in the dialog box displayed when
restoration is executed.
When the file register is not restored, the existing file register is deleted.
Therefore, programs of the controller may not work normally.
If a problem occurs in the operation of the controller after restoration, perform the restoration again, including to the file register.
The item can be backed up only.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.2 Specifications
9-5
(4) LCPU
Item
File name
Parameter
Parameter for operating a programmable controller
PARAM.QPA
Intelligent function module
parameter
Parameter for intelligent function modules
IPARAM.QPA
Program
Program that the CPU operates (Including SFC program)
***.QPG
Device comment
Device comment to be stored in a programmable controller
***.QCD
Boot operation specification
file
Batch file for starting programs stored in ROM and others
AUTOEXEC.QBT
Device initial value
Setting the device initial value
***.QDI
Data stored in file registers
***.QDR
Sampling trace file*2
Sampling trace data that the specified device data is continuously
collected with the specified timing
***.QTD
Programmable controller user
data
Any user-created data stored in a memory card
***.*** (Optional)
File for storing device data
Device data used for the SP.DEVST and S.DEVLD instructions
DEVSTORE.QST
Drive heading
The heading of the drive
QN.DAT
Remote password
Remote password settings
00000000.QTM
Monitor sequence extension
Data to increase the speed of monitors from other stations.
MONITOR.Q0*
Latch data backup file
Stores the backup data for the latch data backup function to the
standard ROM.
LCHDAT00.QBK
Data logging setting file
Setting the data logging
LOGCOM.QLG
LOG01.QLG to
LOG10.QLG
Menu definition file
Menu defining files
MENUDEF.QDF
File register
*1
*2
9-6
Description
*1
The file register in the Flash card installed in the CPU is always restored without confirming saving.
Select whether restoring or not the file register stored in the SRAM card or standard RAM in the dialog box displayed when
restoration is executed.
When the file register is not restored, the existing file register is deleted.
Therefore, programs of the controller may not work normally.
If a problem occurs in the operation of the controller after restoration, perform the restoration again, including to the file register.
The item can be backed up only.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.2 Specifications
(5) Q series motion controller CPU
Item
Description
File name
Motion SFC program
conversion file (control code)
File where SFC code, G-code and F/FS code files are combined and
converted into CPU's Motion SFC program code memory storage
format
sfcprog.cod
Motion SFC program
conversion file (text)
File where G list and F/FS list files are combined and converted into
CPU's Motion SFC program text memory storage format
sfcprog.bin
Motion SFC parameter file
Motion SFC control parameter setting information files
sfcprmD.bin*1
sfcprm.bin*2
K code file
Internal code files of servo program
svprog.bin
svsystemD.bin*1
System setting data file
svsystemH.bin*3
System setting data information files
svsystem.bin*4
svlatchD.bin*1
High speed read setting file
High speed read setting information files
svlatch.bin*2
svsysmonD.bin*1
Optional data monitor information files
BACKUP/RESTORE
Optional data monitor setting
file
svsysmon.bin*2
svdataD.bin*1
Axis data parameter block information files
svdataH.bin*3
svparaH.bin*3
Servo parameter information files
Servo data file
svdata.bin*4
Servo parameter information files
svdata2.bin*4
Limit switch setting data information files
svls.bin
File after conversion of mechanical system program edit information
file into internal codes
svmchprm.bin*5
Cam data files of cam No.1 to 64
svcamprm.bin*5
Cam data files of cam No.101 to 164
svcampr2.bin*5
Cam data files of cam No.201 to 264
svcampr3.bin*5
Cam data files of cam No.301 to 364
svcampr4.bin*5
Cam Edit data
Cam Edit data files
svcameditD.bin
Vision sensor parameter
Vision sensor parameter setting information files
visionD.bin
User safety sequence
program
Safety sequence program files
safetyD.bin
Mark detection setting data
Mark detection setting data
svmarkD.bin
Q series PLC common
parameter file
Data files of Multiple CPU setting, I/O assignment, and others
param.wpa
Multiple CPU high speed
refresh setting
Multiple CPU high speed refresh setting information files
svrefresh.bin*1
Mechanical system program
conversion file
9
Cam data conversion file
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
The data can be backed up or restored only with the Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, or Q170MSCPU.
The data can be backed up or restored only with the Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU, Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, or
Q173CPUN.
The data can be backed up or restored only with the Q172HCPU or Q173HCPU.
The data can be backed up or restored only with the Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, or Q173CPUN.
The data can be backed up or restored with the SV22 operating system software only.
The data can be backed up or restored only with the Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU, Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, or
Q170MSCPU.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.2 Specifications
9-7
(6) FX CPU
Item
Description
Parameter
Parameter for operating a programmable controller
Device comment
Device comment to be stored in a programmable controller
Sequence program
Program that the CPU operates
Special program*1
Positioning setting/Initial value parameter
File register
Data stored in file registers
Extension file register*2
Data stored in extension file registers
Built-in CC-Link/LT setting*3
CC-Link/LT parameter
Special parameter*1
Special adapter/special block parameter saved in the main unit
*1
*2
*3
File name
INFO.FPG
The data can be backed up or restored with the FX3U(C) series and FX3G(C) series only.
The data can be backed up or restored with the FX3U(C) series only.
The data are stored in the FX3U-32MT-LT-2 only.
(7) Data for software
Item
Description
File name
Label program
Data for GX Developer
PROJINFO.CAB
Symbolic data
Symbolic data for PX Developer
#FBDQINF.BIN
Simple project
(with label)
GX Works2 data
SRCINFOM.CAB
SRCINFOM.C32
Structured
project
GX Works2 data
SRCINFOI.CAB
SRCINFOI.C32
Simple project
(with label)
GX Works2 data
SRCINF1M.CAB
SRCINF2M.CAB
SRCINF1M.C32
SRCINF2M.C32
GX Works2 data
SRCINF1I.CAB
SRCINF2I.CAB
SRCINF1I.C32
SRCINF2I.C32
Source
information
New source
information
Structured
project
 Backup setting
Backup settings are created when executing the backup, and are stored in a data strage with the following folder
structure.
Data strage in the drive set as the storage location for the backup setting
Data strage
BKUPLIST
SYS1BKUP.G1B
Backup setting file for CH No.1
SYS2BKUP.G1B
Backup setting file for CH No.2
For how to set the storage location for the backup setting, refer to the following.
9.3.1 Setting storage location for backup data
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
9-8
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.2 Specifications
 Backup data
(1) Storing backup data
When backups for the same channel are executed several times, the backup data are stored in a data strage.
(Backup data stored in the data strage are not overwritten.)
(2) Storage location for backup
Backup data are stored in a data strage with the following folder structure.
Data strage in the drive set as the storage location for backup data
Data strage
BACKUP
SYS1BKUP
YYMMDDXX
Folder for storing backup data
SYS2BKUP
For how to set the storage location for backup data, refer to the following.
BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3.1 Setting storage location for backup data
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
(3) Folders for backup data
Backup data are stored by the folder, and a folder name (YYMMDDXX) is set as follows.
YYMMDDXX
Serial number (00 to 99)
Backup date (01 to 31)
Backup month (01 to 12)
Backup year (the last two digits of the year)
9
Example) Folder name for the 10th backup data for Ch.1 on September 15th, 2013
Folder name: 13091509
When names of folders for backup data include XX of 99, the backup data cannot be stored.
Up to 100 backups can be executed per channel in a day.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.2 Specifications
9-9
 Log files for backing up or restoring
When backing up or restoring, the controllers and files to be baked up or restored are recorded in log files (When
backing up or restoring, they are overwritten.)
Log files are created in the folder where each backup data is stored.
Backup data
(a) File format
Item
Setting
File name, extension
result.txt
File format
ASCII text format
(b) Format
Header
Backup setting
Start time
Backup/restore status
Target devices
Files
Backup/restore status
Item
9 - 10
Setting
Header
Displays the executed operation type. ([BACKUP]: Backup, [RESTORE]: Restore
Backup setting
Displays the backup setting name.
Start time
Displays the start time for backing up or restoring.
Target devices
Displays the CH No., network No., station No., CPU No., unit type, and model of the
target device when backing up or restoring.
The following shows the display contents for unit types.
• PLC: PLC CPU
• MC : Motion controller
• SV : Servo Amplifier
• INV : Inverter
Files
Displays the backed up or restored flies.
Backup/restore status
Recorded only when network batch backing up or restoring.
Displays the number of controllers which the backup/restore is completed, the number
of all target controllers, the number of controllers which backup/restore is completed,
and the number of errors, by station.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.2 Specifications
9.2.2
Access range
(1) Access range with connection types
The following shows a target controller of the backup/restore execution with each connection type.
Connection type
Target controller
Bus connection, Direct CPU connection, computer link connection, Ethernet connection
Host station
Ethernet connection
Host station, Other station
(2) With multi-channel function
With the multi-channel function, the backup and restoration is executed per channel.
(3) Backing up/restoring data for multiple CPU system
For the backup, the batch backup for all CPUs or specified backup of CPU No. 1 to 4 can be selected with the
utility setting.
The restoration is executed with specifying CPU No. 1 to 4.
When the backup or restoration is executed with specifying CPU No. 1 to 4, multiple CPUs (CPU No. 1 to 4) can
be specified.
Precautions
BACKUP/RESTORE
9.2.3
 Precautions for backup
(1) Data that cannot be backed up
The GOT cannot back up device current values and data stored in device memories.
For collecting device current values, use the recipe function.
For how to use the recipe function, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
For collecting data stored in device memories, use GX Developer.
9
(2) Names of files to be backed up
When characters other than the characters defined in the shift JIS code and ASCII code are used for file names,
the file names may not be correctly displayed with the data backed up on the GOT.
For using the backup/restore function, use characters in the JIS code and ASCII code for file names.
(3) Backing up data stored in file registers
Because backing up data stored in file registers takes a long time, some file register data may have different
time stamps in one backup data. Therefore, synchronism of the data is not assured.
Backing up intelligent function module parameters
(4) Backing up intelligent function module parameters
For backing up an intelligent function module parameter (IPARAM.QPA), only the parameters that can be stored
in the PLC CPU are the target parameters.
To store other intelligent function module parameters than those, GX Configurator applied to GX Works2 and the
intelligent function module is required.
For the intelligent function module parameters that can be stored in the PLC CPU, refer to the following.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
 Precautions for restore
(1) Communication status between GOT and target controllers
For restoring data, enable the target controllers of the restoration to communicate with the GOT.
When the target controllers of the restoration cannot communicate with the GOT, the restoration cannot be
executed.
(2) STOP status during restoration
CPUs for the programmable controller and motion controller are in the STOP status with the remote STOP
before the restoration.
For the CNC C70, the CNC ladder is in the STOP status.
The CPUs and CNC ladder remain in the STOP status after the restoration is completed.
Restart the controllers.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.2 Specifications
9 - 11
(3) When restoration is canceled
When the restoration is canceled, all the data are not restored to the controllers and the controllers may not
correctly operate.
When the restoration is canceled, be sure to execute the restoration again.
The CPUs and CNC ladder remain in the STOP status after the restoration is canceled.
Restart the controllers.
(4) System configuration with controllers for restoration
Set the same system configuration with the controllers for the restoration as those for the backup.
Failure to do so disables the GOT to restore data to the controllers.
When the system configuration with the controllers for the restoration is the same as those for the backup, the
GOT can restore data to the controllers even if the connection type and CH No. for the restoration differ from
those for the backup.
(5) Controller operations
Controllers may malfunction by changing set values, device values, and others during the restoration.
Check that data to be restored is the appropriate data, and then execute the restoration with paying attention to
the controller operations.
 Common precautions for backup and restore
(1) Password for backup/restore
When a password for a controller is changed after setting the password for the backup/restore, set a new
password for the backup/restore.
For setting the password for the backup/restore, refer to the following.
9.3.2 Security and password
(2) Precautions for GT Designer3
Do not execute the following operations with GT Designer3 during the backup/restore.
Operation with GT Designer3
BootOS installation,
package data, the communication driver, the standard monitor OS, and the extended function system application download
When the above operations are executed, the backup/restore is stopped.
(3) Precautions for GX Developer
(a) Do not access the target controller of the backup/restore with GX Developer during the backup/restore.
Doing so stops the backup/restore.
(b) Do not execute the backup/restore on the GOT while the target controller of the backup/restore is accessed
by GX Developer.
Doing so causes a communication error on GX Developer. (The backup/restore is executed.)
(4) CPU with a security key
The backup/restore cannot be executed on the CPU on which the security key is set.
To execute the backup/restore, check the setting of the CPU.
When the target controllers of the backup/restore include both the CPU with the security key and the CPU
without the security key, the backup/restore is executed only for the CPU without the security key.
 Precautions for QCPU
The restoration to QCPU with the factory-settings or whose memory is formatted is available only in the following
cases.
• For a single CPU system: When the connection type is the bus connection or direct CPU connection
• For a multiple CPU system: When the connection type is the direct CPU connection
However, in a multiple CPU system which includes a QCPU with the factory-settings or whose memory is formatted,
batch restoration to multiple controllers cannot be performed.
Restore each controller with the following procedure.
9 - 12
Restoring data to
controller No.1
Restoring data to
controller No.2
Resetting
controller No.1
Resetting
controller No.2
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.2 Specifications
 Precautions for motion controller CPUs
(1) OS for motion controller CPU
The OS for the motion controller CPU cannot be backed up or restored.
For backing up or restoring setting data for the motion controller CPU, install an appropriate OS on the motion
controller CPU in advance.
(2) Backup/restore target
The GOT backs up or restores data stored in the SRAM built in the motion controller CPU, regardless of the
operation mode.
For writing data to the FLASH ROM built in the motion controller CPU, restore the data to the SRAM, and then
write the data in the SRAM to the FLASH ROM with MT Developer.
(3) Backup
For backing up data for controllers including the motion controller CPU, do not set the motion controller CPU to
the installation mode.
When the motion controller CPU is set to the installation mode, the GOT does not back up data for the motion
controller CPU. (The GOT backs up data for the other controllers on the same base unit.)
For restoring data to controllers including the motion controller CPU, do not set the motion controller CPU to the
installation mode or test mode.
Doing so stops the restoration operation of the GOT.
When the restoration is stopped, be sure to execute the restoration again.
Failure to do so causes the GOT not to write all the data into the controllers, resulting in incorrect operations of
the controllers.
BACKUP/RESTORE
(4) Restoration
9
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.2 Specifications
9 - 13
 Precautions for FXCPU
(1) Attaching a memory cassette
When a memory cassette is attached to a FXCPU, data in the memory cassette is backed up.
When a memory cassette is not attached to the FXCPU, data in the built-in memory is backed up.
(2) Keyword setting
The following table shows whether the backup/restore function is executed or not by each keyword setting.
(Executed:
Not executed:
Protection that cannot be disabled by
keyword
Function
Write
protection
Read/
Write
protection
All
operation
protection
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
)
With keyword
Write protection
Enabled
Disabled
Read/Write protection
Enabled
Disabled
All operation
protection
Enabled
Without
keyword
Disabled
(Trigger) Backup
Restore
(3) Keyword for restoring data
When data are restored to a target FXCPU, a keyword in the FXCPU is held.
For setting or disabling a keyword for the FXCPU, refer to the following manual.
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
Programming manual for the FXCPU used
(4) Backup data which contains source information
When the target FXCPU of the restoration does not support source information, the backup data which contains
source information cannot be restored.
9 - 14
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.2 Specifications
9.3 Operations for Display
The following describes the outline for displaying the operation screen for the backup/restore after installing Backup/
Restore (extended system application) on the GOT.
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT.
Starting from a special function
switch (Backup/Restore) set
in the project data
Starting from
the utility
Display the utility.
Touch the special function switch.
Starting from
the MELSEC-L
troubleshooting
Activate [Backup/restoration] on the
MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen.
Touch [Backup
/restoration].
Refer to the following manual for how to
set the special function switch.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
BACKUP/RESTORE
After the utility is displayed, touch
[Data control] [Backup/restore]
from the Main Menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the
GOT2000 User's Manual (Utility).
10.4 Operation Procedures
Backup/restoration
9
End
POINT
(1) How to display the utility
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual
(2) When GOT has no project data
The backup/restoration can be started with the utility even though the GOT has no project data.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
9 - 15
 Changing screens
Utility Main Menu
or
user-created monitor screen
GOT data package acquisition
Controller list screen
/
GOT data package
Restoration function (with controller list file)
Backup
function
Main menu
Progress screen (backup)
Controller selection screen
(Restoration)
Input the password
9.3.2 Security and
password
Progress screen (restoration)
Input the password
9.3.2 Security and
password
9 - 16
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
(Without controller
list file)
Restoration
function
(Without controller
list file)
Restoration function
(with controller list file)
Data list (restoration)
 Background processing stop
By the background processing stop signal (GS522.b0), background processing by other functions (alarm, logging,
device monitoring) can be stopped during the backup/restoration.
When background processing is performed, the backup/restoration and other functions are alternately performed.
Therefore, backup/restoration takes much time, but the monitoring of the controller continues.
When background processing is not performed, processing of other functions stop until the backup/restoration is
completed.
Therefore, the monitoring of the controller stops, but the backup/restoration takes less time.
・When background processing is performed
・When background processing is stopped
Backup/restoration and other functions alternately perform communication.
Other functions stops communication until backup/restoration is completed.
Backup/
restoration
Backup/
restoration
Other functions
(alarm, logging,
device monitoring,
etc.)
Other functions
(alarm, logging,
device monitoring,
etc.)
Background processing stop
signal (GS522.b0)
Description
OFF
In the backup/restoration, background processing is performed.
ON
In the backup/restoration, background processing is not performed.
POINT
(1) Log file save setting
Before background processing is stopped, set the file saving for the functions that collect log data such as the
alarm and logging.
Without setting the file saving, all log data such as alarm data and logging data are lost after backup/
restoration is completed.
(2) Functions disabled during background processing stop
When background processing is stopped, in the backup/restoration, all functions stop except for the backup/
restoration.
Therefore, the following functions that collect log data cannot acquire the data in the backup/restoration.
• Alarm function
• Operation log function
• Logging function
• Recipe function
(3) Background processing stop for trigger backup
During the trigger backup, turning on the background processing stop signal (GS522.b0) does not stop
background processing.
Background processing is always performed.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
9 - 17
BACKUP/RESTORE
GOT special register
9
9.3.1
Setting storage location for backup data
Set the storage location that backup data are stored.
Set the storage location for backup data in the backup/restoration setting of the utility.
 Display procedure
Select [Utility]
[Data Control]
[Backup/restoration setting] from the utility.
 Settings
Item
Description
Drive for backup setting
Specify the drive for storing backup settings, including parameters and passwords for controllers.
Drive for backup data
Specify the drive for storing backup data.
Trigger backup setting
The GOT automatically backs up data when triggers (Rise, Time) specified for each backup setting are met.
Max. of backup data
Set the maximum number of backup data to be stored.
(When 0 is specified, the GOT does not check the number of backup data to be stored.)
Enable CPU No. setting
Set whether to enable the CPU No. setting or not.
(When [Enabled] is selected, the GOT starts to communicate with only the specified PLC. Therefore the network
batch backup/restoration on the multiple PLCs cannot be executed.)
POINT
Setting on GT Designer3
The backup/restoration setting can also be set in the GOT setup on GT Designer3.
For the GOT setup of GT Designer3, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
9 - 18
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
9.3.2
Security and password
By setting the passwords, the password authentication is available when the backup/restore is executed.
The password authentication uses the password for the backup/restore and passwords for controllers.
Authentication of the password for the backup/restore
Automatic authentication of passwords for the controller
Backup
Data strage
Authentication of the password for the backup/restore
Automatic authentication of passwords for the controller
Restore
The following shows the passwords used for the backup/restore.
Description
Password for backup/restore
Password for the backup/restore function
Set the password on the GOT at the first backup.
Before setting the password, set passwords for controllers in advance.
Passwords for controllers
Passwords set for the files for the target controllers of the backup/restore
Set the passwords with software for the controllers when writing the files to the controllers.
After the first backup (after setting the password for the backup/restore), the user has no need to input the passwords for
the controllers. (The passwords for the controllers are automatically verified.)
The following shows the security advantages.
User
Advantage
Administrator
No need to disclose the passwords for the controllers to the operator
(Preventing anyone other than the administrator to browse or edit setting data for the controllers.)
Operator
The backup/restore is executed by using the password for the backup/restore only.
(No need to input passwords for the controllers)
9
POINT
Before setting password for backup/restore
When the user forgets the password for the backup/restore, the backup/restore cannot be executed.
In that case, execute the backup again by using a formatted or new data strage.
For how to set the password for the backup/restore, refer to the following.
Setting password for backup/restore
How to use the password for the backup/restore, refer to the following.
How to use password for backup/restore
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
BACKUP/RESTORE
Password
9 - 19
 Setting password for backup/restore
The password for the backup/restore can be set only when the following condition is satisfied at the first backup.
• When passwords are set for the files for the backup target controller
At the first backup, the password authentication for the controller is required.
The following shows the operating procedure at the first backup.
Start
Touch [Backup function] in the main menu on
the GOT. (The first backup)
FXCPU
9.4 Operation Procedures
Other than the FXCPU
Is a password set for the
file to be backed up?
Yes
Input the password for the controller.
(When the password for the first file is verified,
the other files are automatically verified using
the password for the first file. When the
automatic verification fails, input the
corresponding password.)
No
Is the password correct?
Yes
The file is backed up.
Yes
Is there another file?
No
Yes
Is there another unit?
(In the multiple CPU system)
No
Yes
Is there another controller to
be backed up?
(when with controller list file)
No
Set the password for the backup/restore.
(Set 32 or less alphanumeric characters
for the password.)
Backup completed
9 - 20
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
No
When a keyword is set,
disable the keyword.
POINT
(1) Setting password
For ensuring the security, setting a password of 8 or more characters that cannot be easily guessed is
recommended.
When the password is leaked, the same system can be created. Pay enough attention to managing the
password.
(2) Passwords for motion controller CPU
(a) File name
When a password for a motion controller CPU data is input, the GOT does not display the file name.
The GOT displays the data type only.
(b) Setting passwords for data without any contents
When contents of the following motion controller CPU data do not exist, do not set any passwords for the
data.
• Mechanical system program
• Cam data
When passwords are set for the data without any contents, the automatic password authentication is
unavailable when the GOT executes the backup.
As a result, the user must input the passwords each time.
(3) FXCPU keyword
To back up or restore data in the FXCPU, disable a keyword in advance.
9.4 Key functions
BACKUP/RESTORE
• SFC program
9
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
9 - 21
 How to use password for backup/restore
(1) Backup
The following shows the operating procedure for the backup after setting the password for the backup/restore.
Start
Touch [Backup function] in the main menu on
the GOT. (The second or later backup)
9.4 Operation Procedures
Input the password for the backup/restore.
Yes(FXCPU)
No
Is the password correct?
When a keyword is set,
disable the keyword.
Yes(Other than the FXCPU)
Is a password set for the
file to be backed up?
No
Yes
The passwords for the controller stored as the
backup setting data are automatically verified
for each file.
No
Is the password correct?
Input the correct password
for the controller.
Yes
The file is backed up.
Yes
Is there another file?
No
Yes
Is there another unit?
(In the multiple CPU system)
No
Yes
Is there another controller to
be backed up?
(when with controller list file)
Set the password for the backup/restore.
(Set 32 or less alphanumeric characters for
the password.)
No
Have the passwords for the
controllers ever been changed?
No
Backup completed
9 - 22
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
Yes
POINT
When passwords for controllers are changed
When the password input is cancelled and the backup is stopped, the backed up files until the backup is stopped
are all deleted.
(2) Restoration
The following shows the operating procedure for the restoration after setting the password for the backup/
restore.
Start
Touch [Execute] in the data list (restoration).
9.4 Operation Procedures
Input the password for the backup/restore.
Is the password correct?
Yes(FXCPU)
Yes(Other than the FXCPU)
Is a password set for the
file to be restored?
When a keyword is set,
disable the keyword.
When a programmable controller is
the RUN status, change the
status to the STOP status.
BACKUP/RESTORE
No
No
Yes
The passwords for the controller contained in
the backup data are automatically verified.
Is the password correct?
No
Input the correct password
for the controller.
9
Yes
The file is restored.
Yes
Is there another file?
No
Yes
Is there another unit?
(In the multiple CPU system)
No
Yes
Is there another controller to
be backed up?
(when with controller list file)
No
Restoration completed
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
9 - 23
POINT
When passwords for controllers are changed
When the password input is cancelled and the restoration is stopped, the restored files until the restoration is
stopped remain in the controller.
When only any of the files are restored, the data can be inconsistent in the entire system.
When the password input is cancelled
The restoration is stopped, and the restored file remains in the controller.
Start the restoration.
When a password for the controller is changed,
the password verification is required.
CF card/
Controller
USB memory
CF card/
USB memory
Controller
File 1
File 1
File 1
File 1
File 2
File 2
File 2
File 2
File 3
File 3
File 3
File 3
Input the password.
9 - 24
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
CF card/
USB memory
Controller
File 1
File 1
File 2
File 2
File 3
File 3
When the correct password is input
The restoration is completed.
CF card/
Controller
USB memory
File 1
File 1
File 2
File 2
File 3
File 3
Not matched
9.3.3
Trigger backup
The GOT can automatically back up setting data for controllers with the trigger device or the days and time set.
Setting the trigger type selects whether to execute the backup with the trigger device or with the days and time.
(1) When trigger type is set to [Rise]
The GOT executes the backup when the set trigger device turns on.
Use the backup with the trigger device for automatically backing up setting data for controllers after the setting
data are changed.
Trigger device: X100
Backing up
setting data to
a data strage
X100: ON
Detected
BACKUP/RESTORE
X100:
OFF ON
(2) When trigger type is set to [Time]
The GOT executes the backup at the specified time on the specified days.
Use the backup with the time for backing up setting data periodically.
Setting GOT to back up data at 17:30 on Tuesdays
Backing up
setting data to
a data strage
Tuesday
17:30
9
(3) Maximum number of backup data
With the trigger backup, the maximum number of backup data to be stored can be specified.
When the number of backup data exceeds the maximum number of backup data, the GOT automatically deletes
the oldest backup data.
Therefore, the GOT does not fail to store the latest backup data.
(4) Checking backup data changes
When performing backup, the GOT compares the previous backup data with the setting data, for each controller.
When the current setting data for any of the controllers differ from the previous backup data, the GOT backs up
setting data for all the controllers on the same base unit.
When the current setting data for all the controllers are the same as the previous backup data, the GOT does
not execute the backup.
Therefore, the GOT does not store the same backup data.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
9 - 25
 How to set trigger backup
(1) Flow of settings
The following shows the flow of settings for using the trigger backup.
Execute the first backup.
Set the password for the backup/restore.
9.3.2 Security and password )
(
Trigger type: [Time]
Trigger type: [Rise]
Set the trigger backup
with GT Designer3.
Set the devices to be used for
the trigger backup.
Download package data
to the GOT.
Set the trigger backup
with the GOT utility.
Set the days and time that the GOT executes
the backup.
For setting the trigger backup for the
first time, input the password for the
backup/restore.
The trigger backup settings
are completed.
POINT
Inputting password for backup/restore
The GOT automatically executes the backup when the trigger condition is met.
The password authentication with the password for the backup/restore is not executed.
By executing the password authentication with the password for the backup/restore when setting the trigger
backup with the GOT utility, unauthorized users cannot execute the backup.
Without inputting the password for the backup/restore when setting the trigger backup, an error occurs and the
GOT does not execute the backup even if the trigger condition is met.
Input the password for the backup/restore in the trigger backup setting of the GOT utility.
For setting the trigger backup with the GOT utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
(2) Setting items for trigger backup
Set the trigger backup with GT Designer3 and the GOT utility.
For the setting items for GT Designer3, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
For the setting items for the GOT utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
9 - 26
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
 Controlling backup with devices
The GOT controls the trigger backup with devices.
The following shows the devices to be used for the trigger backup.
• Trigger device
• Process notification device
• Backup error notification device
• Trigger backup processing setting No. notification (GS657)
• Trigger backup data send delay (GS521)
For the devices and how to set the devices, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
(1) When normal backup is executed
Trigger device
Backup processing
Process notification device
(b) When trigger type is set to [Time]
The GOT starts the backup at the time specified for the trigger backup.
When the backup is started, the process notification device turns on, and the time trigger automatically
turns off.
When the backup is completed, the process notification device turns off.
Time
Specified time
The time trigger automatically turns off when the backup is started.
Backup processing
Process notification device
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
9 - 27
BACKUP/RESTORE
(a) When trigger type is set to [Rise]
Turn on the trigger device, and then the GOT starts the backup.
When the backup is started, the process notification device turns on.
Turn off the trigger device right after the process notification device turns on. (The trigger device does not
automatically turn off.)
When the backup is completed, the process notification device turns off.
9
(2) Error handling
When an error occurs during the trigger backup, the backup error notification device stores the trigger ID
corresponding to the trigger setting set for the backup with the error, and a system alarm occurs.
Check the system alarm, and then remove error causes.
For system alarms and corrective actions, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
The backup error notification device stores 0 when the next trigger backup is executed.
Trigger device 1
Backup processing 1
Error occurs
Process notification
device 1
Backup error
notification device
Trigger backup processing
setting No. notification
(GS657)
0
1
Storing trigger ID
corresponding to
backup with error
1
0
0
Storing 0 when the next
trigger backup is executed
1
(3) Setting send delay time
The backup/restore function can set the delay time for backup communication intervals.
Setting of the delay time can reduce the load of other processes (such as monitoring objects) with the backup
process.
The actually time set by the set value is listed as follows.
Set value
Delay time
0
None
1 to100
101 or more
Set value
5(ms)
500(ms)
POINT
Setting of trigger backup data send delay
Backup communication times are longer than a default when the trigger backup data send delay is set.
Set the suitable delay time to match the processing condition of backup function and others (such as monitoring
objects).
9 - 28
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
 Precautions for trigger backup
The following shows precautions for the trigger backup.
(1) GOT operations during trigger backup
The GOT may take a long time to monitor devices and to operate during the trigger backup.
Execute the trigger backup when the operator does not operate the GOT.
Updating data with the functions that collect device values, including the logging function, may also take a long
time.
(2) Displaying device name on GOT
When the trigger device is set to [Rise], the GOT displays the device name of [??] without the device name
converter installed.
For displaying the device name correctly, install the device name converter on the GOT.
(3) First backup
The trigger backup is unavailable for the first backup.
Manually execute the first backup, and then set the password for the backup/restore and passwords for
controllers. After the settings, set the trigger backup.
When passwords for controllers stored in the backup setting differ from current passwords for the controllers, the
backup operation is canceled.
For executing the trigger backup, check that passwords for controllers have no changes.
When the backup operation is canceled, manually execute the backup again, and then input correct passwords.
(5) Checking file register changes
When the trigger backup is frequently executed, set [Check the file register changes] to [Not execute] with the
GOT utility because data stored in file registers frequently changes.
When [Check the file register changes] is set to [Execute], the GOT backs up data stored in the file registers
every time the trigger condition is met even if the other setting data for the controller are not changed.
As a result, the number of backup data increases in the SD card. When the number of backup data exceeds the
maximum number of backup data, old backup data are deleted.
For obtaining data stored in file registers only, use the recipe function.
For how to use the ecipe function, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
(6) Backup on a motion controller CPU or FXCPU
If the following are to be backed up, the GOT does not compare the previous backup data with the controller
setting data.
• A motion controller CPU is mounted on the same base unit.
• FXCPU
As a result, the GOT executes the backup even if the setting data for the controllers have no changes.
For backing up setting data only when the data are changed, set the trigger type to [Rise].
Create a sequence program so that the trigger device turns on only when the setting data are changed.
Therefore, the number of backup data can be minimized.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
9 - 29
BACKUP/RESTORE
(4) Passwords for controllers
9
(7) Screens that trigger backup can be executed
The trigger backup can be executed only when the GOT displays a monitor screen.
(a) When the trigger condition is met while the GOT displays a screen other than monitor screens, including
the utility screen and ladder monitor screen, the GOT does not execute the backup.
When a screen other than monitor screens is switched to a monitor screen, the GOT executes the backup.
(b) When a monitor screen is switched to a screen other than monitor screens during the trigger backup, the
GOT stops the backup and the GOT deletes the data in process.
When the screen is switched to a monitor screen, the GOT executes the backup again.
(c)
When the following are operated, the GOT does not execute the backup even if a screen other than
monitor screens is switched to a monitor screen.
• Restarting the GOT
• Changing the trigger backup setting with the GOT utility
(8) When another trigger condition is met during backup
The GOT cannot detect that another trigger condition is met.
Trigger device
(Trigger ID: 1)
Trigger device
(Trigger ID: 2)
not
detected
Backup processing
(Trigger ID: 1)
Backup processing
(Trigger ID: 2)
Process notification
device
(Trigger ID: 1)
Process notification
device
(Trigger ID: 2)
Trigger backup processing
setting No. notification
(GS657)
1
0
For ensuring the trigger backup, establish a handshake with the trigger device and the process notification
device.
An example of a handshake is shown on the next page.
9 - 30
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
Trigger device
(Trigger ID: 1)
Trigger device
(Trigger ID: 2)
Backup processing
(Trigger ID: 1)
Backup processing
(Trigger ID: 2)
Process notification
device
(Trigger ID: 1)
Process notification
device
(Trigger ID: 2)
1
2
1.
The trigger device (Trigger ID: 1) turns on, and then the GOT starts the backup (Trigger ID: 1).
2.
When the backup is started, the process notification device (Trigger ID: 1) turns on, and the trigger backup
processing setting No. notification (GS657) stores the trigger ID.
When the process notification device turns on, the trigger device (Trigger ID: 1) turns off.
3.
When the backup (Trigger ID: 1) is completed, the GOT recognizes that the trigger device (Trigger ID: 2) is
on and the GOT starts the backup (Trigger ID: 2).
4.
When the backup is started, the process notification device (Trigger ID: 2) turns on, and the trigger backup
processing setting No. notification (GS657) stores the trigger ID.
When the process notification device turns on, the trigger device (Trigger ID: 2) turns off.
(9) When multiple trigger conditions are simultaneously met
The GOT executes the backup with the smallest trigger ID first.
(10) When trigger device is on at GOT startup
The GOT recognizes that the trigger condition is met, and then the GOT executes the backup.
Create a sequence program so that the trigger device turns off after the GOT checks that the process
notification device turns on.
GOT power
Backup trigger device
Backup processing
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
9 - 31
BACKUP/RESTORE
Trigger backup processing
setting No. notification
(GS657)
9
9.3.4
Network batch backup/restore
The backup or restoration can be executed to multiple controllers on the network system.
Batch backup/restoration for
controllers on the network
NW No. : 1
Station No. : 3
NW No. : 1
Station No. : 2
Ethernet
NW No. : 1
Station No. : 1
To backup or restore multiple controllers on the network, create a controller list file.
POINT
Before performing network batch backup/restoration
When backing up or restoring to controllers on the network, set the parameters to the controllers for communicating
with the GOT.
If the controller cannot communicate with the GOT, the backup or restoration cannot be performed.
For how to connect controllers with the GOT, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1
 Flow to perform the network batch backup/restoration
Create a controller list file with a personal computer.
Creating a controller list file
Store the controller list file in the BKUPLIST folder.
Creating a controller list file
Install a SD card or USB memory, in which the controller list file is stored,
on the GOT.
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
Display the Main Menu of backup/restoration
9.3 Operations for Display
Select a channel to be backed up or restored.
9.4.1 Main menu
Execute the backup/restoration.
9.4.1 Main menu
For the operation after executing the network batch backup/restore, refer to the following.
Operation after executing the network batch backup or restoration
9 - 32
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
 Creating a controller list file
For the controller list file, set the network No. and the station number of the controller to be backed up or restored.
The controller list file can be set to each backup setting file.
(1) Controller list file specification
(a) Specification
Item
Setting
File name, extension
SYSnNET.INI
(Assign the CH No. to be backed up or restored to "n" in the file name.)
File format
Unicode text format
Encode format
Little endian with UTF-16 BOM
(b) Format
Up to 64 controllers to be backed up or restored can be set. (The 65th or later are invalid.)
When performing the backup or restoration, the controller list file settings are executed from the top.
1)
3)
4)
No.
1)
5)
6)
Item
7)
Setting
9
Header
Indicates that it is the controller list file.
2)
Data version
Displays the data version of the controller list file.
Set the version to 1.
3)
Controller list
Indicates the title of the controller list.
4)
Execution/non-execution
Set whether to execute or not the backup or restoration. (0: Non-execution, 1: Execution)
5)
Network No.
Set the network No. of controllers to be backed up or restored. (0 to 239)
6)
Station No.
Set the station No. of controllers to be backed up or restored. (0 to 120)
If the network No. is 0, 255 (host) can also be set.
7)
Memo
Both 2-byte and 1-byte characters can be set.
Up to 30 characters are displayed in the controller list screen.
POINT
Precautions for creating a controller list file
(1) When " is entered
• Even if " is entered in the memo, it is not treated as a quotation mark for the character string, the text to the
line feed is considered a character string.
• If numerical values are put in "s, a format error occurs.
(2) When creating with a text editor
When the controller list file is created with a text editor, delimit data with tabs.
If unnecessary tabs are entered, a format error occurs.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
BACKUP/RESTORE
2)
9 - 33
(2) Controller list file creation
The controller list file must be created by the user. The following shows how to create it with Microsoft Excel
1.
Start Microsoft Excel and set the controllers to be backed up or restored, according to the format.
For the format of the file, refer to the following.
(1) Controller list file specification
2.
Select [File]
3.
Select [Unicode Text (*.txt)] in [Save as type].
4.
Enter the file name according to the CH No. to be used and press the [Save] button with the extension INI.
For the specification of the file name, refer to the following.
[Save As...] to display the [Save As...] dialog box.
(1) Controller list file specification
(3) Controller list file storage
Store the created controller list file in the same folder as the backup setting.
For the storage location for the backup setting, refer to the following.
9.2.1 System configuration
1.
Check whether a storage folder for the backup (BKUPLIST) exists in the SD card or not.
(If the backup is executed, the folder is automatically created)
If no storage folder exists, create it.
Backup setting file
2.
9 - 34
Store the created controller list file in the storage folder for the backup.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
 Operation after executing the network batch backup or restoration
When the network batch backup/restoration is executed, the following operations are performed.
Start backing up or restoring after preparing a
controller list file
9.3 Operations for Display
The controller list file of the channel selected
from the Main Menu is read.
Start backing up or restoring to the controller
set in the controller list file.
Can the GOT communicate
with controllers?
No
Yes
No
BACKUP/RESTORE
Is the controller list file
setting normal?
Yes
Execute the backup or restoration to each
controller.
Yes
Notify errors and skip the backup or restoration
of the target controller.
Is there any controller not
backed up or not restored in the
controller list file?
9
No
Backup/restoration completed
(1) Operations if an error occurs during backup
If an error occurs, the backup being executed is canceled and the error dialog box is displayed. (The error is
displayed by the controller set in the controller list file.)
After the error dialog box is closed, the backup to the next controller set in the controller list file is continued.
However, the backup data cannot be written because a SD card is not installed or does not have sufficient
capacity, the backup to all controllers is canceled.
(2) Handling of the backup data when the backup is canceled
Backup data of controllers canceled for an error occurrence or a cancellation of password input on the controller
is deleted by the controller set in the controller list file.
Backup data backed up normally remains by the controller set in the controller list file.
(3) Operations if a password on the controller is set to the backup target
If the password input on the controller is canceled, the backup being executed is canceled and the backup to the
next controller set in the controller list file is continued.
If a password for backup or restoration is set on the GOT, a password on the controller can be input to the
controller, for which the password input was canceled, at the next time.
By inputting the correct password, password input is not required at the next execution.
For the password for backup or restoration, refer to the following.
9.3.2 Security and password
(4) Operation for trigger backup
• The backup does not executed if the GOT cannot communicate with controllers because of a communication
error or others.
• If no previous backup data to be compared exists, the backup is executed.
• Even if the backup being executed is canceled for an error occurrence, the backup to the next controller set in
the controller list file is continued.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.3 Operations for Display
9 - 35
9.4 Operation Procedures
This section describes the backup/restore display details and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen.
9.4.1
Main menu
The following describes the display and the key functions on the Bakcup/restoration function : Main menu screen.
 Display details
1)
No.
1)
Display details
Displays the target channel No. of the backup and the setting name for the backup/restore (Fixed).
 Key functions
Key
Function
Switches the target channels of the backup/restore.
Available when the controller list file is stored in the same folder as the backup setting.
9.3.4 Network batch backup/restore
Shifts to the controller list screen.
If a SD card which stores the controller list file is installed on the GOT after displaying the Main Menu or switching
a channel, the [Device List] button is not valid.
To validate the [Device List] button, switch a channel and select the same channel again.
Backup function
Restoration function
Starts the backup.
Switches the screen to the Restoration function: Data list screen.
Switches the screen to the setting screen of the GOT data package acquisition.
GOT data package
Delete backup data
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
Deletes the oldest data among backup data already stored in a SD card or USB memory in the GOT.
Ends the backup/restore, and then the screen is switched to the backup/restore startup screen.
Displays the FX keyword screen.
(This key is displayed only when the FXCPU is connected.)
For the operation of a keyword including disabling a keyword, refer to the following manual.
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
9 - 36
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.4 Operation Procedures
9.4.2
Progress screen (backup)
This following describes the display details and the key functions on the Backup function: Progress screen.
 Display details
1)
2)
6)
3)
4)
No.
BACKUP/RESTORE
5)
Display details
1)
Displays the setting name for the backup/restore (Fixed).
2)
Displays the backup data name.
3)
Displays the channel No., network No., station No., CPU No., and module name for the target controller in a list.
When the CPU No. setting is enabled, select the controller to be backed up by touching it.
Displays also the progress situation of each station when the network batch backup is executed. ([Progression: (Number of completed
controllers)/(Number of set controllers) NG = (Number of error controllers)])
9
Displays the target controller status of the backup.
4)
: Backup target
: Not backup target
: Access disabled
Displays the backup progress status.
5)
6)
Backing up
Aborting
Completed
: The backup is in processing.
: The backup cancellation is in processing.
: The backup is completed.
Displays the file name in processing.
 Key functions
Key
Function
Switches the screen to the Backup/restoration function: Main menu screen.
Cancels the backup.
Ends the backup/restore, and then the screen is switched to the backup/restore startup screen.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.4 Operation Procedures
9 - 37
9.4.3
Data list (restoration)
The following describes the display details and the key functions on the Restoration function: Data list screen.
 Display detail
1)
4)
2)
3)
No.
Display details
1)
Displays the setting name for the backup/restore (Fixed).
2)
Displays backup data stored in a SD card or USB memory.
Select a backup data to be restored with touching the data.
3)
Displays the channel No., network No., station No., module No., and unit name for the target controller of the restoration.
Displays the target controller status of the restoration.
Select a target controller of the restoration with touching the controller.
4)
: Restoration target
: Not restoration target
: Access disabled
 Key functions
Key
Function
Scrolls the data list up and down by one line.
Scrolls the data list up and down by one page.
/
Switches the number of target controllers of the restoration.
• Single selection: Select [Single selection] when selecting only one target controller of the restoration.
• Multiple selection: Select [Multiple selection] when selecting multiple target controllers of the restoration.
Return to the previous screen, before shifting to the Data list screen.
Starts the restoration.
9 - 38
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.4 Operation Procedures
9.4.4
Progress screen (restoration)
This following describes the display details and the key functions on the Restoration function: Progress screen.
 Display details
1)
2)
6)
3)
4)
No.
BACKUP/RESTORE
5)
Display details
1)
Displays the setting name for the backup/restore (Fixed).
2)
Displays the backup data name.
3)
Displays the channel No., network No., station No., module No., and unit name for the target controller of the restoration.
Displays the target controller status of the restoration.
9
: Restoration target
4)
: Not restoration target
: Access disabled
? : Restoration failed
Displays the restoration progress status.
5)
6)
Restoring
Aborting
Completed
Abort
Comm.error
Data error
:
:
:
:
:
:
The restoration is in processing.
The restoration cancellation is in processing.
The restoration is completed.
The restoration cancellation is completed.
The restoration is failed with the communication failed.
The restoration is failed with backup data errors.
Displays the file name in processing.
 Key functions
Key
Function
Switches the screen to the Backup/restoration function: Main menu screen.
Cancels the restoration.
Ends the backup/restore, and then the screen is switched to the backup/restore startup screen.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.4 Operation Procedures
9 - 39
9.4.5
Controller list screen
The following describes the display details and the key functions on the Controller list screen.
 Display details
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
No.
Display details
1)
Displays the target channel No. of the backup/restore and the setting name for the backup/restore (Fixed).
2)
Switches execution/non-execution of all settings.
3)
Switches execution/non-execution of each setting.
4)
Displays the network number.
5)
Displays the station number.
6)
Displays the memo.
7)
Displays the target number of the backup/restore. (Executed/all settings)
 Key functions
Key
Function
Scrolls the data list up and down by one line.
Scrolls the data list up and down by one page.
Saves the edited information in the controller list file and switches the screen to the Backup/restoration function:
Main menu screen.
The edited information is deleted and switches the screen to the Backup/restoration function: Main menu screen.
9 - 40
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.4 Operation Procedures
9.4.6
Controller selection screen (Restoration)
The following describes the display and the key functions on the Restoration function: Controller selection screen.
 Display details
①
No.
BACKUP/RESTORE
②
Display details
1)
Displays the target channel No. of the backup/restore and the setting name for the backup/restore (Fixed).
2)
Displays all settings in the controller list file.
By touching a line, whether restore or not each controller can be switched.
The controller in the highlighted line to be restored.
 Key functions
9
Key
Function
Scrolls the data list up and down by one line.
Scrolls the data list up and down by one page.
Switches the screen to the Restoration function: Data list screen.
Switches the screen to the Backup/restoration function: Main menu screen.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.4 Operation Procedures
9 - 41
9.5 Backup Data Conversion Tool
Backup data are created by the backup/restore function, and the backup data are stored in a SD card.
Backup Data Conversion Tool enables the backup data to convert into data editable with GX Developer. The tool also
enables backup data edited by GX Developer to convert into data for the restoration on the GOT.
POINT
Data to be converted
Only backup data created by the backup/restore function can be converted with Backup Data Conversion Tool.
The following data cannot be converted with Backup Data Conversion Tool.
• Newly-created data by GX Developer
• Backup data with new files added by GX Developer
• Backup data for the Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, and FXCPU
9.5.1
Operating environment
Use Backup Data Conversion Tool in the following operating environment.
Item
Personal computer
Description
PC-AT compatible personal computer that the following OSs run on.
Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate (English version)*1
Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise (English version)*1
Microsoft Windows Vista Business (English version)*1
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium (English version)*1
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic (English version)*1
Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate (English version)*2*3*4
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (English version)
Operating system
Microsoft Windows XP Professional (English version)*1
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition (English version)*1
Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise (English version)*2*3*4
Microsoft Windows 7 Professional (English version)*2*3*4
Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium (English version)*2*4
Microsoft Windows 7 Starter (English version)*1
Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise (English, Simplified Chinese,
Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)*2*4*5*6
Microsoft Windows 8 pro (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional
Chinese, Korean, German versions)*2*4*5*6
Microsoft Windows 8 (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional
Chinese, Korean, German versions)*2*4*5
Microsoft Windows Vista : 800MHz or more
CPU
Microsoft
Windows
(1GHz or more recommended)
2000 : 200MHz or more
Microsoft Windows XP
: 300MHz or more
Microsoft Windows 7
: 1GHz or more
Microsoft Windows 8
: 1GHz or more
Microsoft Windows Vista : 512MB or more
Memory
Display
Microsoft Windows 2000 : 64MB or more
Microsoft Windows XP
Resolution 640
: 128MB or more
480 dots or more
Hard disk space
500KB or more
Display color
High Color (16 bits) or more
Others
The mouse, keyboard, memory card, or card reader
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
9 - 42
Only the 32-bit OS is available.
The 32-bit OS and the 64-bit OS are available.
Windows XP Mode is not supported.
Windows Touch and Touch are not supported.
Modern UI style is not supported.
Hyper-V is not supported.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.5 Backup Data Conversion Tool
(1GB or more recommended)
Microsoft Windows 7
: 1GB or more
Microsoft Windows 8
: 1GB or more
9.5.2
How to install and start Backup Data Conversion Tool
Installing Backup Data Conversion Tool is not required.
Start Backup Data Conversion Tool with the following procedures.
1.
Copy BkupRstrDataConv.exe to the hard disk and others on the personal computer.
Get the above file from one of the followings.
• CD-ROM of GT Works3, BkupRstrDataConv folder in the Disc2
• GTD3 folder on the personal computer
• Contact your local distributor.
2.
Double-click the copied BkupRstrDataConv.exe, and then the tool starts. Refer to the following, and set the tool.
9.5.3
How to use Backup Data Conversion Tool
 Setting items
BACKUP/RESTORE
The following shows the setting items of Backup Data Conversion Tool.
9
Item
Description
Conversion Target
Specify data to be converted.
Backup Data Folder*1
Target Drive
Specify the storage location of the backup data (setting data: UNITINFO.G1B) created with the backup/
restore function by clicking the Browse button.
Select the PLC drive that has setting data to be converted.
Workspace Drive Setting
Set the settings for editing backup data with GX Developer.
Specify [IC Card drive] to be specified for [Read IC memory card] and [Write IC memory card] on GX
Developer.
Drive Name
Folder to be assigned to a
Specify the target folder of [Drive Name] by clicking the Ref. button.
workspace drive*1
Click the item, and then [Folder to be assigned to a workspace drive] is assigned to [Drive Name].
([Folder to be assigned to a workspace drive] is automatically assigned to [Drive Name] normally. Use the
Drive Assignment
Drive Release
Import (GOT
End
Click the item, and then the drive assignment setting is canceled.
GX Developer)
Export (GX Developer
button when the drive assignment setting is canceled by clicking the Drive Release button and a drive
is assigned again.)
GOT)
Converts the backup data to data editable with GX Developer
Converts data edited by GX Developer to data applicable to the backup/restore.
Ends Backup Data Conversion Tool.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.5 Backup Data Conversion Tool
9 - 43
*1 Folder name and file name
(a) Number of characters set for folder and file names
The GOT recognizes the file location with a path as shown below.
Set the folder and file names so that the total number of characters in the path is within 78 characters.
The user can set the folder name and file name only.
(Other than the folder and file names are automatically set.)
Example)
Path of QPG file to be stored in memory card
A :\
Folder name
(2 characters)
\
.QPG
File name
(1 character)
Drive name
(1 character)
Extension
(4 characters)
Max. 78 characters
 Operation flow
The following shows the operation flow for Backup Data Conversion Tool.
(1) Editing backup data with GX Developer
GOT
Back up setting data with the backup/restore function on the GOT.
Copy the backup data to the personal computer.
Specify [Backup Data Folder].
Specify [Target Drive].
Backup Data
Conversion Tool
Specify [Drive Name] in [Workspace Drive Setting].
Specify [Folder to be assigned to a workspace drive].
Click the Import (GOT
GX Developer
9 - 44
GX Developer) button.
Execute [Read IC memory card] with GX Developer.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.5 Backup Data Conversion Tool
(2) Restoring data edited by GX Developer
GX Developer
Execute [Write IC memory card] with GX Developer.
Specify [Backup Data Folder].
Specify [Target Drive].
Backup Data
Conversion Tool
Specify [Drive Name] in [Workspace Drive Setting].
Click the Export (GX Developer
GOT) button.
Store the backup data in a memory card or others, and then insert the card into the GOT.
9.5.4
Restore the backup data with the backup/restore function on the GOT.
Precautions
 Precautions for the backup data conversion
(1) Backup data of a PLC CPU not compatible with the integrated circuit memory card
The Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, and FXCPU do not support the read/write IC memory card function of GX
Developer. Therefore, backup data converted with Backup Data Conversion Tool cannot be edited.
(2) Backup data of a sequence program created in GX Works2
Once backup data created with GX Works2 is converted by using Backup Data Conversion Tool, the data can be
edited with GX Works2. To edit the data with GX Works2, use GX Works2?Ver.1.73B or later.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.5 Backup Data Conversion Tool
9 - 45
BACKUP/RESTORE
GOT
9
9.6 Errors and Corrective Actions
 Common to backup and restoration
Error
Cause
Corrective action
The backup/restore function cannot be used.
The extended system application of the backup/
restore is not installed on the GOT.
The backup setting is not found.
The backup setting is not stored in the data strage
in the GOT.
No data strage is installed to the drive specified for
storing the backup setting.
• Install data strage with the backup setting
stored.
• Check the storage location for the backup
setting with the utility.
The backup data are not found.
The backup data are not stored in the data strage
in the GOT.
No data strage is installed to the drive specified for
storing the backup data.
• Install data strage with the backup data stored.
• Check the storage location for the backup data
with the utility.
The backup/restore cannot be executed because
the user does not know the password for the
backup/restore.
The user does not remember the password.
The password is incorrect.
• Check with the administrator of the system
regarding the password for the backup/restore.
• Execute the backup again by using a formatted
or new data strage.
The backup/restore cannot be completed because
a communication error occurs between the GOT
and a controller during the backup/restore.
The controller list file is abnormal.
The controller list file is invalid.
Install the extended system application on the
GOT.
The communication settings and communication
driver for the GOT are incorrectly set.
Check if the communication settings and
communication driver for the GOT are correctly
set.
Because parameters for the controller are
incorrectly set, the controller dose not recognize
the GOT.
Check if the parameters for the controller is
correctly set with tools, including GX Developer, for
the controller.
The controller is turned off.
Turn on the controller.
The cable is not correctly connected.
Check the cable.
The description in the header part of the controller
list file is abnormal.
• The description in the controller list file is invalid.
• The network number and station number are
outside the range.
• The network number and station number are
overlapped.
Check the format of the controller list file and
describe following the format.
9.3.4 Network batch backup/restore
• Check the format of the controller list file and
describe following format.
9.3.4 Network batch backup/restore
• Describe the network number and the station
number so that they are not overlapped in the
available setting range.
 Backup
Error
The backup data cannot be written into
data strage.
Cause
Corrective action
No data strage is installed to the GOT.
Install a data strage to the drive specified for storing the backup
setting or backup data.
The data strage does not have free space.
Install a data strage with enough free space.
Delete unnecessary files in the data strage.
The data strage is set to write-protect.
Set the data strage to writable.
The attributes of backup data files stored in the data strage cannot
be changed with the GOT. Set the files to writable with a personal
computer.
The drive does not exist.
Check if the drive specified for storing the backup setting or
backup data exists. (Check if the data strage is connected on the
GOT.)
(Continued to next page)
9 - 46
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.6 Errors and Corrective Actions
Error
Setting data (files and data) cannot be
obtained from the controller.
The backup cannot be executed
because passwords for files of the
controller are set.
Cause
The GOT cannot communicate with the
controller.
• The user does not remember the password.
The password is incorrect. (The first backup)
• Passwords for files of the controller are
changed.
Corrective action
Check the following.
GOT
• Check if the cable is correctly connected to the GOT.
• Check if the correct communication driver is installed on the
GOT.
• Check if the communication settings are correctly set.
Controller
• Check if the parameters are set.
• Check if the cable is correctly connected to the controller.
• Check if the controller is turned on.
Check with the administrator of the system regarding the
passwords for files of the controller.
 Restoration
Cause
The GOT cannot communicate with the
controller.
Setting data (files and data) cannot be
written into the controller.
The target controller of the restoration is a
different kind of controller from the target
controller of the backup.
The restoration cannot be executed
because passwords for files of the
controller are set.
• The passwords for files written in the
controller are changed.
Corrective action
Check the following.
GOT
• Check if the cable is correctly connected to the GOT.
• Check if the correct communication driver is installed on the
GOT.
• Check if the communication settings are correctly set.
Controller
• Check if the parameters are set.
• Check if the cable is correctly connected to the controller.
• Check if the controller is turned on.
• Check if the system configuration for the restoration is the same
as that for the backup.
• Check if the target controller of the restoration is the same as
that of the backup or the same kind of controller.
Check with the administrator of the system regarding the
passwords for files of the controller.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.6 Errors and Corrective Actions
9 - 47
BACKUP/RESTORE
Error
9
9 - 48
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
9.6 Errors and Corrective Actions
10. MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
10.1 Features
MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-L troubleshooting enables you to display the status and errors of the LCPU connected to the GOT and the
errors of the GOT.
In addition, you can start the sequence program monitor or others from the MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen.
10
10. MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
10.1 Features
10 - 1
10.2 Specifications
10.2.1
System configuration
This section describes the system configuration of the MELSEC-L troubleshooting.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1
 Target controller
Controller
LCPU
 Connection type
This function can be used in the following connection types.
(
Function
Name
: Available,
Description
Direct CPU
connection
Computer link
connection
Ethernet
CC-Link connection
connection*4
ID*1
MELSEC-L
troubleshooting
Displays the status and errors of the LCPU
and starts various monitor functions.
*1
*2
*3
*4
: Unavailable)
Connection type between GOT and LCPU
G4*2
*3
Indicates CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station).
Indicates CC-Link connection (via G4).
When the GOT is connected to LCPU, use L6ADP-R2.
MELSEC-L troubleshooting cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.
 Required Extended system application
The extended system applications shown below are required.
1.2 Required extended system application for the function
(1) Extended system application
Write the package data that has the extended system application for the MELSEC-L troubleshooting to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
(2) Extended system application space
To write the extended system application to the GOT, certain space of the user area must be reserved for the
application.
For the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data
using other user areas, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
10.2.2
Access range
 When using direct CPU connection/computer link connection
The LCPU of the host station can be monitored.
 When using Ethernet connection
The LCPU of the host and other stations can be monitored.
 When using CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station/via G4)
The LCPU of the master and local stations can be monitored.
10 - 2
10. MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
10.2 Specifications
10.3 Operation for Display
This section describes the flow until the MELSEC-L troubleshooting operation screen is displayed, after the MELSEC-L
troubleshooting is installed in the GOT.
Start
Starting from a special
Turn on the power to the GOT
function switch (MELSEC-L
Troubleshooting) set in
Starting from the utility
the project data
Display the utility.
Touch the special function switch.
Refer to the following manual for how to set the special
After the utility is displayed,
touch [Monitor]
[MELSEC-L troubleshooting]
from the Main Menu.
MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
function switch.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
For displaying the utility, refer to the following manual.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
Set the channel No., network No.,
station No., of the LCPU connected
to the GOT.
(
)
10.4 Key functions
(1) Communication setting window
10
Communication setting window
(
The MELSEC-L troubleshooting starts.
10.4 Operation Procedures )
End
10. MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
10.3 Operation for Display
10 - 3
POINT
(1) How to display the utility
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
(2) Displaying communication setting window
After turning on the GOT, the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the MELSEC-L
troubleshooting only.
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch the
ChNET
PLCNo
button on the
MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen.
10.4 Operation Procedures
(3) If the project data has not been downloaded
The MELSEC-L troubleshooting can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been
downloaded to the GOT.
 Changing screens
This section describes how to change the screen.
Start
At the second
or later startup
Utility
or
user-created
monitor screen
At the first startup
Communication setting window
ChNET
PLCNo
Touch any
of the functions.
Back
MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen
10 - 4
10. MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
10.3 Operation for Display
Intelligent module monitor
(
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR)
Device monitor
(
2. DEVICE MONITOR)
Sequence program
monitor (ladder)
(
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR
Backup/Restore
(
9. BACKUP/RESTORE)
Log viewer
(
11. LOG VIEWER)
10.4 Operation Procedures
This section describes the display details for the MELSEC-L troubleshooting and the functions of the keys displayed on
the screen.
 Displayed contents
2)
3)
1)
4)
5)
7)
8)
No.
Item
Display contents
1)
CPU status
Displays the LCPU status. (Only LED of BAT, RUN, and ERR is lit.)
The LED on the screen and the LED display on the PLC body may not match depending on the error
status.
2)
Channel information
Displays the set channel number, network number, and station number.
3)
CPU Info
Displays the model and the operation status of the LCPU.
4)
CPU Error Info
Displays error information of the LCPU.
5)
GOT Error Info
Displays error information of the GOT.
The alarm can be canceled with the [Reset] button on the System alarm display screen.
10
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
6)
Monitor/Diagnosis
7)
Ladder Check
Displays buttons to start the sequence progrqm monitor.
8)
Backup/restoration
Displays buttons to start the backup/restore and log viewer.
Displays buttons to start the intelligent module monitor and device monitor (ladder).
 Key functions
Key
Function
Displays the communication setting window.
(1) Communication setting window
Starts the intelligent module monitor.
7. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
Starts the device monitor.
2. DEVICE MONITOR
Starts the sequence program monitor (ladder).
3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER)
Starts the backup/restore.
9. BACKUP/RESTORE
Starts the log viewer.
11. LOG VIEWER
Closes the MELSEC-L troubleshooting and returns the screen to the one for starting the MELSEC-L
troubleshooting.
10. MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
10.4 Operation Procedures
MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
6)
10 - 5
(1) Communication setting window
(a) Display monitor
1) 3)
2)
1) 3)
4)
2)
5)
The information shown in the table below is displayed.
No.
Item
Display contents
1)
CH No. input area
Set the CH No. for the target controller.
2)
Network No. input area
Set the network No. for the target controller.
3)
Station No. input area
Set the station No. of the target controller.
When the station No. is set to the host station (FF), set the network No. to 0.
4)
CH No. selection key
Select a CH No.
5)
Keys
Displays the keys used in the operation in the communication setting window.
(b) Key functions
Key
Function
Closes the communication setting window.
When any of the CH No., network No., and station No. is not input and the monitor target is not set, the
communication setting window does not close.
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
Deletes all the input values and characters.
Deletes an input value or character.
Moves the cursor when the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No.
input area.
10 - 6
10. MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
10.4 Operation Procedures
10.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action
The following shows the error messages for the MELSEC-L troubleshooting and the corrective actions.
Communications error
Description
Corrective action
Communication could not be established
with the PLC CPU.
Connections between the PLC CPU and the GOT
(disconnected or cut cables).
Has an error occurred in the PLC CPU.
MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
Error message
10
10. MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
10.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action
10 - 7
10 - 8
10. MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
10.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action
11. LOG VIEWER
11.1 Features
With the log viewer function, the GOT displays the logging data acquired from the high speed data logger module, the
PLC CPU, and the BOX data logger, and controls the files.
The features of the log viewer are shown below.
 Displaying logging data without a personal computer
• Using the log viewer function, the logging data stored in the CF card attached to the high speed data logger
module or the BOX data logger, or the SD card attached to the PLC CPU is viewed on the GOT.
• The logging data can be stored in a SD card or USB memory attached to the GOT, and displayed on the GOT.
Ethernet
Trend graph
is displayed
Logging data is displayed
 Logging data can be retrieved from GOT
The logging data acquired from the high speed data logger module, the PLC CPU, and the BOX data logger can be
retrieved from the GOT to the personal computer.
Data strage
Trend graph and
event list are
displayed
11
USB cable
or
LAN cable
Logging data
Logging data is displayed
with GX LogViewer
11. LOG VIEWER
11.1 Features
LOG VIEWER
Logging data
11 - 1
11.2 Specifications
11.2.1
System configuration
This section describes the system configuration of the log viewer.
 Target controller
(1) High Speed Data Logger Module
Model
QD81DL96
(2) PLC CPU
PLC
LCPU*1,
QnUDVCPU
*1
L02SCPU and L02SCPU-CM are not available.
(3) BOX Data Logger
Model
NZ2DL
 Connection type
This function can be used in the following connection types.
High Speed Data
Logger Module
PLC CPU or
BOX Data Logger
HUB
GOT
Connection cable
Connection cable
PLC
GOT
Connection cable*1*2
Model
Option device
Model
Number of connectable
equipment
- (Built into GOT)
GT27
16 GOTs
Max. distance*4
Connection type
QD81DL96*5
LCPU*6
Ethernet connection
QnUDVCPU*6
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP),
Unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP)
Category 3, 4 and 5
100m
NZ2DL
*1
*3
*4
The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
A straight cable is available for the high speed data logger module.
A straight cable or a crossing cable are available for the PLC CPU.
The high speed data logger module and the GOT cannot be directly connected with an Ethernet cable.
The connection is available via the HUB.
A length between a hub and a node.
For the system configuration of high speed data logger module, refer to the following manual.
*5
High Speed Data Logger Module User's Manual
For the system configuration of the PLC CPU with the built-in Ethernet interface, refer to the following manual.
*2
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-In Ethernet Function)
QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port)
 Required hardware
A data strage is necessary in the following cases.
11 - 2
11. LOG VIEWER
11.2 Specifications
• Displaying or managing logging data stored in a data strage
• Reading out and displaying logging data of 4MB or more from the controller
11.2.2
GOT Side Settings
 Setting communication interface
To use the log viewer function, [GOT IP Address] must be set in any of the following procedures.
Setting method
Reference section
Set [Destination I/F] of [Ethernet Download] in the [PC (Data Transfer)] dialog box.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
Set the Ethernet driver in [Driver] in the [Controller Setting] dialog box.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi
Products) for GT Works3 Version1
Select [Communication Setting] of [Gateway] in the [Controller Setting] dialog box and select
the [Use the function of Gateway] check box.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
After completing the setting on GT Designer3, install the required OS to the GOT.
 Required Extended system application
The extended system applications shown below are required.
1.2 Required extended system application for the function
(1) Extended system application
Write the package data that has the extended system application for the log viewer to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
To write the extended system application to the GOT, certain space of the user area must be reserved for the
application.
For the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data
using other user areas, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
11.2.3
Access range
The high speed data logger module, the PLC CPU module, or the BOX data logger which is connected to the GOT
via the HUB using the Ethernet cable, can be monitored.
Monitoring via the Internet cannot be performed.
For details of the high speed data logger module, refer to the following.
High Speed Data Logger Module User's Manual
For details of the PLC CPU module, refer to the following.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-In Ethernet Function)
QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port)
11. LOG VIEWER
11.2 Specifications
11 - 3
LOG VIEWER
(2) Extended system application space
11
11.2.4
Precautions
(1) Handling data strage during the access
Do not remove the data strage and do not open the SD card slot during the access.
Doing so may damage files in the GOT or in the data strage.
(2) Connection to the PLC CPU
To use the log viewer function using the PLC CPU, [FTP Setting] is required on the PLC CPU.
The FTP setting method for GX Works2 is described below.
For details of GX Works2, refer to the following.
GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual (Common)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-In Ethernet Function)
QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port)
11 - 4
11. LOG VIEWER
11.2 Specifications
1.
Click the [Built-in Ethernet Port setting] tab in the
[L Parameter setting] window.
2.
Click the [FTP Setting] button.
3.
Switch the item of [FTP] to [Use].
(3) Access to storing files
[Storing file] is for use in temporarily storing the data currently collected by the high speed data logger module,
the PLC CPU, or the BOX data logger.
Precautions for accessing to [Storing file] are different according to the controller.
(a) High speed data logger module and BOX data logger
• During the file switching from [Storing file] to [saved file], [Storing file] and [saved file] may not exist
temporarily.
• When [Storing file] is selected and an error message saying that the file cannot be found appears, select
[Storing file] again.
• Since data is stored in [Storing file] as needed, the copied file size may be larger than the size of when
[Storing file] is selected.
• The data is also stored as needed even when [Storing file] is being copied, so the copying file size may
appear larger than the file size of when selected.
High Speed Data Logger Module User's Manual
(b) PLC CPU
Reference and copying are not available since [Storing file] cannot be selected.
When [Storing file] is full, the data cannot be browsed until the file is switched to [saved file].
QnUDVCPU/LCPU User's Manual (Data Logging Function)
The following shows the storage location of [Storing file] and [saved file].
Folder for log viewer function (the folder name is fixed)
/LOGGING
/LOG01
LOG01.CSV
*1
Folder for setting No.1 (the folder name is specified by the user)
[Storing file] (saved just below the user specified folder)
[saved file] storage folder (automatically created in serial number)
[saved file] (moved to the [saved file] storage folder when [Storing file] becomes full)
/00000001
00000001.CSV
00000002.CSV
Referring and copying are enabled.
00000003.CSV
/00000101
/LOG03
LOG03.CSV
*1
Folder for setting No.2
*1
[Storing file]
*1
Folder for setting No.3
[Storing file]
LOG VIEWER
/LOG02
LOG02.CSV
Operations such as referring or copying are not enabled. (Only confirmation of the file name is enabled.)
11
11. LOG VIEWER
11.2 Specifications
11 - 5
11.3 Operations for Display
This section describes the flow until the log viewer operation screen is displayed, after the log viewer (Option OS) is
installed in the GOT.
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT
Starting from the special function
switch (Log viewer) set in the
project data
Starting from
the utility
Display the utility.
Touch the special function switch.
After the utility is displayed, touch
[Monitor]
[Log viewer] from the Main
Menu.
Refer to the following manual for how
to set the special function switch.
Starting from
the MELSEC-L
troubleshooting
Activate [Log viewer] on the MELSEC-L
troubleshooting screen.
Touch
[Log viewer].
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
For how to display the utility, refer to the
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility).
When no password is registered for
the target controller at first start-up,
or [Offline (view file)] is selected
10.4 Operation Procedures
Input the password.
11.4.2 How to operate target selection
screen
When logging data saved in
the programmable controller
is displayed, and a password
is registered for the target
controller
The main menu of log viewer
is displayed.
11.4.3 How to operate
Main Menu screen
For [View logged device]
[Log viewer] screen is displayed.
11.5.1 Data log viewer screen
End
11 - 6
11. LOG VIEWER
11.3 Operations for Display
For [Manage log file]
[Select files] screen is displayed.
11.4.4 How to operate file
selection screen
POINT
(1) How to display the utility
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
(2) Displaying target setting window
For displaying the target setting window, touch the [Change CPU] button on the Main Menu screen of log
viewer.
To display the connection selection screen, touch the [High speed data logger module / BOX data logger]/
[QnUDVCPU / LCPU] button.
Touch the [Offline (view file)] button to display the file selection screen.
(3) If the project data has not been downloaded
The log viewer can be started with the utility even though the GOT has no project data.
Changing screens when view logged device is selected
Start
Utility Main Menu
or
user-created monitor screen
LOG VIEWER
11.3.1
11.3 Operations for
Display
11.4.3 How to operate Main
Menu screen
11
11.4.2 How to operate
target selection screen
11.5 How to Operate
Data Log Viewer
Access
authentication
window
11.4.2 Access
authentication window
11.5.5 Selecting data
Remote password
authentication
window *1
11.4.2 Remote password
authentication window
11.4.4 How to operate
file selection screen
*1
Displayed only when LCPU is selected and the remote password is set.
11. LOG VIEWER
11.3 Operations for Display
11 - 7
11.3.2
Changing screens when manage log file is selected
Start
Utility Main Menu
or
user-created monitor screen
11.4.3 How to operate
Main Menu screen
11.4.4 How to operate
file selection screen
11.4.4 Recently opened files
11 - 8
11. LOG VIEWER
11.3 Operations for Display
11.5.5 Selecting data
11.5 How to Operate
Data Log Viewer
11.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens
This section describes each screen contents displayed in log viewer and the functions of the keys displayed on the
screen.
11.4.1
How to operate target setting window
Touch the [Change CPU] button in [Main Menu] to display the following screen.
Key
Function
Closes the target setting window and returns to the Main Menu screen.
/
Displays the target selection screen.
11.4.2 How to operate target selection screen
Displays the Main Menu screen.
11.4.3 How to operate Main Menu screen
LOG VIEWER
/
11
11. LOG VIEWER
11.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens
11 - 9
11.4.2
How to operate target selection screen
When [High speed data logger module / BOX data logger] or [QnUDVCPU / LCPU] is selected in the target setting
window, the following screen appears.
 Target selection screen
The following screen appears when [High speed data logger module] is selected.
A similar screen also appears when [QnUDVCPU / LCPU] is selected.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
2)
3)
No.
Item
1)
Connection target list
display area
2)
IP address display area
3)
Timeout time display
area
Display contents
Displays the list of the high speed data logger modules or the PLC CPUs which can be accessed from
the GOT.
To select a high speed data logger module or a PLC CPU, touch it in the list.
Displays the selected IP address.
11 - 10
IP Address input window
Displays the Timeout time.
Timeout time input window
11. LOG VIEWER
11.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens
(2) Key functions
Key
Function
Closes the target selection screen and returns to the target setting screen.
/
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
Updates the displayed content of the connection target list.
Connects to the high speed data logger module or the PLC CPU selected from the connection target list
or the IP address.
When the password is set on the connected high speed data logger module or the PLC CPU, the access
authentication window appears.
11.4.2 Access authentication window
When no password is set on the connected high speed data logger module or the PLC CPU, the Main
Menu screen appears.
11.4.3 How to operate Main Menu screen
 IP Address input window
Touch the IP address input display area to display the following window.
(1) Displayed contents
LOG VIEWER
1)
2)
11
No.
Item
Display contents
1)
IP address input area
Set the IP address.
2)
Input keys
Keys for operations in the IP address input window.
(2) Key functions
Key
/
Function
Closes the IP address input window and cancels the IP address input operation.
The IP address of the input numerical value is reflected.
Deletes one character of the entered numerical value.
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
11. LOG VIEWER
11.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens
11 - 11
 Timeout time input window
Touch the Timeout time display area to display the following window.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
2)
No.
Item
1)
Timeout time input area
Set the Timeout time.
Display contents
2)
Input keys
Keys for operations in the Timeout time input window.
(2) Key functions
Key
Function
Closes the Timeout time window and cancels the Timeout time input operation.
/
The Timeout time of the input numerical value is reflected.
Deletes one character of the entered numerical value.
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
 Access authentication window
When the password is set to the connection target, touch the [Connect] button on the target selection screen to
display the following window.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)
For numerical input
No.
11 - 12
Item
For alphabet input (upper case characters)
Display contents
1)
User name input area
Set the user name to input.
2)
Password input area
Set the password to input.
3)
Keys
Keys for operations in the user name input area and password input area shown in (2).
11. LOG VIEWER
11.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens
(2) Key functions
Key
Function
Closes the Access authentication window and cancels the user name and password input operation.
Switches the key type to the symbol.
Switches the key type to the value.
Switches the key type to the alphabet (uppercase).
Switches the key type to the alphabet (lowercase).
A space is input at the cursor position.
Deletes all the input values and characters.
Deletes an input value or character.
Verifies the user name and password set in the user name input area and password input area.
When the remote password is set on the connected PLC CPU, the remote password authentication
window appears.
11.4.2 Remote password authentication window
When no remote password is set on the connected PLC CPU, the Main Menu screen appears.
11.4.3 How to operate Main Menu screen
 Remote password authentication window
LOG VIEWER
When the remote password is set, the following window appears after access authentication is completed.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
11
2)
No.
Item
Display contents
1)
Password input area
Set the password to input.
2)
Keys
Keys for operations in the password input area shown in (2).
(2) Key functions
The key functions are the same as those of [Access authentication].
For details of key functions, refer to the following.
Access authentication window (2) Key functions
11. LOG VIEWER
11.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens
11 - 13
11.4.3
How to operate Main Menu screen
After the target is selected, the following screen appears.
 Displayed contents
The following screen appears when [High speed data logger module / BOX data logger] is selected.
A similar screen also appears when [QnUDVCPU / LCPU] is selected.
1)
2)
3)
No.
Item
1)
Target controller display
area
2)
View logged device
Display contents
Displays the target device name and IP address.
Displays the logging data stored in the target device as a graph.
11.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
Controls the logging data stored in the target device.
3)
Manage log file
11.4.4 How to operate file selection screenn
 Key functions
Key
Function
Closes the Main Menu and returns to the target setting screen.
/
11.4.2 How to operate target selection screen
Displays the target setting window.
11.3 Operations for Display
11 - 14
11. LOG VIEWER
11.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens
11.4.4
How to operate file selection screen
Select in the following procedure to display the file selection screen.
• Touch [View logged device] in the Main Menu screen
• Touch the folder icon on the data log viewer screen.
 File selection screen
(1) Displayed contents
3)
4)
1)
2)
5)
6)
1)
Item
Target drive list
Display contents
The corresponding drive can be selected.
2)
Check box
If the check box is selected, up to 512 files can be selected.
3)
Path name
Displays the path name of drive/folder which is currently displayed.
4)
File list
5)
The size of drive
Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection.
Not displayed when [X:Target device] is selected.
6)
Number of folders and files
Displays the total number of displayed folders and files.
*1
*2
*3
LOG VIEWER
No.
Displays the files stored in the selected drive in a list.
Only the CSV format*1, BIN format*2, and XLS format*3 are displayed.
11
Only logging data acquired from the high speed data logger, the PLC CPU, or the BOX data logger can be displayed as a graph
in the data log viewer.
Only logging data acquired from the high speed data logger or the BOX data logger can be displayed as a graph in the data log
viewer.
Cannot be displayed as a graph in data log viewer.
POINT
Restrictions when [X:Target device] is selected in select drive.
The logging data stored in the high speed data logger module, the PLC CPU, or the BOX data logger is displayed
in a list.
Regarding graph display, logging data of up to 4MB can be displayed as a graph. However, logging data exceeding
4MB cannot be displayed as a graph.
To display logging data exceeding 4MB as a graph, copy it to the USB memory/SD card of the GOT and select the
logging data in the copy destination.
The logging data stored in the CF card or the USB memory attached to the GOT cannot be copied to the high
speed data logger module, the PLC CPU, or the BOX data logger.
11. LOG VIEWER
11.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens
11 - 15
(2) Key functions
Key
Function
Closes the file selection screen and returns to the target setting window.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
/
Multiple files can be selected or canceled at once.
Touch the [Select all files] button to select all files.
If the number of the displayed files is exceeds 513, the first 512 files are selected.
Displays a list of recently opened files.
11.4.4 Recently opened files screen
Displays the selected file in log viewer.
11.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
Copies the selected file.*1
Moves the selected file.*1*2
Renames the selected file.*1*2
Creates a folder.*1*2
Deletes the selected file.*1*2
11 - 16
*1
For how to operate, refer to the following.
*2
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
If [X:Target device] is selected in select drive, the key functions are disabled.
11. LOG VIEWER
11.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens
 Recently opened files screen
Touch the [Recently opened files] button in the file selection screen to display the following screen.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
2)
No.
Item
Display contents
1)
File list
Displays a list of recently opened files.
From the recently opened files, the latest one is displayed in the first line, and the oldest one is displayed
in the last line.
(Up to 10 files)
2)
Target drive display area
Displays the path of the selected drive.
Files in [X:Target device] have also the information of connected controllers displayed.
Key
/
LOG VIEWER
(2) Key functions
Function
Closes the recently opened files screen and returns to the file selection screen.
Displays the selected file in log viewer.
11.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
11
POINT
Recently opened files screen history specifications
• Up to 10 files are saved, and when the 11th file is saved, the oldest file is deleted.
• Even if opening the same file multiple times, it is counted as one file.
• If files with the same path and file name are stored in multiple controllers, the history of opening each file is
counted as one file.
• The history is deleted when restarting GOT or when turning the GOT power supply OFF.
• The size at the last time the file was opened is displayed in the file list.
• If the selected drive is [X:Target device], connection operation is performed to controllers which are not
connected to other devices. Also, if the controller is connected to another device, the connection operation is
performed to the newly selected controller.
11. LOG VIEWER
11.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens
11 - 17
11.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
On the data log viewer screen, the logging data stored in the high speed data logger module/PLC CPU/BOX data logger
or CF card/USB memory is displayed as a graph.
The following describes how to operate the data log viewer screen.
11.5.1
Data log viewer screen
 Displayed contents
This section describes the screen configuration displayed on the data log viewer screen and the functions of the keys
displayed on the screen.
1)
1)
3)
4)
2)
1)
5)
1)
6)
No.
Item
Display contents
1)
Keys
Keys for operations in the data log viewer screen.
2)
Legend display area
Data to be displayed in the graph display area can be selected.
The line type and logging data name displayed in the graph display area are displayed.
11.5.2 Legend display
3)
4)
Trigger mark display area
Graph display area
The trigger mark appears when the target data is the logging data to which the trigger is set.
When the trigger conditions are satisfied, it is displayed as [Occurred] in blue. When the trigger is
restored, it is displayed as [Cancel] in red.
The trigger mark appears only when the target data is trigger logging.
Displays the data name, graph, and cursor of the target data.
The background of the selected graph is displayed in gray.
The maximum number of sampling points that are displayable on the graph differs according to
the GOT resolution.*1
5)
Scale display area
Displays the scale of the target data.
Touch the scale display area to display the upper and lower limit values change window. Then the upper
and lower limit values can be changed.
11.5.3 Upper and lower limit values setting
6)
Cursor position
information display area
Touch the [Blue cursor]/[Red cursor] button in the cursor position information display area to move [Blue
cursor]/[Red cursor] displayed in the graph display area to any position. The time and value at the
selected position of the graph are displayed.
The changed amount of the time and difference from [Blue cursor] to [Red cursor] is also displayed.
11.5.4 Cursor position information
11 - 18
11. LOG VIEWER
11.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
For details of *1, refer to the following.
Name
Resolution (dots)
With legend display
Without legend display
GT27**-S
800
600
482
674
GT27**-V
640
480
321
513
POINT
Graph display area
(1) Graph display when missing some logging data
When some logging data is missing, the corresponding part in the graph line is displayed with an interruption.
A long and short dash-alternate vertical line is displayed before and after the missing part.
The cursor position information will not be displayed when the missing part is between [Blue cursor]/[Red
cursor] or at the cursor.
(2) Graph horizontal axis display
When the logging data includes time information, the horizontal axis is displayed in time (hour: minute:
second).
When the logging data does not include time information, the horizontal axis is displayed in index number
(integer).
 Key functions
Key
Function
Closes the data log viewer screen, and returns to the previous screen.
Displays the target setting screen.
11.4.2 How to operate target selection screen
Opens the file selection screen and displays the list of the files stored in the high speed data logger
module/PLC CPU or SD card/USB memory.
LOG VIEWER
11.4.4 How to operate file selection screen
Select the data to view.
11.5.5 Selecting data
Enlarges vertically the graph selected in the graph display area.
Reduces vertically the graph selected in the graph display area.
11
Arranges the graph selected in the graph display area horizontally.
Cascades the graph selected in the graph display area.
Displays or hides the legend display area.
11.5.2 Legend display
Searches the time/index data specified by the graph which is selected in the graph display area.
11.5.6 Searching data
Displays the help screen for icon.
11.5.7 Help
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
Scrolls the display area right and left by one sampling.
(Continued to next page)
11. LOG VIEWER
11.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
11 - 19
Key
Function
Scrolls the display area right and left by one sampling.
Scrolls the display area right and left by one page.
Scrolls the display area to the beginning or end of the selected graph.
Enlarges/reduces the display area horizontally.
Moves the selected cursor right and left.
Switches the selected graph up or down.
11.5.2
Legend display
The following explains the legend display.
 Displayed contents
1)
2)
3)
4)
4)
No.
11 - 20
Item
Display contents
1)
Check box
Select the checkbox to display the corresponding graph.
2)
Line type display area
Displays the line type of the target graph.
3)
Data name display area
Displays the data name of the target graph.
When the data name exceeds 12 characters, the first 10 characters are displayed. The rest of the
characters are displayed with [..].
4)
Keys
Keys for operations in the legend display window.
11. LOG VIEWER
11.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
 Key functions
Key
Function
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
Displays or hides all graphs.
/
11.5.3
Upper and lower limit values setting
The following explains the upper and lower limit values setting.
Touch the scale display area to display the following window.
The scale can be changed by changing the upper and lower limit values.
 Displayed contents
1)
2)
3)
No.
Item
1)
Target data display area
Displays the data name and line type of the target data.
2)
Upper limit value display
area
Set the value and exponent of the target data upper limit value.
3)
Lower limit value display
area
Set the value and exponent of the target data lower limit value.
4)
Keys
Keys for operations in the upper and lower limit values setting window.
LOG VIEWER
4)
Display contents
11
 Key functions
Key
/
Function
Closes the upper and lower limit values setting window and cancels the upper and lower limit values
input operation.
The values which are input as upper and lower limits are displayed on the scales.
Deletes an input value or character.
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
11. LOG VIEWER
11.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
11 - 21
11.5.4
Cursor position information
The display screen shows the status that the red cursor is selected.
Time and value of the blue cursor/red cursor whose graph is selected are displayed in the graph area.
 Displayed contents
1) 2)
3)
4)
5)
No.
Item
Display contents
1)
Selecting cursor color
Displays the color of the selected cursor.
The above chart shows the status that [Red cursor] button is touched.
2)
Cursor read value
Displays the value of the intersection of graph and cursor selected in the graph display area.
The above chart shows the value that [Red cursor] button is touched.
3)
Program name
Displays the program name executed in the PLC CPU.
The program name is displayed only when the PLC CPU is selected.
4)
Step number
Displays the step number of the program executed in the PLC CPU.
The step number is displayed only when the PLC CPU is selected.
5)
Cursor display area
Select a graph in the graph display area, to display the time at the cursor position and the value of the
intersection of the selected graph.
Touch the [Blue cursor]/[Red cursor] button to select the target cursor for operating.
The target cursor can be moved by touching the graph display area or the cursor moving buttons.
For [ Difference(blue → red)], the changed amount of [Red cursor] is displayed from [Blue cursor].
11.5.1 Data log viewer screen
11 - 22
11. LOG VIEWER
11.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
11.5.5
Selecting data
Data selection screen displays the data list of the files stored in the selected high speed data logger module/PLC CPU/
BOX data logger or CF card/USB memory.
Up to 16 pieces of data can be selected in the data selection screen.
The following explains the data selection screen.
 Displayed contents
1)
2)
3)
3)
Item
Display contents
1)
Check box
Graph is displayed in the data log viewer by selecting the check box.
2)
Data name list display
area
Displays the data names.
3)
Keys
Keys for operations in the data selection screen.
LOG VIEWER
No.
 Key functions
11
Key
/
Function
Closes the data selection screen, and returns to the log viewer screen.
The logging data selected in the data selection screen is displayed on the data log viewer.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
Selects up to 16 logging data displayed in the data name list display area, from the top.
Cancels all the selected data.
11. LOG VIEWER
11.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
11 - 23
11.5.6
Searching data
On the data search screen, input the time/index to search the data in the graph which is displayed in the data log viewer
screen and shows the data of the files stored in the high speed data logger module/PLC CPU/BOX data logger or CF
card/USB memory.
The following explains the data search screen.
 Displayed contents
3)
1)
2)
4)
4)
When the logging data includes time information
No.
When the logging data does not include time information,
Item
Display contents
1)
Date input area
Input the date to be searched.
When this screen is displayed, the date on the right of the graph at screen opening is displayed.
2)
Time input area
Input the time to be searched.
When this screen is displayed, the time on the right of the graph at screen opening is displayed.
3)
Index number input area
Input the index number to be searched.
When this screen is displayed, the index on the right of the graph at screen opening is displayed.
4)
Keys
Displays the key to be used at the operation in the data search screen.
 Key functions
Key
/
Function
Closes the data search screen.
Searches the graph displayed in the data log viewer screen with the values input in the data search
screen.
11 - 24
11. LOG VIEWER
11.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
11.5.7
Help
The following explains the help window.
Help window displays the contents of icons.
1)
1)
Item
Help window display
area
Display contents
Displays functions of the icons in the window.
Help window closes by touching any place in the help window display area.
While the help window is displayed, touching other than the help window display area is invalid.
LOG VIEWER
No.
11
11. LOG VIEWER
11.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
11 - 25
11.6 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
This section describes the error messages for the log viewer and the corresponding corrective actions.
Error message
Error
Corrective action
Failed to communicate with the specified
destination (IP address).
Confirm the IP address and communication line.
The GOT cannot communicate with the high
speed data logger module or the PLC CPU.
(1) Check the communications between the GOT
and the high speed data logger module or the
PLC CPU, and make sure that the GOT
communicates with the high speed data logger
module or the PLC CPU.
(2) Check that the GOT and the high speed data
logger module or the PLC CPU are connected in
a connection type that can be communicated.
Authentication failed.
Please enter operator name and password
again.
The GOT cannot authenticate because the
operator name and password are incorrect in
access authentication.
Enter the correct operator name and password.
Authentication failed.
Please enter password again.
The GOT cannot authenticate because the
password is incorrect in remote password.
Enter the correct password.
Failed to obtain the data.
The GOT cannot access the file in which the
logging data is stored.
Select the file in which the logging data is stored on
the log viewer screen.
The selected data is not the data of data logging.
Please check the file.
The GOT cannot display the selected data
because it does not comply with data log
viewer.
Select a file which complies with log viewer.
The size of the log file is too large to view with
this function.
The log file cannot be viewed because the file
size of the view target log file is larger than
the file maximum size that can be viewed
with log viewer.
Select a logging data with a file size compatible with
log viewer.
The selected file was not found.
The file structure may have been changed since
the file was previously viewed.
Select a file from the file selection screen.
The file selected in the recently opened files
list screen does not exist.
Select a file from the file selection screen.
Data has not been selected.
Select data.
No data is selected.
Select the data to display in log viewer.
The maximum number of data has already been
selected and additional data cannot be selected.
Cancel unnecessary data and select data again.
Data cannot be selected additionally because
the number of selected data reaches the
upper limit (16) on the data selection screen.
Cancel unnecessary data and select data again.
The entered value is invalid.
Review the value of year, month, date, hour,
minute, and second.
The GOT cannot search because the entered
date and time value is invalid.
Enter the correct value.
Error
The entered value is invalid.
The result should be as follows.
Upper limit > lower limit
The GOT cannot display the value because it
is invalid during the upper and lower limit
values setting.
Enter numerical values that comply with the
following.
Upper limit > lower limit
11 - 26
11. LOG VIEWER
11.6 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.1 Features
The FX ladder monitor enables you to monitor the sequence program within the target controller and change device
values.
It is intended to troubleshoot and maintain the PLC system efficiently.
The features of the FX ladder monitor are shown below.
 The program with ladder symbols can be monitored
You can monitor PLC CPU programs in ladder diagram format and save displayed screens in BMP or JPEG format.
(
12.4 Operation Procedure Common)
FX LADDER MONITOR
(Display example)
 The display format, device comment display and language can be switched
The following can be switched. (
12.5 Switching the Display Format)
• Display format of device values, timer and counter values
• Comment display/non-display of the target device
(Display example)
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.1 Features
12
12 - 1
(1) Switching the display format
The present value of a word device is displayed in a decimal of hexadecimal number in the lower area of the
screen.
12.5.2 Display switching of decimal numbers/hexadecimal numbers
(2) Device comment display
Comments of the devices used in the sequence program (comments written in the controller) are displayed.
12.5.3 Switching comment/no-comment display
 Enhanced interaction with objects
Only by touching an object on a user-created screen, a target device can be searched and displayed. (One-touch
ladder jump function)
Even a person who is not the operator familiar with the equipment inside can trace the source of the equipment error
without fail by simple operations, reducing time to stop the error.
Example) Coil searching by touching a touch switch
(User-created screen)
Operation flow screen
Home position
Lifter down
Lifter down
Hand close
Hand open
Lifter up
Lifter up
Forward
Back
The ladder monitor starts
and searchs for coil "M53"
automatically.
Lifter lower end
X13
Hand close
M52
M54
M53
Lifter up
M54
Forward
M53
Touch the button of error process
Lifter upper end Lifter up
X10
M53
M55
M54
"Forward operation M54" was not turned
on since the lifter upper-end sensor (X10)
was not turned on.
12 - 2
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.1 Features
12.2 Specifications
12.2.1
System configuration
This section describes the system configuration of the FX ladder monitor.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1
 Target controller
Controller
FXCPU*1
*1
The FX3G does not support the FX ladder monitor function.
 Connection type
This function can be used in the following connection types.
(
Function
Search
operation
Display
switching
: Partly restricted,
Description
Direct CPU connection
Ethernet connection
: Unavailable)
Reference
section
Device search, defect search,
etc.
12.6
Displaying word devices in
DEC or HEX
12.5
Displaying device comments,
etc.
Test
operation
Changing device values, etc.
Hard copy
Storing FX ladder monitor
screen in BMP/JPEG format
*1
*2
*1*2
*1*2
12.7
12.4.2
The present value of V and Z cannot be changed.
The set values of T and C cannot be changed.
 Required Extended System application
The extended system applications shown below are required.
1.2 Required extended system application for the function
(1) Extended System application
Write the package data that has the extended system application for the FX ladder monitor to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
12
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
(2) Extended system application space
To write the extended system application to the GOT, certain space of the user area must be reserved for the
application.
For the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data
using other user areas, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
 Display screen for the FX ladder monitor
A sequence program of up to 8 lines (one line: up to 11 contacts (12 or more contacts will be looped back)) is
displayed on a single screen.
In addition, the current values of up to 8 word devices (9 or more devices are displayed by switching the display with
the arrow key) etc. are displayed.
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.2 Specifications
FX LADDER MONITOR
Name
: Available,
Connection form between GOT and controller
12 - 3
12.2.2
Devices and range that can be monitored
(
Device
12.2.3
Device range
Input
X000 to X337 (octadecimal)
Output
Y000 to Y337 (octadecimal)
Auxiliary relay
M0 to M8511
State
S0 to S4095
Timer contact
T0 to T511
Counter contact
C0 to C255
Data register
D0 to D8511
Index register
V0 to V7
Index register
Z0 to Z7
Nesting
N0 to N7
Pointer
P0 to P4095
Interrupt pointer
I00* to I30* (four points) : Fx0
I00* to I50* (six points) : Fx1, Fx2
I6** to I8** (three points) : Fx1, Fx2
I010 to I060 (six points) : Fx1, Fx2
Extension register
R0 to R32767
Access range
For the FX ladder monitor can monitor only the host station.
12 - 4
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.2 Specifications
Ladder display
: Possible,
Device monitor
display
: Impossible)
Search operation
12.2.4
Precautions
(1) Precautions to be taken while the FX ladder monitor is activated
While the FX ladder monitor is activated, do not perform the following for the GOT.
Otherwise, the stored data may be deleted or the FX ladder monitor may not operate normally.
• Open or close the SD card cover
• Installing/removing the data strage
(2) Ladder display
Up to 24 lines can be displayed per ladder block.
If a sequence program is written in which 24 or more lines are used in a ladder block, the ladder cannot be
correctly displayed. It is advisable to divide such programs.
(3) During PLC reading
During PLC reading, only the host station is read.
(4) Notes on reading the contents
(a) An STL (step ladder) command, a dedicated command for the FXCPU, is displayed as shown below.
Ladder monitoring by GOT
Display example of
STL command
STL S0
Y0000
X0000
SET S20
X0000
SET S21
(b) How an INV command is displayed
X000
Y0000
(c)
When searching an STL command, use "S (state)" in a device search.
(d) The 32-bit counters are displayed in 32-bit fixed display in the device monitor.
(e) When using FX3U(C), if the memory capacity is set to 32,000 or higher with the GX Developer PLC
parameters, sequence programs cannot be displayed.
When displaying a sequence program with the GOT, set the memory capacity to 16,000 or less.
(f)
Changes to T/C set values are reflected on the ladder monitor display only when they are made with the
device monitor or test function.
When a value is changed by numerical input or other object, the change is reflected on the display after the
GOT is restarted.
(5) Reading comment files
Only files with the file names (program names) with one-byte alphanumeric characters are applicable to the
GOT.
When project data are created on GX Developer, use only one-byte alphanumeric characters for file names
(program names).
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.2 Specifications
12 - 5
FX LADDER MONITOR
Ladder monitoring by GOT
12
POINT
Reflecting value changes in display of FX ladder monitor screen
For opening the test menu screen from the device monitor screen or user-created screen, even if the set values of
the timer and counter are changed, the changed values are not reflected in the display of the ladder monitor
screen.
For reflecting the changed values in the display of the ladder monitor screen, read the program again.
(a) The following shows the GOT operation when the program in a safety function block has the target of the
search operation.
Search operation
12 - 6
GOT operation
Device search
Contact point search
Coil search
The GOT adds and displays the ladder block that shows the FB definition name in the
application instruction format in the last row.
For the continuous search, when the program in the safety function block has multiple target
devices, the ladder block is added to the last row only one time.
Step search
The GOT displays the ladder block that shows the FB definition name in the application
instruction format corresponding to the searched step.
Defect search
The GOT adds and displays the ladder block that shows the FB definition name in the
application instruction format in the last row and ends the defect search.
(The operaiton is the same as that when all the defective devices are searched.)
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.2 Specifications
12.3 Operation for Display
This section describes the operation procedure from turning on the power to the GOT to ladder monitor function display.
For the ladder monitor start operation when using one-touch ladder jump function, refer to the following.
Start operation when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function
 Start operation for the FX ladder monitor
(1) Normal operation
This subsection describes the flow until the FX ladder monitor operation screen is displayed after an FX ladder
monitor is installed in the GOT.
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT.
Starting from the special
function switch (ladder monitor)
set in the project data
Starting from
the utility
Touch the special function switch.
Display the utility.
Refer to the following manual for how to
set the special function switch.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
FX LADDER MONITOR
After the utility is displayed,
touch [Monitor]
[FX Ladder monitor]
from the Main Menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility).
Read the PLC and display the
sequence program.
12.3 Operation for Display
12
End
POINT
(1) How to display the utility
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
(2) If the project data has not been downloaded
The FX ladder monitor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to the
GOT.
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.3 Operation for Display
12 - 7
 Start operation when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function
By using the special function switch, advanced user alarm display, or others, start the FX ladder monitor, and
sequence program files can be read automatically and devices can be searched automatically.
The following shows objects which can use the One-touch Ladder Jump function.
Object
Special function switch, Alarm display, Simple alarm display
POINT
Before executing the automatic PLC read
(1) Setting the automatic PLC read
When reading a sequence program file or a comment file from controllers, the automatic PLC read have to be
set on GT Designer3 or in the utility.
For the setting of automatic PLC read, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
(2) Specifying an automatic PLC read file
With the special function switch or advanced user alarm display, the target sequence program of automatic
PLC read can be specified in each object setting.
However, the operation differs depending on the automatic PLC read setting on GT Designer3 or in the utility.
Automatic PLC read setting of
GT Designer3/utility
File name specification in
objects
Operation
Done
The specified sequence program file is read automatically.
None
All sequence program files are read automatically.
Done
No sequence program file is read.
To search automatically, if a sequence program file of the specified
file name among the sequence program files read in the GOT
exists, it is executed.
None
No sequence program file is read.
To search automatically, if a sequence program file read in the GOT
exists, it is executed to all files.
Done
None
12 - 8
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.3 Operation for Display
(2) Starting from the special function switch
Select [FX ladder monitor] in [Switch Action], and the [Use One-touch Ladder Jump] check box of the special
function switch. By touching this switch, FX ladder monitor can be started.
Operation at start differs depending on the setting contents of the special function switch.
For the setting items for the special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
(
Setting
Search Method
: Set,
: Not set)
Operation for touching the special function
switch
Specify Search File
(a)
Specify Search Device*1
(b)
*1
When [Specify Search Device] is selected, set [Ladder Search Device] and [Ladder Search Mode].
The setting of PLC station number is included in the [Ladder Search Device] setting.
(a) Operations for searching a device with specifying the file name
Start FX ladder monitor
Automatic PLC read
(The set sequence
program file)
Automatic search for
Ladder Search Device
(Coil/Factor)
FX ladder monitor
screen
(The search result is
displayed.)
(b) Operations for searching a device without specifying the file name
Start Ladder Editor
Automatic PLC read
(All sequence program
files)
Automatic search for
Ladder Search Device
(Coil/Factor)
FX ladder monitor
screen
(The search result is
displayed.)
Operations for the special function switch when not using the One-touch Ladder Jump function
When the [Use One-touch Ladder Jump] is not selected, the operation for touching the special function switch is
the same as when starting from the utility.
In this case, the automatic PLC read is not executed.
Start operation for the FX ladder monitor
FX LADDER MONITOR
HINT
12
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.3 Operation for Display
12 - 9
(3) Starting from the alarm display or simple alarm display
By selecting an alarm in the alarm display or simple alarm display and touching the key code switch (setting the
key code of [Display Ladder]), the FX ladder monitor can be started and the device of alarm can be searched.
Operation at start differs depending on the setting contents of the advanced user alarm observation.
For the setting items for advanced user alarm observation, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
(
Ladder search setting
Ladder Search Mode
Specify Search File
: Set,
: Not set)
Operation for touching the special function
switch
(a)
(b)
(a) Operations for setting the Ladder Search Mode and file name
Start Ladder Editor
Automatic PLC read
(The set sequence
program file)
Automatic search for
Ladder Search Device
(Coil/Factor)
FX ladder monitor
screen
(The search result is
displayed.)
Automatic search for
Ladder Search Device
(Coil/Factor)
FX ladder monitor
screen
(The search result is
displayed.)
(b) Operations for setting the Ladder Search Mode
Start Ladder Editor
12 - 10
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.3 Operation for Display
Automatic PLC read
(All sequence program
files)
 Changing screens
Screen changes of the FX ladder monitor is the same.
Start the ladder monitor.
For further information, refer to the following.
"Operation for display"
When performing the FX ladder
monitor first after starting the GOT
Display format change/
search/Menu window
screen display
When ladder data has already been read
after the GOT was started
Menu
(
3.3.3 Display)
Exit
Enter
Exit
3.3.3 Display)
Ladder
PLCRD.
PLC reading setting
window display
FX LADDER MONITOR
(
PLC reading screen
PLCRD.
(
(
12
3.3.3 Display)
3.3.3 Display)
Exit
When the ladder monitor has
been started from the utility
Exit
Exit
When the ladder monitor has been started
by the special function switch
Switches to the Main
Switches to the
Menu screen.
user-created screen.
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.3 Operation for Display
12 - 11
12.3.1
Display
This subsection describes the procedure for reading the PLC to read the sequence program from the target controller
when the FX ladder monitor is executed, and until the FX ladder monitor screen is displayed.
Utility display
procedure
Section 12.3
PLC reading screen
1.
Touch the
,
,
, and
keys to specify the
following items listed under "READ SECTION."
SETTING/NON SETTING for comment reading
POINT
Displaying the FX ladder monitor screen
The MELSEC-FX ladder monitor screen displays the
sequence program that was executed when the PLC was
read. If any of the set values of the sequence program is
changed, re-read the PLC.
When no keyword is registered
in the target controller
When a keyword is
registered in the
target controller
(Continued to next page)
12 - 12
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.3 Operation for Display
2.
Touch the Keyword key to enter the keyword registered in
the target PLC CPU.
For the FX CPU keyword, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
(From previous page)
3.
The sequence program is read.
• The message "EXECUTING" is displayed.
• The entire size of the program and the portion already read
are displayed.
Portion already read/entire program size
• The reading of the PLC stops by touching the Break key.
The reading of the sequence program is completed.
The message "OPERATION COMPLETE" is displayed.
EXIT
FX LADDER MONITOR
4.
Ladder
Touch
Touch
When the ladder monitor is activated
When the ladder monitor is activated
from the utility
by the special function switch
The screen switches to the
The screen switches to
main menu.
the user-created screen.
Ladder monitor screen
12
POINT
Reading the PLC in the following operations
Once the PLC is read, you do not have to read it in the following operations.
However, it must be re-read after you read it and then downloaded project data and when the power to the GOT is
turned on again.
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.3 Operation for Display
12 - 13
12.3.2
Searching from the monitor screen
When starting an FX ladder monitor with object, coil-search/defect search can be automatically performed to the read
sequence program and the result can be displayed on the monitor.
 Usable objects and functions list
The following table shows the types of objects can be searched from a monitor screen and functions usable in each
object.
For object setting to display searching result on ladder monitor, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
(
: Applicable
: Inapplicable)
Function
Object
Automatic PLC read
Specify Search File
Coil
Factor
Special Function Switch
Alarm Display
Simple Alarm Display
 Searching operation
The following explains the procedure from touching the Key Code Switch for advanced alarm display or Special
Function Switch and performing coil-search or defect search to display of a ladder block.
12 - 14
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.3 Operation for Display
1.
Touch a key in monitor screen.
2.
After the read program is searched, the result is displayed.
3.
Touching the
Touching the
Equipment
Exit
button searches consecutively.
button completes searching halfway.
Touch
4.
If the searched device is not found in the read program, the
message "DEVICE NOT FOUND" appears and searching
is completed.
After searching, the program that has been read first is
displayed on the FX ladder monitor screen.
When the searched
device is found
Exit
The ladder
monitor screen
is displayed.*
FX LADDER MONITOR
When the searched
device is not found
The user-created
screen is
displayed.
* After coil-search, monitoring of the displayed ladder starts
automatically.
12
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.3 Operation for Display
12 - 15
12.4 Operation Procedure Common
This section describes the information and key functions displayed on the FX ladder monitor screen.
12.4.1
Information and key functions displayed on the screen
POINT
After executing PLC reading, if the controller comment or comment capacity is changed, the comment may not be
correctly displayed on the FX ladder monitor screen.
When changing the comment or comment capacity, re-start the GOT.
(1) When the FX ladder monitor is executed
(a) Display monitor
4)
When comment is not displayed
When comment is displayed
:maximum 8 lines
:maximum 3 lines
ON/OFF status display for ladder monitor
1)
ON status
OFF status
* The MCR command is normally displayed as
.
2)
3)
The information shown in the table below is displayed.
No.
1)
Description
Sequence program is displayed.
A maximum of 11 contact points is displayed in one line of a ladder; for 12 contact points or more, move to the next line.
When a comment display is specified, a comment is also displayed; expanded comments are given priority.
For the method of displaying comments, see the following:
12.5.3 Switching comment/no-comment display
2)
A maximum of eight devices is displayed for the word device current value, timer and counter current value (upper row), and
set value (lower row). When the set value is an indirect specification, the value of the indirectly specified device is displayed.
To switch between decimal and hexadecimal for the displayed value, see the following:
12.5.2 Display switching of decimal numbers/hexadecimal numbers
12 - 16
3)
Display the keys used with the operation on the FX ladder monitor screen shown in (b)
(Touch input).
4)
The display step number (left) and the remaining step number (right) are displayed.
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.4 Operation Procedure Common
(b) Key functions
Key
Exit
PLCRD.
Function
Returns the screen to the one displayed when the FX ladder monitor was activated.
Switches the screen to the PLC reading screen to read from the controller the sequence program to be monitored.
For further information about PLC reading, see the following:
12.3.1 Display
Mon.
Starts monitoring the displayed sequence program.
Menu
Displays the Menu window for FX ladder monitor (
List
Starts the list editor for FX.
For details on the FX list editor, refer to the following.
(2) Menu window for the FX ladder monitor).
13. FX LIST EDITOR
Scrolls the information upward by a ladder block.
Scrolls the information downward by a ladder block.
When the number of devices whose present and set values are within the display range shown in 2) on the preceding
page is nine or more, the devices to be displayed are switched.
Scrolls the information downward by a screen.
In search operation, a search is continuously performed under the same conditions.
Cancel
Print
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, see the following:
12.4.2 Hard copy output
The operation of this key is invalid.
FX LADDER MONITOR
Print
Screen
12
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.4 Operation Procedure Common
12 - 17
(2) Menu window for the FX ladder monitor
(a) Display screen
(b) Key functions
Key
Dev.Sea.
Cont.Sea
Function
Displays the ladder block containing the specified device.
12.6.1 Device search
Displays the ladder block containing the specified device.
12.6.2 Contact point search
Displays the ladder block containing the specified coil.
Coil.Sea.
Search
operation
12.6.3 Coil search
Displays the ladder block containing the specified step number.
Step.Sea
12.6.4 Step search
Displays the last ladder block of the sequence program.
End.Sea.
Xref.
12.6.5 Ladder end search
Searches the ladder blocks for the status of continuity/non-continuity of the contact point that turned
on or off the coil on the sequence program.
12.6.6 Defect search
16/32Bit
Switches the word device and timer/counter values displayed on the FX ladder monitor
screen to the 16-bit (one-word) or 32-bit (two-word) module.
12.5.1 Display switching of 16-bit (one-word)/32-bit (two-word) modules
Display
format
switching
Switches the word device and timer/counter values displayed on the FX ladder monitor screen to
Dec.Hex.
TEST
Switches whether to display the comments added to the word and bit devices displayed on the FX
ladder monitor screen.
12.5.3 Switching comment/no-comment display
Changes device values on the screen when the FX ladder monitor is executed. For further information,
see the following:
12.7 Test Operation
12 - 18
12.5.2 Display switching of decimal numbers/hexadecimal
numbers
Cmnt.
Test
operation
decimal or hexadecimal numbers.
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.4 Operation Procedure Common
12.4.2
Hard copy output
This section describes how to store an FX ladder monitor screen to the data strage in BMP/JPEG file format or print it
with a printer.
Touch [Print
Screen]
A BMP/JPEG file will be stored on the
standard CF card inserted in the GOT.
FX LADDER MONITOR
POINT
• The output target of hard copy can be set in Hard Copy of GT Designer3.
For details of hard copy setting, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
• When outputting a hard copy, the display can be inverted between white and black.
For invert colors setting, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
12
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.4 Operation Procedure Common
12 - 19
12.5 Switching the Display Format
You can switch the display format (16-bit (one-word) module/32-bit (two word) module or decimal number/hexadecimal
number) of word device and timer/counter values displayed on the FX ladder monitor screen, and whether to display the
comments to the target devices.
12.5.1
Display switching of 16-bit (one-word)/32-bit (two-word) modules
During monitoring, the present values of word devices (except timers and counters) are displayed in the 16-bit or 32-bit
module. These modules switch alternately each time you press the 16/32Bit
key.
POINT
Displaying timers and counters
You cannot switch the 16-bit (one-word) or 32-bit (two-word) module with regard to the present and set values of
timers and counters. The GOT automatically selects to display them in the 16-bit (one-word) or 32-bit (two-word)
module.
(Operation example: Switch 16-bit (one-word) module display to 32-bit (two-word) module display.)
1. Touch Mon. .
Touch "Mon."
Device values displayed
2.
Touch Menu .
3.
Touch 16/32Bit .
4.
The word devices are displayed in the 32-bit (twoword) module.
Touch "Menu"
Menu window
Touch
"16/32Bit"
12 - 20
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.5 Switching the Display Format
12.5.2
Display switching of decimal numbers/hexadecimal numbers
During monitoring, the present values of word devices and the present values (upper values) and set values (lower
values) of timers/counters are displayed in decimal or hexadecimal numbers. The display formats switch alternately each
time you press the Dec.Hex.
key.
(Example of operation: Switching the decimal display to the hexadecimal display.)
1.
Touch Mon. .
2.
Touch Menu .
3.
Touch Dec.Hex. .
4.
The values are displayed in hexadecimal
numbers.
Touch "Mon."
Device values displayed
Menu window
FX LADDER MONITOR
Touch "Menu"
Touch
"Dec.Hex."
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.5 Switching the Display Format
12
12 - 21
12.5.3
Switching comment/no-comment display
Comments written in the target controller are displayed. Comment display and no-comment display switch alternately
each time you press the Cmnt. key.
1.
Touch Menu .
2.
Touch Cmnt. .
3.
Comments are displayed.
Each comment is displayed in five characters on
three lines.
Touch "Menu"
Touch "Cmnt."
12 - 22
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.5 Switching the Display Format
12.6 Search Operation
This section describes device search, contact point search, coil search, step search, ladder end search, defect search,
and touch search.
12.6.1
Device search
Device search displays the ladder block that contains a specified device.
<Operation procedure>
1.
Touch Menu .
2.
Touch Dev.Sea. .
3.
Using the
and
keys, switch the input
area, and enter a device name and its number. *1
Example: Specify D0.
After the device name and its number are entered,
touch the Enter key. Input is completed, and the
keyboard closes.
Touch "MENU"
Menu window
*1
The data entered can be corrected with the
following keys:
Del
AC
4.
key: Used to delete a character of the
entered information.
key : Used to delete all characters
entered.
The ladder block containing the specified device is
displayed.
The device is highlighted as shown in the display
example below.
(Display example)
D0
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.6 Search Operation
12 - 23
FX LADDER MONITOR
Touch "Dev.Sea."
12
POINT
(1) Continuous read based on the same device
After a search, a continuous search can be performed based on the same device by touching
screen.
If you touch
another key, the continuous read function will be canceled.
(2) FX ladder monitor display after a search
The ladder block containing the searched device is displayed.
Example) 1) When the entered device you want to search is "D0"
2) When the same search is continued
The ladder is displayed
on the following line.
12 - 24
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.6 Search Operation
on the
12.6.2
Contact point search
Contact search displays the ladder block that contains a specified contact point.
<Operation procedure>
1.
Touch Menu .
2.
Touch Cont.Sea .
3.
Using the
and
keys, switch the input area,
and enter a device name and its number. *1
Example: Specify X1.
After the device name and its number are entered,
touch the Enter key. Input is completed, and the
keyboard closes.
Touch "MENU"
Menu window
Touch
*1
4.
The data entered can be corrected with the
following keys:
Del
key: Used to delete a character of the
entered information.
AC
key: Used to delete all characters
entered.
The ladder block containing the specified contact
point is displayed.
The contact point is highlighted as shown in the
display example below.
(Display example)
X1
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.6 Search Operation
12 - 25
FX LADDER MONITOR
"Cont. Sea."
12
POINT
(1) Continuous read based on the same contact point
After a search, a continuous search can be performed based on the same contact point by touching
the screen.
If you touch another
key, the continuous read function will be canceled.
(2) FX ladder monitor display after a search
The ladder block containing the searched contact point is displayed.
Example) 1) When the entered contact point you want to search is "X1"
2) When the same search is continued
The ladder is displayed
on the following line.
12 - 26
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.6 Search Operation
on
12.6.3
Coil search
Coil search displays the ladder block that contains a specified coil.
<Operation procedure>
1.
Touch Menu .
2.
Touch Coil.Sea. .
3.
Using the
and
keys, switch the input
area, and Enter a device name and its number.*1
Example: Specify T0.
After the device name and its number are entered,
touch the Enter key. Input is completed, and the
keyboard closes.
Touch "MENU"
Menu window
Touch
*1
The data entered can be corrected with the
following keys:
Del
AC
4.
key: Used to delete a character of the
entered information.
key : Used to delete all characters
entered.
The ladder block containing the specified coil is
displayed.
The coil name is highlighted as shown in the
display example below.
(Display example)
T0
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.6 Search Operation
12 - 27
FX LADDER MONITOR
"Coil Sea."
12
POINT
(1) Continuous read based on the same coil
After a search, a continuous search can be performed based on the same coil by touching
screen.
If you touch another key, the continuous read function will be canceled.
(2) FX ladder monitor display after a search
The ladder block containing the searched coil is displayed.
Example) 1) When the entered coil you want to search is "M120"
2) When the same search is continued
The ladder is displayed
on the following line.
12 - 28
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.6 Search Operation
on the
12.6.4
Step search
Step search displays the ladder block that contains a specified step number.
<Operation procedure>
1.
Touch Menu .
2.
Touch Step.Sea. .
3.
Enter a step number.*1
Example: Specify step No. 40.
After the step number is entered, touch the
Enter key. Input is completed, and the keyboard
closes.
Touch "MENU"
Menu window
Touch
*1
The data entered can be corrected with
the following keys:
Del
key: Used to delete a character of
the entered information.
AC
4.
key : Used to delete all characters
entered.
The ladder block is displayed with the specified
step number at the top.
(Display example)
The ladder block of step No. 40 is displayed.
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.6 Search Operation
12 - 29
FX LADDER MONITOR
"Step.Sea."
12
12.6.5
Ladder end search
Ladder end search displays the last ladder block of the sequence program.
<Operation procedure>
1.
Touch Menu .
2.
Touch End.Sea. .
3.
The last ladder block is displayed (the end
command is not displayed).
The message "CIRCUIT_END" will be displayed.
Touch "MENU"
Menu window
Touch
"End.Sea."
12 - 30
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.6 Search Operation
12.6.6
Defect search
Defect search searches the ladder block for the status of conductive/non-conductive of the contact point that turned on or
off the coil on the sequence program.
<Operation procedure>
1.
Touch Mon. .
2.
Touch Menu .
3.
Touch Xref. .
4.
Select a coil, if necessary.
Using the
and
keys, switch the input area,
and enter the device name and its number of the
selected coil.*1
Example: Specify M120.
After the device name and its number are entered,
touch the Enter key. Input is completed, and the
keyboard closes.
Touch "Mon."
Touch "MENU"
*1
The data entered can be corrected with
the following keys:
Del
key: Used to delete a character of
the entered information.
AC
5.
key : Used to delete all characters
entered.
A search for the device begins, and the research
result is displayed.
To cancel a defect search, touch ESC .
During a defect search, all key operations except
ESC and Exit are invalid.
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.6 Search Operation
12 - 31
FX LADDER MONITOR
Touch "Xref."
12
POINT
Operation before a defect search
In the case of the FX ladder monitor, touch Mon. before starting a defect search.
If you touch Xref. without touching Mon. , the message "NO MONITORING" will be displayed.
(1) Search result
Search results reveal any occurrences of the search device. They are useful when you determine whether a
defective device is conductive or nonconductive.
If any occurrence of the search device is not found as a result of the search, a message appears on-screen,
telling that "PROGRAM NOT FOUND."
(a) When an occurrence of the search device is found:
If an occurrence of the search device is found as a result of the search, the search for another defective
device will automatically be started.
Example: After searching for Device M120 that is in the OFF state, "M669" will be displayed as a device
that caused a failure.
After searching for Coil M120 that is in the OFF state,
"M669" is displayed as a device that is not conductive.
Example:
* After searching for a device that is in the ON state, a
device that is conductive is displayed. The entire field of
the device name and number is highlighted on-screen.
Example:
After searching for Coil M669 that is in the OFF state,
"M111" is displayed as a device that is not conductive.
Example:
When there is no more defect, the "FACTOR SEARCH
STOP" will be displayed, and the defect search will end.
The next defect is automatically
searched.
12 - 32
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.6 Search Operation
(b) When two occurrences of the search device are found.
If there are two or more devices that caused a failure, the "the defect search is interrupted" message
appears and the defect search is terminated.
Example: After searching for Device M120 that is in the OFF state, "M669" and "M23" will be displayed as
devices that caused a failure.
After searching for coil M120 that is in the OFF state, “M669“ and “M23” are
displayed as devices that are not conductive.
Example:
,
* After searching for a device that is in the ON state, devices that are conductive
are displayed. The entire field of the device name and number is highlighted onscreen.B
Example:
,
When resuming the defect search, specify either of the found contacts M669 and X0025. After touching ESC
to change it into Menu , execute the defect search.
POINT
Precautions for making defect search
(1) When the contact point searched is a b contact point
If a B-contact is found defective as a result of the defect search, a search for the cause of the ON/OFF state
will be automatically switched.
(3) Display of defect search results
While the search result is displayed after the end of the defect search, the searched ladder can be displayed
JUMP .
backwards by pressing
(single ladder block scroll) or JUMP
Up to 100 ladders can be displayed on-screen. The following messages will appear at the start or the end of
the search results.
• When viewing the start of search results: "This is the start of search results."
• When viewing the end of the search results: "This is the end of search results."
(4) Display of contact point and coil ON/OFF
1) During automatic search execution
Displays ON/OFF in the entire ladder displayed on the screen.
2) During search result display
The ON/OFF of the ladder block searched last and the monitor results of word devices are displayed.
(5) Switching the Menu / ESC key switch
When the defect serch starts, Menu change into ESC .
Touch ESC during the defect search to stop the defect search and display the search result.
Further, touch ESC to change ESC into Menu and display the normal ladder.
(6) Screen display during a defect search
1) If the display data exceeds one screen during the defect search
The screen is scrolled automatically.
2) If the ladder step searched during the defect search exceeds one screen
The screen is scrolled automatically to the last line of the ladder step.
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.6 Search Operation
12 - 33
FX LADDER MONITOR
(2) Screen display after a defect search
After the end of the defect search, the GOT stops monitor and displays the search result.
Hence, the monitor screen of the GOT shows the result retained during the defect search.
12
(7) Screen display when you touch the ESC key
Touching ESC can stop the defect search. Search results are continuously displayed on-screen until ESC
is touched.
The ladder step searched last is displayed as described below.
ON/OFF display is not provided.
12 - 34
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.6 Search Operation
12.7 Test Operation
You can change device values and turn on and off bit devices on the screen when the FX ladder monitor is executed.
This section describes how to display the test menu screen.
For the procedure for changing device values and turning on and off bit devices, see the following.
2.3.8 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])
12.7.1
Displaying the test menu screen
(1) Displaying the test menu screen
The procedure for displaying the test menu screen during FX ladder monitoring is described below.
1.
Touch Menu .
2.
Touch TEST .
3.
The test menu screen is displayed.
Change device values by operating the window.
For further information about the operation
procedure, see the following:
2.3.8 Test operation for the monitor device
([Test])
Word device values displayed
Touch "Test"
12
POINT
The present and set values of word devices are
hidden behind the test menu screen.
You can display hidden present and set values by
Test menu screen
scrolling them to the right or left using the
or
key.
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.7 Test Operation
FX LADDER MONITOR
Touch "MENU"
12 - 35
12.8 Error Messages and Corrective Action
This section describes the error messages displayed when the FX ladder monitor function is executed, and corrective
action.
Error message
Description
Corrective action
ENTRY CODE MISMATCH
The specified keyword is different from the
keyword that is registered in the object
PLC CPU.
Check the keyword that is registered in the object PLC CPU
and specify again.
FILE NOT FOUND
(1) An attempt was made to switch to the FX
ladder monitor screen when a sequence
program had not been read.
(2) When the file is selected and the "Read"
key is pressed, the selected file does not
exist in the PLC drive.
Read the sequence program that written in the object PLC
CPU.
PLC COMMUNICATION ERROR
(1) Cannot communicate with PLC CPU of
the specified network No. or station No.
(2) The specified drive does not exist.
Check and correct the following:
(1) Does the specified PLC CPU exist?
(2) Is it online? (Data communication status?)
(3) Has an error occurred?
(4) Power on the GOT again.
and so on.
No END instruction.
The sequence program has no END
instruction.
Check the sequence program with the peripheral device (GX
Developer).
Instruction code abnormal.
The sequence program has an abnormal
command code.
Check the sequence program with the peripheral device (GX
Developer).
Ladder creation bad.
The sequence program has an abnormal
circuit.
Check the sequence program with the peripheral device (GX
Developer).
Please release the keyword.
Communication is not possible because a
keyword is registered in the target PLC. (For
FX3U(C) only)
Release the keyword for the target PLC.
The keyword is registered.
A keyword is set to the PLC that is targeted
to the PLC reading on the PLC reading
screen.
Release the keyword for the target PLC.
PLC is protected.
The sequence program is protected by a
block password at the PLC reading. (For
FXCPU only)
Release the block password for the sequence program.
12 - 36
12. FX LADDER MONITOR
12.8 Error Messages and Corrective Action
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.1 Features
The MELSEC-FX list editor enables you to change the sequence program in the FX PLC.
This function is intended to troubleshoot the PLC system and to streamline maintenance operations.
The features of the MELSEC-FX list editor are described below.
 Parameters and sequence programs are easy to maintain.
You can check or partly correct, change or add FX PLC CPU parameters and sequence programs simply by
operating keys.
You can easily edit sequence programs without preparing any peripheral unit other than the GOT.
(Example of changing sequence program commands)
Changed
LD
X000
OUT Y020
LD
X001
LD
OUT
LD
X000
Y030
X001
 Combination with the FX ladder monitor
FX LIST EDITOR
You can open the MELSEC-FX List Editor window from the Ladder Monitor screen with a single touch.
You can edit PLC program while checking the ladder.
You can also display a list from the step line displayed by the ladder monitor.
13
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.1 Features
13 - 1
 Errors that occur during list editing can be checked easily.
Error messages, error codes, and number of steps for errors that occur in the FX PLC can be checked.
Details can be checked immediately even for errors that occur during list editing.
 Commands and devices can be searched and displayed.
Commands and devices used in sequence programs can be searched.
The correction position can be searched for cases such as when you want to correct a specific device.
Searched device
M800
Displays the searched device.
LD
OUT
LD
13 - 2
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.1 Features
M 800
T
10
K
100
X 002
13.2 Specifications
13.2.1
System configuration
This section describes the system configuration of the MELSEC-FX list editor.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Version1
 Controllers that can be edited with the MELSEC-FX list editor
Target controller
FXCPU
 Connection forms
This function can be used in the following connection types.
(
Function name
Name
*1
*2
: Unavailable)
Connection form between GOT and PLC
Description
MELSEC-FX list editor
: Available,
Direct CPU connection
Sequence program writing, parameter setting,
PLC diagnostics and keyword registration, etc.
Ethernet connection*1
*2
MELSEC-FX list editor cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.
Available only when using FX3U or FX3UC.
 Required extended system application
The extended system applications shown below are required.
1.2 Required extended system application for the function
(1) Extended System Apprication
Write the package data that has the extended system application for the intelligent module monitor to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
To write the extended system application to the GOT, certain space of the user area must be reserved for the
application.
For the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data
using other user areas, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
FX LIST EDITOR
(2) Extended System Apprication space
13
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.2 Specifications
13 - 3
 Functions list and monitor conditions
The following shows the memory that can be monitored by the MELSEC-FX list editor and the FX PLC status
conditions.
(
: Can be monitored
: Can be monitored under certain conditions
: Cannot be monitored)
Memory that can be monitored *2
Function
Built-in memory
RAM memory
cassette
EEPROM
memory
cassette, flash
memory
cassette
Displaying sequence
programs
Reading
sequence
programs
FX PLC
status
RUN/
STOP
Searching commands/
devices
Writing
sequence
programs
EPROM
memory
cassette
Reference
Section
5.4.3
Section
5.4.4
Writing commands
Section
5.4.5
Changing operands/set
values
Section
5.4.6
*1
Inserting commands
For Stop
only
Section
5.4.5
Deleting commands
Section
5.4.7
Sequence program all clear
Section
5.4.8
PLC diagnostics
RUN/
STOP
Section
5.4.9
Display
Parameter setting
Set
For Stop
only
RUN/
STOP
Keyword
*1
*2
The operation is available only when the protect switch is OFF.
The available memory differs depending on the FX PLC being used.
For further information, see the following.
The hardware manual of the FX PLC being used
13 - 4
*1
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.2 Specifications
Section
5.4.10
Section
5.4.11
13.2.2
Access range
For the FXCPU in Ethernet connection, the GOT can monitor only the host station.
The access range other than the above is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller.
For details of the access range, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Product) For GT Works3 Version1
13.2.3
Precautions
(1) Inapplicable GOT
The MELSEC-FX list editor cannot be used with the GOTs shown below.
GOT
GT10
Inapplicable GOT
GT1030, GT1020
(2) Using other peripheral equipment for sequence program/parameter change
When using the MELSEC-FX list editor, do not change programs or parameters in the PLC CPU from other
peripheral equipment.
If you make a change, temporarily exit the MELSEC-FX list editor after the change is made, then start the
MELSEC-FX list editor again.
If you carelessly change the program on one PLC from multiple units of peripheral equipment (including GOT),
the contents of the program in the PLC CPU and the peripheral equipment may not be the same, resulting in an
unintended operation of the PLC CPU.
(3) Sequence program change
Stop the FX PLC before changing (writing, inserting, deleting) a sequence program or changing parameters.
Operation is not possible with the FX PLC running.
(4) If you press the GO key but the system does not proceed to the next operation (for example, a
search)
Check the input contents (applied instruction number, device value, etc.).
(5) When used together with the FX ladder monitor
Even if you execute the MELSEC-FX list editor with the FX ladder monitor activated, edited information will not
be reflected on the FX ladder monitor screen.
To reflect such edited information, perform the PLC reading of the FX ladder monitor again.
(6) When using list monitor
FX LIST EDITOR
Only devices to be used for basic instructions can be monitored.
The status of devices (word, bit) to be used for application instructions cannot be monitored.
13
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.2 Specifications
13 - 5
13.3 Operations for Display
This subsection describes an outline until the device monitor screen is displayed after List editor for MELSEC-FX (Option
OS) is installed in the GOT.
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT.
When starting the List
editor for MELSEC-FX
from the ladder monitor
Starting from the special function
switch (MELSEC-FX list editor)
set in the project data
Starting from the
utility
Display the utility.
Example)
After the utility is displayed, touch
[Monitor] [MELSEC-FX List editor]
from the Main Menu.
For how to display the utility, refer
to the following manual.
Touch the special function switch.
Activate the MELSEC-FX list editor
on the Ladder monitor screen.
Touch "List"
Refer to the following manual for
how to set the special function switch.
GOT2000 Series
User’s Manual (Utility)
GT Designer3 (GOT2000)
Help
12. FX LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION
Set the Channel No.
Set the channel number of
the controller targeted to the
MELSEC-FX list editor.
Communication
setting window
When no keyword
is registered in the
connected FX PLC
When a keyword is
registered in the
connected FX PLC
Enter the keyword.
13.4.11 Keywords
The MELSEC-FX list editor is started.
End
13 - 6
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.3 Operations for Display
POINT
(1) How to display the utility
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
(2)
Displaying communication setting window
After turning on the GOT, the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the MELSECFX list editor only.
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch [ChNo.] on the
MELSEC-FX list editor screen. (
13.4 Operation Procedures)
FX LIST EDITOR
(3) If the project data has not been downloaded
The MELSEC-FX list editor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to
the GOT.
13
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.3 Operations for Display
13 - 7
 Change screens
This section describes how to change the screen.
Start
Utility Main Menu
or
user-created monitor screen
Communication setting window
[ChNo.]
MORE
MORE
OP
CLR
OP
CLR
[PLC
diagnostics]
GO
[Parameter
setting]
GO
[Keyword
setup]
GO
*1
[List
Monitor]
*1
With setting special function switches (FX list monitor), the list monitor can be started on the monitor screen.
When the list monitor is started on the monitor screen, the list editor cannot be used.
For how to set special function switches, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
13 - 8
GO
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.3 Operations for Display
13.4 Operation Procedures
This section describes the contents of the MELSEC-FX list editor and the key functions displayed on the screen.
13.4.1
Key arrangement and a list of key functions
The arrangement and functions of the keys displayed on the MELSEC-FX List Editor window are described below.
Displayed contents
2)
1)
3)
4)
No.
1)
Item
Channel No.
5)
Description
Displays the currently selected channel number.
Touching "ChNo." displays the communication setting window.
The communication setting window is not displayed if the MELSEC-FX list editor is started from the FX
ladder monitor.
Displays a mode for MELSEC-FX list editor.
2)
Mode
(
13.4.2 Selection and operation of modes)
[Monitor] is displayed when the list monitor is executed.
(
FX LIST EDITOR

13.4.12 List monitor)
Displays the contents of errors that occur with the MELSEC-FX list editor.
3)
Error message
4)
List display area
Displays the sequence program in list format (12 digits).
The position (line) that can be edited is displayed with a bar.
5)
Key area
Displays the keys that can be used with the MELSEC-FX list editor.
(
13.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions)
13
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
13 - 9
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the MELSEC-FX list editor screen.
Key
Function
Displays the communication setting window.
The communication setting window is not displayed if the MELSEC-FX list editor is started from
the FX ladder monitor.
Selects a mode for MELSEC-FX list editor. (
13.4.2 Selection and operation of modes)
Displays the PLC diagnostics, parameter setting, and keyword selection menu.
Switches between command keyboard 1 and command keyboard 2.
(
Keyboard switching)
When inputting commands: Cancels the key input when only part of the command has been input.
(
13.4.14 Action for an incorrect key input)
When option menu is displayed: Closes the option menu.
Commands cannot be deleted with this key.
(
13.4.7 Deleting commands)
Space key.
This key is used when setting timers and counters, writing applied commands, etc.
Displays the list from a specified step No. when the step No. is input.
Moves the list display area bar up and down and switches the line being edited.
Determines the key operation.
to
,
to
, etc.
Inputs commands, device names, etc.
The key contents depend on the input contents.
The commands that can be used differ depending on the target FX PLC.
Refer to the manual for the FX PLC to be used.
Exits the MELSEC-FX list editor.
 Keyboard switching
Touching the MORE button switches the command keyboard 1 and command keyboard 2.
When you touch the button for a keyboard function, the optimum keyboard for input for that function is displayed
automatically.
Command keyboard 1
Command keyboard 2
Touch
Touch
13 - 10
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
13.4.2
Selection and operation of modes
The MELSEC-FX list editor has four modes: READ, WRITE, INSERT, and DELETE.
Select an appropriate mode for the intended operation.
For more information on the mode to select, refer to the function operations from subsection 5.4.3 onward.
 How to change modes
Touch the MODE button.
Each time you touch this button, the mode changes.
Touch the
button.
The current mode is displayed.
 In the case the mode cannot be changed
In the following cases, only READ mode is allowed.
If you try to change to other than READ mode, an error message is displayed.
To change to other than READ mode, take the action below.
Error Message
PLC is running
Description
Corrective action
The FX PLC is in the RUN status.
Stop the FX PLC.
The protect switch of the EEPROM memory cassette
is on.
Switch off the protect switch of the EEPROM
memory cassette.
The EPROM memory cassette is enabled.
Set a memory other than EPROM as the memory to
write to.
FX LIST EDITOR
Can not write.
13
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
13 - 11
13.4.3
Sequence program display
Sequence programs are read from the FX PLC to the GOT and displayed.
There are two displaying methods: specifying the step number, and scrolling one screen at a time.
 Display using cursor keys
(1) Operation
Scroll with
or
.
(2) Example
Scroll one line upward or downward.
128
129
MPP
DIV
23
D56
K200
Scrolling one line upward
128
129
MPP
DIV
Scrolling one line downward
128
129
23
MPP
DIV
23
D56
K200
D56
K200
 Display specifying the step number
(1) Operation
STEP
Input the step number.
GO
(2) Example
Displaying step number 123.
0
1
2
3
LD
OUT
LDI
MOV
X 000
Y 000
M 100
12
STEP
Step number
123
3
MOV
Input the step number
12
GO
123
MOV
12
K 200
D 58
128
MPP
HINT
When the specified step number is the operand of an applied instruction
If the specified step number is a timer (T) or counter (C) set value or the operand of an applied instruction, that
command section is displayed at the head.
13 - 12
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
 Display scrolling one screen at a time
(1) Operation
MODE
(Read mode)
GO
(2) Example
Displaying with scrolling one screen at a time.
< WRITE >
ChNo.[1]
MODE
ChNo.[1]
< READ >
Set the READ mode.
GO
MOV
12
K 200
D 58
128
Displaying with scrolling
one screen at a time.
MPP
FX LIST EDITOR
123
13
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
13 - 13
13.4.4
Searching commands and devices
Displays a command or device by searching it in sequence program from Step 0.
 Command search
(1) Operation
*1
*1
*2
*3
Input the device name and
device number.
Select the command
to search for.
MODE
(Read mode)
GO
GO
If the command you want to search for is not on the keyboard, touch the MORE key to switch to the other keyboard.
When searching for an applied instruction, touch the FNC key and input the applied instruction number.
When searching for a label, touch P or I and input the pointer number.
13.4.5 Writing applied instructions
(
*2
Input only when searching for commands requiring a device name and device number.
*3
After the search results are displayed, you can continue searching with the same conditions by touching the GO key.
Touching any key other than the GO key ends the search.
(2) Example
Searching for LD M8000
Search command
< WRITE >
ChNo.[1]
LD
3
MOV
12
MODE
M
ChNo.[1]
< READ >
Set the
READ mode.
8
8 LD
9 OUT
0
M
T
K
LD
(
Select the command
to search for.
)
12
LD
GO
24
25
LD
OUT
28
OUT
X
Pointer (P, I) searches
For pointer searches, only labels are searched.
Pointers specified as operands in applied instructions are not searched.
13 - 14
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
0
GO
8000
10
100
002
(Continue to search with the
same conditions)
M
T
K
POINT
0
T
8000
0
100
1
 Device search
(1) Operation
*1
MODE
Input the device name and
device number.
SP
GO
GO
(Read mode)
*1
After the search results are displayed, you can continue searching with the same conditions by touching the GO key.
Touching any key other than the GO key ends the search.
(2) Example
Searching for LD M8000
Search device
< WRITE >
ChNo.[1]
M8000
3
MOV
12
MODE
GO
ChNo.[1]
< READ >
Set the
READ mode.
8 LD
9 OUT
12 LD
SP
M
8
0
0
M 8000
10
K
100
X
002
T
0
GO
24 LD
25 OUT
28
OUT
(Continue to search with the
same conditions)
M 8000
0
K
100
T
1
T
POINT
FX LIST EDITOR
Devices that cannot be searched
The following devices cannot be searched.
• Pointers, interrupt pointers
• Constant K, constant H, constant E
• Bit devices with specifying numbers only
• Special function unit/block buffer memory
• Devices specified with the operand of an applied instruction
Pointers and interrupt pointers can be searched for with command searches.
(
Command search )
13
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
13 - 15
13.4.5
Writing commands
Writes a sequence program to the FX PLC. (Overwrite/Insert)
 Writing basic commands
(1) Operations
(a) Inputting command only (Ex.: ANB, ORB command etc.)
Stop the FX PLC
Input the command
MODE
GO
For overwriting: (WRITE mode)
For insertion: (INSERT mode)
(b) Inputting command and device (LD, AND commands etc.)
Stop the FX PLC
Input the command
MODE
For overwriting: (WRITE mode)
For insertion: (INSERT mode)
Input the device name and device number
(c)
GO
Inputting command, No. 1 device, No. 2 device (MC, OUT (T, C) commands, etc.)
Stop the FX PLC
Input the command
MODE
Input the device name and device number
For overwriting: (WRITE mode)
For insertion: (INSERT mode)
Input the device name and device number
SP
GO
POINT
Moving the cursor to the position to write the command
When starting to write a command, place the cursor on the command line (the line on which the step number is
displayed).
You cannot write a command with the cursor on an operand or set value line.
2
3
LDI
MOV
M
100
Command line (Place the cursor on this line.)
12
D
D
0
10
Operand, set value line (Cannot operate on this line.)
(2) Example
(a) Writing ORB command
Stop the FX PLC
4
5
6
7
< WRITE >
ChNo.[1]
LDI
AND
NOP
NOP
X
X
004
005
MODE
ORB
ChNo.[1]
< READ >
With
or
, move the
cursor to the position to
overwrite/insert the command.
13 - 16
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
Set the
WRITE or
INSERT
mode
4
5
6
7
LDI
AND
ORB
NOP
GO
X
X
004
005
(b)
Inputting LD X000
Stop the FX PLC
0
1
2
3
< WRITE >
ChNo.[1]
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
MODE
LD
ChNo.[1]
< READ >
Set the
WRITE or
INSERT
mode.
0
1
2
3
With
or
, move the
cursor to the position to
overwrite/insert the command.
(c)
X
LD
NOP
NOP
NOP
0
X
000
M
100
GO
Inputting OUT T100 K19
Stop the FX PLC
100
101
102
103
OUT
NOP
NOP
NOP
< WRITE >
ChNo.[1]
T
OUT
100
MODE
< READ >
100
101
OUT
OUT
103
NOP
M
T
SP
With
or
, move the
cursor to the position to
overwrite/insert the command.
100
101
OUT
OUT
104
NOP
100
100
K
M
T
K
19
GO
100
100
19
FX LIST EDITOR
ChNo.[1]
Set the
WRITE or
INSERT
mode.
 Writing applied instructions
(1) Operations
*1
Stop the FX PLC
MODE
FNC
D
13
Applied instruction number
For overwriting: (WRITE mode)
For insertion: (INSERT mode)
*1
P
SP
Input the device name and
device number.
GO
*2
*1
D (double word command) and P (pulse execution format command) can also be input after the applied instruction number is
input.
Inputting in the order P
*2
D is also possible.
When a command specifies multiple devices for operations, input the SP key followed by the device name and device number.
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
13 - 17
POINT
(1) Moving the cursor to the position to write the command
When starting to write a command, place the cursor on the command line (the line on which the step number
is displayed).
You cannot write a command with the cursor on any other line.
2 LDI
3 MOV
M
100
Command line (Place the cursor on this line.)
12
D
D
0
10
Operand, set value line (Cannot operate on this line.)
(2) Commands using a text string constant for a command operand (such as ASC command)
With the MELSEC-FX list editor, text string constants cannot be written as operands. (such as ASC
commands)
Use GX Developer for writing such commands.
(2) Example
Input "DMOVP D0 D2".
Stop the FX PLC
200
201
202
203
< WRITE >
ChNo.[1]
FNC
NOP
NOP
NOP
*1
MODE
D
ChNo.[1]
< READ >
Set the
WRITE or
INSERT
mode.
With
or
, move the
cursor to the position to
overwrite/insert the command.
200
DMOVP
203
NOP
D
200
201
202
203
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
200
13 - 18
2
The MOV command is FNC12.
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
209
SP
P
12
0
SP
DMOVP
NOP
D
12
D
D
FNC
*1
1
0
2
2
GO
13.4.6
Changing operands, set values
Changes the operand section of an applied instruction and OUT (T, C) command set value.
 Operation
MODE
Stop the FX PLC
Input the device name and device number
SP
GO
Read mode
*1
For decimal numbers, input K, then the number.
For hexadecimal numbers, input H, then the number.
POINT
Moving the cursor to the line on which the operand or set value is to be changed
When starting to change an operand or a set value, place the cursor on the line of the operand or set value to be
changed (the line on which the step number is not displayed).
If you place the cursor on the command line, the input operation is not possible.
2
3
LDI
MOV
M
100
12
D
D
0
10
Command line (Cannot
operate on this line.)
Operand, set value line
(Place the cursor on this line.)
 Example
Changing "MOV D0 D10" to "MOV D0 D123"
Stop the FX PLC
3
MOV
8
12
D
D
M
< WRITE >
ChNo.[1]
LD
0
10
10
ChNo.[1]
< READ >
Set the
WRITE or
INSERT
mode.
Move the cursor to the changed
location with
or
SP
3
8
D
MOV
LD
1
2
FX LIST EDITOR
MODE
3
12
D
0
D
123
M 10
13
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
13 - 19
13.4.7
Deleting commands
Deletes one command at a time from a sequence program.
 Operation
Stop the FX PLC
MODE
GO
Move the cursor to the command to be deleted.
(DELETE mode)
POINT
When moving the cursor to the position where the command is to be deleted.
Place the cursor on the command line (the line on which the step number is displayed).
You cannot delete the command if the cursor is placed on the line of an operand or set value.
2 LDI
3 MOV
M
100
12
D
D
0
10
Command line (Place the cursor on this line.)
Operand, set value line (Cannot operate on this line.)
 Example
Deleting "OUT T10 K100"
Stop the FX PLC
8
9
< WRITE >
ChNo.[1]
MODE
LD
X
10
10
100
002
GO
< READ >
Set the
WRITE or
INSERT
mode.
Move the cursor to the command to be
deleted with
,
or the STEP key. *1
13 - 20
M
T
K
12
ChNo.[1]
LD
OUT
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
8
9
10
13
LD
LD
OR
AND
M
X
X
D
10
002
020Z1
1500.F
13.4.8
Sequence program all clear
Clears all the sequence programs.
 Operation
Stop the FX PLC
MODE
NOP
A
GO
(WRITE mode)
 Example
Clears all the sequence programs.
Stop the FX PLC
! Caution
The program will be erased.
Press "OK" to continue.
< WRITE >
ChNo.[1]
MODE
OK
ChNo.[1]
< READ >
NOP
OUT
LDI
MOV
A
OK
0
1
2
3
NOP
0
1
2
3
Set the
WRITE
mode.
Y
M
Cancel
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
000
100
12
GO
Items cleared when All Clear for a sequence program is performed
When All Clear is executed, the parameters before program execution are initialized and Latch Clear is executed.
The memory space becomes the default value, the comment area a 0 block, the file register space a 0 block, and
keywords unregistered.
After All Clear, set the above parameters etc. again.
FX LIST EDITOR
POINT
13
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
13 - 21
13.4.9
PLC diagnostics
Displays the FX PLC error message, error code, and step at which the error occurred.
 Operation
[PLC diagnostics]
OP
GO
OP
Select [PLC diagnostics] with
or
GO
 PLC diagnostics screen
The following describes the contents displayed on the PLC diagnostics screen and the function of on-screen key.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
No.
13 - 22
Item
2)
3)
Display contents
1)
Error message
Displays the error message. (I/O configuration error/PLC hardware error/PC/HPP
communication error/Serial communication error/Parameter error/Syntax error/Circuit error/
Operation error)
2)
Detail
Displays the error code.
3)
Step
Displays the step number in the sequence program at which the error occurred.
(This is displayed only for a syntax error, circuit error, or operation error.)
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
HINT
Error details
For details on an FX PLC error, refer to the following.
Programming manual for the FX CPU used
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the PLC diagnostics screen.
Key
Function
FX LIST EDITOR
Exits the PLC diagnostics.
13
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
13 - 23
13.4.10 Parameter setting
Sets FX PLC parameters.
 Parameters that can be changed and change targets
(1) Parameters that can be changed
The parameters that can be changed with the MELSEC-FX list editor and the target FX PLCs are as follows.
(
: Can be set/changed
: Cannot be set/changed)
Target CPU
Item
FX0(S)
/FX0N
FX1
FX2(C)
FX1S
FX1N(C)
FX2N(C)
FX3S
FX3G(C)
FX3U(C)
Memory space setting
File register space setting
*1
Latch range setting
*2
*2
*2
RUN terminal setting
Initialization of parameters
*1
*2
When connecting an FX0(S), set "0".
Setting other than "0" causes a parameter error.
When the parameters are initialized, the display on the MELSEC-FX list editor is different from the FX PLC default values, but do
not change the latch range. Changing the latch range causes an error.
(2) Change targets
When a memory cassette is mounted, the parameters in the memory cassette are targeted for changes.
 Operation
*1
Stop the FX PLC
OP
[Parameter setting]
GO
*1
Stop the FX PLC
OP
Select [Parameter setting] with
GO
*1
13 - 24
When checking parameters (not changing), it is not necessary to stop the PLC.
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
or
.
 Parameter setting screen
The following describes the contents displayed on the PLC diagnostics screen and the function of on-screen keys.
(1) Displayed contents
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
No.
Item
Display contents
Sets the memory space (number of steps).
1)
Memory capacity
2)
File reg. capacity
3)
Latch range
4)
RUN terminal input
5)
Default
If you touch the *K
section, you can change the memory space.
Sets the memory space (number of blocks) allocated to the file register.
Touch the
section and input the number of blocks.
Sets the latch range (power failure hold area).
Touch the number display section and input the value.
Sets whether or not to use one of the FX PLC input terminals for RUN input.
Touch the
section and set the device to be set for the RUN terminal.
Initializes the parameters
Memory space for kana comments after changing memory space, file register space
If the memory space is set smaller than the total of the file register space and kana comment space, the kana
comment space is automatically reduced.
(With the MELSEC-FX list editor, the kana comment space is not displayed.)
Note that if any setting as described below is made, the kana comment space is reduced.
(Settings that reduce kana comment space and the kana comment space after setting change)
Settings resulting in Nm < Nf 500 + Nk 500 + 500
Kana comment space (steps) after setting change =
Nm - Nf x 500 - 500
500
Nm : Memory space after change (steps)
Nf : File register space after change (blocks)
Nk : Comment space before change (blocks)
FX LIST EDITOR
POINT
13
HINT
Settable range and default value
The settable range and the default value depend on the FX PLC type.
For details of the settable range and the default value, refer to the following.
Programming manual for the FX PLC used
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
13 - 25
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the parameter setting screen.
Key
Function
Initializes the parameters
Completes the changed setting contents.
Ends parameter setting.
13 - 26
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
13.4.11 Keywords
Registers, deletes, releases protection for, and sets protection for the FX PLC keywords.
 Function usability of the MELSEC-FX list editor for keyword protection levels
The functions that can be used with the MELSEC-FX list editor depend on the keyword protection level.
(
: Available,
: Unavailable)
Keyword protection level
All operation protect
(All on-line
Function
operation protect)
Reading
sequence
programs
Writing
sequence
programs
*2
Read/Incorrect write
protection (Read/
write protect)
Incorrect write
protect (Write
*2
protect)
Keyword not
registered/keyword
protection canceled
*2
Reference
Displaying sequence
programs
5.4.3
Searching commands/
devices
5.4.4
Writing commands
5.4.5
Changing operands/set
values
5.4.6
Inserting commands
5.4.5
Deleting commands
5.4.7
Sequence program all clear
5.4.8
*1
PLC diagnostics
5.4.9
Parameter setting
5.4.10
*1
When the 2nd keyword is set to an FX PLC that supports 2nd keyword, it becomes "
*2
The names within the parentheses ( ) are for when a keyword + 2nd keyword is set.
" (cannot be used).
 Operation
[Keyword setup]
GO
OP
Select [Keyword setup] with
or
.
FX LIST EDITOR
OP
13
GO
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
13 - 27
 Keyword screen and protection level
When [Keyword setup] is selected with the MELSEC-FX list editor, the keyword screen is displayed.
For the keyword operation, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
HINT
Keywords
For details of the keyword, refer to the following.
Programming manual for the FX PLC used
13 - 28
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
13.4.12 List monitor
The status of contacts and coils in a sequence program is displayed.
 Operation
OP
[ List Monitor ]
GO
OP
Select [List Monitor] with
or
.
GO
When the list monitor is started on the FX list editor screen,
the step numbers displayed on the FX list editor screen is
displayed on the list monitor screen.
Starting list monitor with special function switches (FX list monitor)
With setting special function switches (FX list monitor), the list monitor can be started on the monitor screen.
When the list monitor is started on the monitor screen, the list editor cannot be used.
For how to set special function switches, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
FX LIST EDITOR
POINT
13
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
13 - 29
 Displays and key functions
The following describes the displays for the list monitor.
3)
1)
2)
No
Item
1)
List display
area*1
2)
Keys
Display contents
The status of contacts and coils is displayed on the left of device displays.
The same operations as in the READ mode of the FX list editor can be executed.
13.4.3 Sequence program display
Ends the list monitor.
When the list monitor is executed on the FX list editor screen, the screen is switched to the FX
list editor screen.
3)
*1
The status of contacts and coils is displayed as below.
Status
Type of instructio
Description
Displayed
LD, AND, ORC(ontact instruction (Normal open))
LDI, ANI, ORI(Contact instruction (Normal close))
Contact
ON
Not displayed
OFF
Contact
OFF
ON
TC: Coil
ON
OFF
Except TC: Contact
ON
OFF
TC: Reset
ON
OFF
OUT, SET
Value: 0
Value: Except 0
Except TC and word device:
Contac
OFF
ON
MC, STL
Contact
ON
OFF
LDP, ANDP, ORP, LDF, ANDF, ORF
(Rise or fall contact instruction)
Not monitored
RST
13 - 30
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
Word device
Always
not displayed
13.4.13 Hard copy output
Screens of the MELSEC-FX list editor can be stored to a data strage in BMP/JPEG file format.
Refer to the following for the hard copy.
• Starting the MELSEC-FX list editor from the FX ladder monitor
12.4.2 Hard copy output
• Setting the hard copy with GT Designer3
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
13.4.14 Action for an incorrect key input
If an incorrect key is input, cancel the input contents.
 Operation
(1) Before touching the GO key (before reading/writing the input contents)
Before touching the GO key, touch the CLR key.
After touching the GO key (after reading/writing the input contents)
Write the command again. (
13.4.5 Writing commands)
Commands finalized by writing and inserting operations are revised (overwritten) with the program writing.
FX LIST EDITOR
(2)
13
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.4 Operation Procedures
13 - 31
13.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
This section describes the error messages displayed when the MELSEC-FX list editor is executed, and corrective action.
Error Messeage
Description
Can not display while protected.
Can not operate while
protected.
The all-operation protect, anti-plagiarism, or
incorrect write protect keyword is set.
PLC parameter error.
An FX PLC parameter is defective.
PLC communications error.
The communication with the FX PLC is
defective.
PLC is running.
A writing operation etc. has been made
while the FX PLC is running.
• The memory to write to is EPROM.
• The protect switch of the EEPROM is on.
Can not write.
Corrective action
• Check the protected operation.
• Clear the keyword protection or delete the keyword.
13.4.11 Keywords
Set correct parameters in the FX PLC.
• Check the FX PLC, cable, and GOT for abnormality.
• Check whether the communication settings are correct or
not.
Stop the FX PLC.
• Set other than EPROM for the memory to write to.
• Switch off the protect switch of the EEPROM.
Step number is out of a range.
The specified step number exceeded the
maximum number.
Specify a step number below the maximum value.
Not found.
The specified command cannot be found.
Proceed to the next operation.
Not found.
The specified device cannot be found.
Proceed to the next operation.
Step overflow.
The program may exceed the available
space. (Writing is not executed.)
Check the program memory space and delete commands to
keep it within the space.
13.4.7 Deleting commands
Command error.
An invalid command (non-existent
command) was specified.
Input the correct command.
Protected by a block password.
The sequence program is protected by a
block password at the PLC reading.
Release the block password for the sequence program.
POINT
How to erase an error message
An error message is not erased even if the cause of the error is eliminated.
To erase an error message, touch a key on the MELSEC-FX list editor screen.
13 - 32
13. FX LIST EDITOR
13.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
REVISIONS
* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date
* Manual Number
Revision
Sep., 2013
SH(NA)-081196ENG-A
First printing : GT Designer3 Version1.100E
Nov., 2013
SH(NA)-081196ENG-B
Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.104J
• Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed
• Abbreviations and generic terms changed
• NZ2DL is added to the compatible models for the BOX data logger.
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this
manual.
© 2013 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
REVISIONS - 1
REVISIONS - 2
WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range
If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the
gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the
customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that
involves replacement of the failed module.
[Gratis Warranty Term]
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty-six (36) months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the
longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty-two (42) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not
exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range]
(1) The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified.
If requested by the customer, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure
diagnosis at the customer’s expence.
The primary failure diagnosis will, however, be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation.
(2) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc., which follow
the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product.
(3) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the
user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions or
structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry
standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly
serviced or replaced.
5. Replacing consumable parts such as the battery, backlight and fuses.
6. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure
such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
7. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi.
8. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.
2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production
(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.
3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center
may differ.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability
Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not
to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special
damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to
products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other
tasks.
5. Changes in product specifications
The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.
6. Product application
(1) In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major
accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device, and that backup and fail-safe
functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.
(2) The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc.
Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by
respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such as for Railway
companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications.
In addition, applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical applications,
incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement, and safety devices, shall also
be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications.
However, in certain cases, some applications may be possible, providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative
outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances,
solely at our discretion.
In some of three cases, however, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application, provided that
the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention, the application is clearly defined and any special quality is
not required.
GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States.
MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA.
VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd. in the United States and other countries.
Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
SH(NA)-081196ENG-B
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor)
MODEL
GOT2000-U-MONITOR-E
MODEL
CODE
1D7MJ7
SH(NA)-081196ENG-B(1311)MEE
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy,
Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN
Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan, November 2013.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising